Scripture · Sanskrit Bible with the King James Version · the Pāli Canon

Search Scripture Search

Chapters on Legal Topics 8 खन्धक 8

Chapter: 12345678910111213141516171819202122

1. Jīvakavatthu

Pāli in Devanagari; under each word its Roman pronunciation, syllable by syllable (ṃ = nasal hum). Tap a Pāli word for its meaning (PTS Pāli-English Dictionary); tap again to open it in the Pāli dictionary.

Verse: 12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970717273747576777879808182838485868788899091929394959697989910010110210310410510610710810911011111211311411511611711811912012112212312412512612712812913013113213313413513613713813914014114214314414514614714814915015115215315415515615715815916016116216316416516616716816917017117217317417517617717817918018118218318418518618718818919019119219319419519619719819920020120220320420520620720820921021121221321421521621721821922022122222322422522622722822923023123223323423523623723823924024124224324424524624724824925025125225325425525625725825926026126226326426526626726826927027127227327427527627727827928028128228328428528628728828929029129229329429529629729829930030130230330430530630730830931031131231331431531631731831932032132232332432532632732832933033133233333433533633733833934034134234334434534634734834935035135235335435535635735835936036136236336436536636736836937037137237337437537637737837938038138238338438538638738838939039139239339439539639739839940040140240340440540640740840941041141241341441541641741841942042142242342442542642742842943043143243343443543643743843944044144244344444544644744844945045145245345445545645745845946046146246346446546646746846947047147247347447547647747847948048148248348448548648748848949049149249349449549649749849950050150250350450550650750850951051151251351451551651751851952052152252352452552652752852953053153253353453553653753853954054154254354454554654754854955055155255355455555655755855956056156256356456556656756856957057157257357457557657757857958058158258358458558658758858959059159259359459559659759859960060160260360460560660760860961061161261361461561661761861962062162262362462562662762862963063163263363463563663763863964064164264364464564664764864965065165265365465565665765865966066166266366466566666766866967067167267367467567667767867968068168268368468568668768868969069169269369469569669769869970070170270370470570670770870971071171271371471571671771871972072172272372472572672772872973073173273373473573673773873974074174274374474574674774874975075175275375475575675775875976076176276376476576676776876977077177277377477577677777877978078178278378478578678778878979079179279379479579679779879980080180280380480580680780880981081181281381481581681781881982082182282382482582682782882983083183283383483583683783883984084184284384484584684784884985085185285385485585685785885986086186286386486586686786886987087187287387487587687787887988088188288388488588688788888989089189289389489589689789889990090190290390490590690790890991091191291391491591691791891992092192292392492592692792892993093193293393493593693793893994094194294394494594694794894995095195295395495595695795895996096196296396496596696796896997097197297397497597697797897998098198298398498598698798898999099199299399499599699799899910001001100210031004100510061007100810091010101110121013101410151016101710181019102010211022102310241025102610271028102910301031103210331034103510361037103810391040104110421043104410451046104710481049105010511052105310541055105610571058105910601061106210631064106510661067106810691070107110721073107410751076107710781079108010811082108310841085108610871088108910901091109210931094109510961097109810991100110111021103110411051106110711081109111011111112111311141115111611171118111911201121112211231124112511261127112811291130113111321133113411351136113711381139114011411142114311441145114611471148114911501151115211531154115511561157115811591160116111621163116411651166116711681169117011711172117311741175117611771178117911801181118211831184118511861187118811891190119111921193119411951196119711981199120012011202120312041205120612071208120912101211121212131214121512161217121812191220122112221223122412251226122712281229123012311232123312341235123612371238123912401241124212431244124512461247124812491250125112521253125412551256125712581259126012611262126312641265126612671268126912701271127212731274127512761277127812791280128112821283128412851286128712881289129012911292129312941295129612971298129913001301130213031304130513061307130813091310131113121313131413151316131713181319132013211322132313241325132613271328132913301331133213331334133513361337133813391340134113421343134413451346134713481349135013511352135313541355135613571358135913601361136213631364136513661367136813691370137113721373137413751376137713781379138013811382138313841385138613871388138913901391139213931394139513961397139813991400140114021403140414051406140714081409141014111412141314141415141614171418141914201421142214231424142514261427142814291430143114321433143414351436143714381439144014411442144314441445144614471448144914501451145214531454145514561457145814591460146114621463146414651466146714681469147014711472147314741475147614771478147914801481148214831484148514861487148814891490149114921493149414951496149714981499150015011502150315041505150615071508150915101511151215131514151515161517151815191520152115221523152415251526152715281529153015311532153315341535 · Hide pronunciation

1. 1

   थेरवादthe·ra·vā·da विनयपिटकvi·na·ya·pi·ṭa·ka

   Theravāda Vinayapiṭaka

   Theravāda Collection on Monastic Law

2. 2

   महावग्गma·hā·vag·ga

   Mahāvagga

   The Great Division

3. 3

   8। चीवरक्खन्धकcī·va·rak·khan·dha·ka

   8. Cīvarakkhandhaka

   The chapter on robes

4. 4

   1। जीवकवत्थुjī·va·ka·vat·thu

   1. Jīvakavatthu

   1. The account of Jīvaka

5. 5

   तेनte·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti वेळुवनेve·ḷu·va·ne कलन्दकनिवापे।ka·lan·da·ka·ni·vā·pe

   Tena samayena buddho bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.

   At one time the Buddha was staying at Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove, the squirrel sanctuary.

6. 6

   तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na वेसालीve·sā·lī इद्धाid·dhā चेवce·va होतिho·ti फिताphi·tā चca बहुजनाba·hu·ja·nā चca आकिण्णमनुस्साā·kiṇ·ṇa·ma·nus·sā चca सुभिक्खाsu·bhik·khā च;ca

   Tena kho pana samayena vesālī iddhā ceva hoti phitā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇamanussā ca subhikkhā ca;

   At that time Vesālī was prosperous and crowded with people, and there was plenty of food.

7. 7

   सत्तsat·ta चca पासादसहस्सानिpā·sā·da·sa·has·sā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca पासादसतानिpā·sā·da·sa·tā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca पासादा;pā·sā·dā

   satta ca pāsādasahassāni satta ca pāsādasatāni satta ca pāsādā;

   There were seven thousand seven hundred and seven stilt houses,

8. 8

   सत्तsat·ta चca कूटागारसहस्सानिkū·ṭā·gā·ra·sa·has·sā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca कूटागारसतानिkū·ṭā·gā·ra·sa·tā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca कूटागारानि;kū·ṭā·gā·rā·ni

   satta ca kūṭāgārasahassāni satta ca kūṭāgārasatāni satta ca kūṭāgārāni;

   and the same number of houses with peaked roofs,

9. 9

   सत्तsat·ta चca आरामसहस्सानिā·rā·ma·sa·has·sā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca आरामसतानिā·rā·ma·sa·tā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca आरामा;ā·rā·mā

   satta ca ārāmasahassāni satta ca ārāmasatāni satta ca ārāmā;

   parks,

10. 10

    सत्तsat·ta चca पोक्खरणीसहस्सानिpok·kha·ra·ṇī·sa·has·sā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca पोक्खरणीसतानिpok·kha·ra·ṇī·sa·tā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca पोक्खरणियो;pok·kha·ra·ṇi·yo

    satta ca pokkharaṇīsahassāni satta ca pokkharaṇīsatāni satta ca pokkharaṇiyo;

    and lotus ponds.

11. 11

    अम्बपालीam·ba·pā·lī चca गणिकाga·ṇi·kā अभिरूपाa·bhi·rū·pā होतिho·ti दस्सनीयाdas·sa·nī·yā पासादिकाpā·sā·di·kā परमायpa·ra·mā·ya वण्णपोक्खरतायvaṇ·ṇa·pok·kha·ra·tā·ya समन्नागता,sa·man·nā·ga·tā पदक्खिणाpa·dak·khi·ṇā नच्चेnac·ce चca गीतेgī·te चca वादितेvā·di·te च,ca अभिसटाa·bhi·sa·ṭā अत्थिकानंat·thi·kā·naṃ अत्थिकानंat·thi·kā·naṃ मनुस्सानंma·nus·sā·naṃ पञ्ञासायpañ·ñā·sā·ya चca रत्तिंrat·tiṃ गच्छति;gac·cha·ti

    ambapālī ca gaṇikā abhirūpā hoti dassanīyā pāsādikā paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgatā, padakkhiṇā nacce ca gīte ca vādite ca, abhisaṭā atthikānaṁ atthikānaṁ manussānaṁ paññāsāya ca rattiṁ gacchati;

    And there was the courtesan Ambapālī who was attractive and gracious and had the most beautiful complexion. She was skilled in dancing, singing, and instrumental music. She was highly desired, charging fifty coins for a night.

12. 12

    तायtā·ya चca वेसालीve·sā·lī भिय्योसोbhiy·yo·so मत्तायmat·tā·ya उपसोभति।u·pa·so·bha·ti

    tāya ca vesālī bhiyyoso mattāya upasobhati.

    Because of her, Vesālī was even more splendid.

13. 13

    अथa·tha खोkho राजगहकोrā·ja·ga·ha·ko नेगमोne·ga·mo वेसालिंve·sā·liṃ अगमासिa·ga·mā·si केनचिदेवke·na·ci·de·va करणीयेन।ka·ra·ṇī·ye·na

    Atha kho rājagahako negamo vesāliṁ agamāsi kenacideva karaṇīyena.

    On one occasion the householder association of Rājagaha traveled to Vesālī on business,

14. 14

    अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho राजगहकोrā·ja·ga·ha·ko नेगमोne·ga·mo वेसालिंve·sā·liṃ इद्धञ्चेवid·dhañ·ce·va फितञ्चphi·tañ·ca बहुजनञ्चba·hu·ja·nañ·ca आकिण्णमनुस्सञ्चā·kiṇ·ṇa·ma·nus·sañ·ca सुभिक्खञ्च;su·bhik·khañ·ca

    Addasā kho rājagahako negamo vesāliṁ iddhañceva phitañca bahujanañca ākiṇṇamanussañca subhikkhañca;

    and they saw all these marvelous qualities of the city,

15. 15

    सत्तsat·ta चca पासादसहस्सानिpā·sā·da·sa·has·sā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca पासादसतानिpā·sā·da·sa·tā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca पासादे;pā·sā·de

    satta ca pāsādasahassāni satta ca pāsādasatāni satta ca pāsāde;

    (Pāli only)

16. 16

    सत्तsat·ta चca कूटागारसहस्सानिkū·ṭā·gā·ra·sa·has·sā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca कूटागारसतानिkū·ṭā·gā·ra·sa·tā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca कूटागारानि;kū·ṭā·gā·rā·ni

    satta ca kūṭāgārasahassāni satta ca kūṭāgārasatāni satta ca kūṭāgārāni;

    (Pāli only)

17. 17

    सत्तsat·ta चca आरामसहस्सानिā·rā·ma·sa·has·sā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca आरामसतानिā·rā·ma·sa·tā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca आरामे;ā·rā·me

    satta ca ārāmasahassāni satta ca ārāmasatāni satta ca ārāme;

    (Pāli only)

18. 18

    सत्तsat·ta चca पोक्खरणीसहस्सानिpok·kha·ra·ṇī·sa·has·sā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca पोक्खरणीसतानिpok·kha·ra·ṇī·sa·tā·ni सत्तsat·ta चca पोक्खरणियो;pok·kha·ra·ṇi·yo

    satta ca pokkharaṇīsahassāni satta ca pokkharaṇīsatāni satta ca pokkharaṇiyo;

    (Pāli only)

19. 19

    अम्बपालिञ्चam·ba·pā·liñ·ca गणिकंga·ṇi·kaṃ अभिरूपंa·bhi·rū·paṃ दस्सनीयंdas·sa·nī·yaṃ पासादिकंpā·sā·di·kaṃ परमायpa·ra·mā·ya वण्णपोक्खरतायvaṇ·ṇa·pok·kha·ra·tā·ya समन्नागतं,sa·man·nā·ga·taṃ पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ नच्चेnac·ce चca गीतेgī·te चca वादितेvā·di·te च,ca अभिसटंa·bhi·sa·ṭaṃ अत्थिकानंat·thi·kā·naṃ अत्थिकानंat·thi·kā·naṃ मनुस्सानंma·nus·sā·naṃ पञ्ञासायpañ·ñā·sā·ya चca रत्तिंrat·tiṃ गच्छन्तिं,gac·chan·tiṃ तायtā·ya चca वेसालिंve·sā·liṃ भिय्योसोbhiy·yo·so मत्तायmat·tā·ya उपसोभन्तिं।u·pa·so·bhan·tiṃ

    ambapāliñca gaṇikaṁ abhirūpaṁ dassanīyaṁ pāsādikaṁ paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgataṁ, padakkhiṇaṁ nacce ca gīte ca vādite ca, abhisaṭaṁ atthikānaṁ atthikānaṁ manussānaṁ paññāsāya ca rattiṁ gacchantiṁ, tāya ca vesāliṁ bhiyyoso mattāya upasobhantiṁ.

    including Ambapālī.

20. 20

    अथa·tha खोkho राजगहकोrā·ja·ga·ha·ko नेगमोne·ga·mo वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ तंtaṃ करणीयंka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ तीरेत्वाtī·ret·vā पुनदेवpu·na·de·va राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ पच्चागञ्छि।pac·cā·gañ·chi

    Atha kho rājagahako negamo vesāliyaṁ taṁ karaṇīyaṁ tīretvā punadeva rājagahaṁ paccāgañchi.

    When they had concluded their business, they returned to Rājagaha.

21. 21

    येनye·na राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā राजानंrā·jā·naṃ मागधंmā·ga·dhaṃ सेनियंse·ni·yaṃ बिम्बिसारंbim·bi·sā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Yena rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ seniyaṁ bimbisāraṁ etadavoca—

    They then went to King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha

22. 22

    “वेसाली,ve·sā·lī देव,de·va इद्धाid·dhā चेवce·va फिताphi·tā चca बहुजनाba·hu·ja·nā चca आकिण्णमनुस्साā·kiṇ·ṇa·ma·nus·sā चca सुभिक्खाsu·bhik·khā च;ca

    “vesālī, deva, iddhā ceva phitā ca bahujanā ca ākiṇṇamanussā ca subhikkhā ca;

    and told him about everything they had seen,

23. 23

    सत्तsat·ta चca पासादसहस्सानिpā·sā·da·sa·has·sā·ni …पे…pe

    satta ca pāsādasahassāni …pe…

    (Pāli only)

24. 24

    तायtā·ya चca वेसालीve·sā·lī भिय्योसोbhiy·yo·so मत्तायmat·tā·ya उपसोभति।u·pa·so·bha·ti

    tāya ca vesālī bhiyyoso mattāya upasobhati.

    (Pāli only)

25. 25

    साधु,sā·dhu देव,de·va मयम्पिma·yam·pi गणिकंga·ṇi·kaṃ वुट्ठापेस्सामा”ति।vuṭ·ṭhā·pes·sā·mā

    Sādhu, deva, mayampi gaṇikaṁ vuṭṭhāpessāmā”ti.

    adding, “Sir, please appoint a courtesan.”

26. 26

    “तेनte·na हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe तादिसिंtā·di·siṃ कुमारिंku·mā·riṃ जानाथjā·nā·tha यंyaṃ तुम्हेtum·he गणिकंga·ṇi·kaṃ वुट्ठापेय्याथा”ति।vuṭ·ṭhā·pey·yā·thā

    “Tena hi, bhaṇe, tādisiṁ kumāriṁ jānātha yaṁ tumhe gaṇikaṁ vuṭṭhāpeyyāthā”ti.

    “Well then, find a suitable girl.”

27. 27

    तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he सालवतीsā·la·va·tī नामnā·ma कुमारीku·mā·rī अभिरूपाa·bhi·rū·pā होतिho·ti दस्सनीयाdas·sa·nī·yā पासादिकाpā·sā·di·kā परमायpa·ra·mā·ya वण्णपोक्खरतायvaṇ·ṇa·pok·kha·ra·tā·ya समन्नागता।sa·man·nā·ga·tā

    Tena kho pana samayena rājagahe sālavatī nāma kumārī abhirūpā hoti dassanīyā pāsādikā paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgatā.

    At that time in Rājagaha there was a girl called Sālavatī who was attractive and gracious and had the most beautiful complexion,

28. 28

    अथa·tha खोkho राजगहकोrā·ja·ga·ha·ko नेगमोne·ga·mo सालवतिंsā·la·va·tiṃ कुमारिंku·mā·riṃ गणिकंga·ṇi·kaṃ वुट्ठापेसि।vuṭ·ṭhā·pe·si

    Atha kho rājagahako negamo sālavatiṁ kumāriṁ gaṇikaṁ vuṭṭhāpesi.

    and the householder association appointed her as courtesan.

29. 29

    अथa·tha खोkho सालवतीsā·la·va·tī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va पदक्खिणाpa·dak·khi·ṇā अहोसिa·ho·si नच्चेnac·ce चca गीतेgī·te चca वादितेvā·di·te च,ca अभिसटाa·bhi·sa·ṭā अत्थिकानंat·thi·kā·naṃ अत्थिकानंat·thi·kā·naṃ मनुस्सानंma·nus·sā·naṃ पटिसतेनpa·ṭi·sa·te·na चca रत्तिंrat·tiṃ गच्छति।gac·cha·ti

    Atha kho sālavatī gaṇikā nacirasseva padakkhiṇā ahosi nacce ca gīte ca vādite ca, abhisaṭā atthikānaṁ atthikānaṁ manussānaṁ paṭisatena ca rattiṁ gacchati.

    Soon afterwards she became skilled in dancing, singing, and instrumental music. She was highly desired, charging a hundred coins for a night.

30. 30

    अथa·tha खोkho सालवतीsā·la·va·tī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va गब्भिनीgab·bhi·nī अहोसि।a·ho·si

    Atha kho sālavatī gaṇikā nacirasseva gabbhinī ahosi.

    Soon enough Sālavatī became pregnant.

31. 31

    अथa·tha खोkho सालवतियाsā·la·va·ti·yā गणिकायga·ṇi·kā·ya एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

    Atha kho sālavatiyā gaṇikāya etadahosi—

    She thought,

32. 32

    “इत्थीit·thī खोkho गब्भिनीgab·bhi·nī पुरिसानंpu·ri·sā·naṃ अमनापा।a·ma·nā·pā

    “itthī kho gabbhinī purisānaṁ amanāpā.

    “Men don’t like pregnant women.

33. 33

    सचेsa·ce मंmaṃ कोचिko·ci जानिस्सति—jā·nis·sa·ti

    Sace maṁ koci jānissati—

    If anyone finds out about this,

34. 34

    सालवतीsā·la·va·tī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā गब्भिनीति,gab·bhi·nī·ti सब्बोsab·bo मेme सक्कारोsak·kā·ro भञ्जिस्सति।bhañ·jis·sa·ti

    sālavatī gaṇikā gabbhinīti, sabbo me sakkāro bhañjissati.

    it will ruin my career.

35. 35

    यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ पटिवेदेय्यन्”ति।pa·ṭi·ve·dey·yan

    Yannūnāhaṁ gilānaṁ paṭivedeyyan”ti.

    Let me announce that I’m sick.”

36. 36

    अथa·tha खोkho सालवतीsā·la·va·tī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā दोवारिकंdo·vā·ri·kaṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

    Atha kho sālavatī gaṇikā dovārikaṁ āṇāpesi—

    She told her doorman,

37. 37

    “मा,mā भणेbha·ṇe दोवारिक,do·vā·ri·ka कोचिko·ci पुरिसोpu·ri·so पाविसि।pā·vi·si

    “mā, bhaṇe dovārika, koci puriso pāvisi.

    “Don’t allow any man to enter.

38. 38

    योyo चca मंmaṃ पुच्छति,puc·cha·ti ‘गिलाना’तिgi·lā·nā पटिवेदेही”ति।pa·ṭi·ve·de·hī

    Yo ca maṁ pucchati, ‘gilānā’ti paṭivedehī”ti.

    If anyone asks for me, tell them I’m sick.”

39. 39

    “एवं,e·vaṃ अय्ये”तिay·ye खोkho सोso दोवारिकोdo·vā·ri·ko सालवतियाsā·la·va·ti·yā गणिकायga·ṇi·kā·ya पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

    “Evaṁ, ayye”ti kho so dovāriko sālavatiyā gaṇikāya paccassosi.

    “Yes, ma’am.”

40. 40

    अथa·tha खोkho सालवतीsā·la·va·tī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā तस्सtas·sa गब्भस्सgab·bhas·sa परिपाकमन्वायpa·ri·pā·ka·man·vā·ya पुत्तंput·taṃ विजायि।vi·jā·yi

    Atha kho sālavatī gaṇikā tassa gabbhassa paripākamanvāya puttaṁ vijāyi.

    Her pregnancy progressed, and eventually she gave birth to a son.

41. 41

    अथa·tha खोkho सालवतीsā·la·va·tī गणिकाga·ṇi·kā दासिंdā·siṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

    Atha kho sālavatī gaṇikā dāsiṁ āṇāpesi—

    She told her slave,

42. 42

    “हन्द,han·da जे,je इमंi·maṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ कत्तरसुप्पेkat·ta·ra·sup·pe पक्खिपित्वाpak·khi·pit·vā नीहरित्वाnī·ha·rit·vā सङ्कारकूटेsaṅ·kā·ra·kū·ṭe छड्डेही”ति।chaḍ·ḍe·hī

    “handa, je, imaṁ dārakaṁ kattarasuppe pakkhipitvā nīharitvā saṅkārakūṭe chaḍḍehī”ti.

    “Listen, take this boy away in a winnowing basket and throw him on the trash heap.”

43. 43

    “एवं,e·vaṃ अय्ये”तिay·ye खोkho साsā दासीdā·sī सालवतियाsā·la·va·ti·yā गणिकायga·ṇi·kā·ya पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā तंtaṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ कत्तरसुप्पेkat·ta·ra·sup·pe पक्खिपित्वाpak·khi·pit·vā नीहरित्वाnī·ha·rit·vā सङ्कारकूटेsaṅ·kā·ra·kū·ṭe छड्डेसि।chaḍ·ḍe·si

    “Evaṁ, ayye”ti kho sā dāsī sālavatiyā gaṇikāya paṭissutvā taṁ dārakaṁ kattarasuppe pakkhipitvā nīharitvā saṅkārakūṭe chaḍḍesi.

    Saying, “Yes, ma’am,” she did just that.

44. 44

    तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अभयोa·bha·yo नामnā·ma राजकुमारोrā·ja·ku·mā·ro कालस्सेवkā·las·se·va राजुपट्ठानंrā·ju·paṭ·ṭhā·naṃ गच्छन्तोgac·chan·to अद्दसad·da·sa तंtaṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ काकेहिkā·ke·hi सम्परिकिण्णं,sam·pa·ri·kiṇ·ṇaṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na मनुस्सेma·nus·se पुच्छि—puc·chi

    Tena kho pana samayena abhayo nāma rājakumāro kālasseva rājupaṭṭhānaṁ gacchanto addasa taṁ dārakaṁ kākehi samparikiṇṇaṁ, disvāna manusse pucchi—

    On the same morning, as Prince Abhaya was walking to an audience with the king, he saw that boy surrounded by crows. He asked his companions,

45. 45

    “किंkiṃ एतं,e·taṃ भणे,bha·ṇe काकेहिkā·ke·hi सम्परिकिण्णन्”ति?sam·pa·ri·kiṇ·ṇan

    “kiṁ etaṁ, bhaṇe, kākehi samparikiṇṇan”ti?

    “What’s that surrounded by crows?”

46. 46

    “दारको,dā·ra·ko देवा”ति।de·vā

    “Dārako, devā”ti.

    “It’s a boy, sir.”

47. 47

    “जीवति,jī·va·ti भणे”ति?bha·ṇe

    “Jīvati, bhaṇe”ti?

    “Is he alive?”

48. 48

    “जीवति,jī·va·ti देवा”ति।de·vā

    “Jīvati, devā”ti.

    “Yes, he’s alive.”

49. 49

    “तेनte·na हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe तंtaṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ अन्तेपुरंan·te·pu·raṃ नेत्वाnet·vā धातीनंdhā·tī·naṃ देथde·tha पोसेतुन्”ति।po·se·tun

    “Tena hi, bhaṇe, taṁ dārakaṁ amhākaṁ antepuraṁ netvā dhātīnaṁ detha posetun”ti.

    “Well then, take him to our compound and give him to the wet-nurses to feed.”

50. 50

    “एवं,e·vaṃ देवा”तिde·vā खोkho तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā अभयस्सa·bha·yas·sa राजकुमारस्सrā·ja·ku·mā·ras·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā तंtaṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ अभयस्सa·bha·yas·sa राजकुमारस्सrā·ja·ku·mā·ras·sa अन्तेपुरंan·te·pu·raṃ नेत्वाnet·vā धातीनंdhā·tī·naṃ अदंसु—a·daṃ·su

    “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho te manussā abhayassa rājakumārassa paṭissutvā taṁ dārakaṁ abhayassa rājakumārassa antepuraṁ netvā dhātīnaṁ adaṁsu—

    Saying, “Yes,” they did as requested.

51. 51

    “पोसेथा”ति।po·se·thā

    “posethā”ti.

    (Pāli only)

52. 52

    तस्सtas·sa जीवतीतिjī·va·tī·ti “जीवको”तिjī·va·ko नामंnā·maṃ अकंसु।a·kaṃ·su

    Tassa jīvatīti “jīvako”ti nāmaṁ akaṁsu.

    When they knew that he would live, they gave him the name Jīvaka, “Survivor”.

53. 53

    कुमारेनku·mā·re·na पोसापितोतिpo·sā·pi·to·ti “कोमारभच्चो”तिko·mā·ra·bhac·co नामंnā·maṃ अकंसु।a·kaṃ·su

    Kumārena posāpitoti “komārabhacco”ti nāmaṁ akaṁsu.

    And because a prince brought him up, they also gave him the name Komārabhacca, “Prince-reared”.

54. 54

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va विञ्ञुतंviñ·ñu·taṃ पापुणि।pā·pu·ṇi

    Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco nacirasseva viññutaṁ pāpuṇi.

    When Jīvaka reached the age of discernment,

55. 55

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co येनye·na अभयोa·bha·yo राजकुमारोrā·ja·ku·mā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā अभयंa·bha·yaṃ राजकुमारंrā·ja·ku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco yena abhayo rājakumāro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā abhayaṁ rājakumāraṁ etadavoca—

    he went to Prince Abhaya and asked him,

56. 56

    “काkā मे,me देव,de·va माता,mā·tā कोko पिता”ति?pi·tā

    “kā me, deva, mātā, ko pitā”ti?

    “Who, sir, are my mother and father?”

57. 57

    “अहम्पिa·ham·pi खोkho ते,te भणेbha·ṇe जीवक,jī·va·ka मातरंmā·ta·raṃ नna जानामि;jā·nā·mi

    “Ahampi kho te, bhaṇe jīvaka, mātaraṁ na jānāmi;

    “I don’t know who your mother is,

58. 58

    अपिa·pi चाहंcā·haṃ तेte पिता;pi·tā

    api cāhaṁ te pitā;

    but I’m your father,

59. 59

    मयासिma·yā·si पोसापितो”ति।po·sā·pi·to

    mayāsi posāpito”ti.

    because I brought you up.”

60. 60

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

    Atha kho jīvakassa komārabhaccassa etadahosi—

    On a later occasion Jīvaka thought,

61. 61

    “इमानिi·mā·ni खोkho राजकुलानिrā·ja·ku·lā·ni नna सुकरानिsu·ka·rā·ni असिप्पेनa·sip·pe·na उपजीवितुं।u·pa·jī·vi·tuṃ

    “imāni kho rājakulāni na sukarāni asippena upajīvituṁ.

    “It’s not easy to make a living in a royal family without a profession.

62. 62

    यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सिप्पंsip·paṃ सिक्खेय्यन्”ति।sik·khey·yan

    Yannūnāhaṁ sippaṁ sikkheyyan”ti.

    Why don’t I learn a profession?”

63. 63

    तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na तक्कसिलायंtak·ka·si·lā·yaṃ दिसापामोक्खोdi·sā·pā·mok·kho वेज्जोvej·jo पटिवसति।pa·ṭi·va·sa·ti

    Tena kho pana samayena takkasilāyaṁ disāpāmokkho vejjo paṭivasati.

    At that time the pre-eminent physician in the world was living at Takkasilā.

64. 64

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co अभयंa·bha·yaṃ राजकुमारंrā·ja·ku·mā·raṃ अनापुच्छाa·nā·puc·chā येनye·na तक्कसिलाtak·ka·si·lā तेनte·na पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

    Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco abhayaṁ rājakumāraṁ anāpucchā yena takkasilā tena pakkāmi.

    Then, without asking permission from Prince Abhaya, Jīvaka left for Takkasilā.

65. 65

    अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na येनye·na तक्कसिला,tak·ka·si·lā येनye·na वेज्जोvej·jo तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तंtaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Anupubbena yena takkasilā, yena vejjo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ vejjaṁ etadavoca—

    When he eventually arrived, he went to that physician and said,

66. 66

    “इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya सिप्पंsip·paṃ सिक्खितुन्”ति।sik·khi·tun

    “icchāmahaṁ, ācariya, sippaṁ sikkhitun”ti.

    “Teacher, I wish to learn the profession.”

67. 67

    “तेनte·na हि,hi भणेbha·ṇe जीवक,jī·va·ka सिक्खस्सू”ति।sik·khas·sū

    “Tena hi, bhaṇe jīvaka, sikkhassū”ti.

    “Well then, Jīvaka, please do so.”

68. 68

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co बहुञ्चba·huñ·ca गण्हातिgaṇ·hā·ti लहुञ्चla·huñ·ca गण्हातिgaṇ·hā·ti सुट्ठुsuṭ·ṭhu चca उपधारेति,u·pa·dhā·re·ti गहितञ्चस्सga·hi·tañ·cas·sa नna सम्मुस्सति।sam·mus·sa·ti

    Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco bahuñca gaṇhāti lahuñca gaṇhāti suṭṭhu ca upadhāreti, gahitañcassa na sammussati.

    Jīvaka learned much, and he learned quickly; he remembered well and did not forget.

69. 69

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa सत्तन्नंsat·tan·naṃ वस्सानंvas·sā·naṃ अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

    Atha kho jīvakassa komārabhaccassa sattannaṁ vassānaṁ accayena etadahosi—

    After seven years, Jīvaka thought,

70. 70

    “अहंa·haṃ खोkho बहुञ्चba·huñ·ca गण्हामिgaṇ·hā·mi लहुञ्चla·huñ·ca गण्हामिgaṇ·hā·mi सुट्ठुsuṭ·ṭhu चca उपधारेमि,u·pa·dhā·re·mi गहितञ्चga·hi·tañ·ca मेme नna सम्मुस्सति,sam·mus·sa·ti सत्तsat·ta चca मेme वस्सानिvas·sā·ni अधीयन्तस्स,a·dhī·yan·tas·sa नयिमस्सna·yi·mas·sa सिप्पस्सsip·pas·sa अन्तोan·to पञ्ञायति।pañ·ñā·ya·ti

    “ahaṁ kho bahuñca gaṇhāmi lahuñca gaṇhāmi suṭṭhu ca upadhāremi, gahitañca me na sammussati, satta ca me vassāni adhīyantassa, nayimassa sippassa anto paññāyati.

    “I’m a good learner, and I’ve been studying for seven years.

71. 71

    कदाka·dā इमस्सi·mas·sa सिप्पस्सsip·pas·sa अन्तोan·to पञ्ञायिस्सती”ति।pañ·ñā·yis·sa·tī

    Kadā imassa sippassa anto paññāyissatī”ti.

    And yet there’s no end in sight to learning this profession.”

72. 72

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co येनye·na सोso वेज्जोvej·jo तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तंtaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco yena so vejjo tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā taṁ vejjaṁ etadavoca—

    He went to that physician and told him what he had thought,

73. 73

    “अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya बहुञ्चba·huñ·ca गण्हामिgaṇ·hā·mi लहुञ्चla·huñ·ca गण्हामिgaṇ·hā·mi सुट्ठुsuṭ·ṭhu चca उपधारेमि,u·pa·dhā·re·mi गहितञ्चga·hi·tañ·ca मेme नna सम्मुस्सति,sam·mus·sa·ti सत्तsat·ta चca मेme वस्सानिvas·sā·ni अधीयन्तस्स,a·dhī·yan·tas·sa नयिमस्सna·yi·mas·sa सिप्पस्सsip·pas·sa अन्तोan·to पञ्ञायति।pañ·ñā·ya·ti

    “ahaṁ kho, ācariya, bahuñca gaṇhāmi lahuñca gaṇhāmi suṭṭhu ca upadhāremi, gahitañca me na sammussati, satta ca me vassāni adhīyantassa, nayimassa sippassa anto paññāyati.

    (Pāli only)

74. 74

    कदाka·dā इमस्सi·mas·sa सिप्पस्सsip·pas·sa अन्तोan·to पञ्ञायिस्सती”ति?pañ·ñā·yis·sa·tī

    Kadā imassa sippassa anto paññāyissatī”ti?

    adding, “When will I complete the training for this profession?”

75. 75

    “तेनte·na हि,hi भणेbha·ṇe जीवक,jī·va·ka खणित्तिंkha·ṇit·tiṃ आदायā·dā·ya तक्कसिलायtak·ka·si·lā·ya समन्ताsa·man·tā योजनंyo·ja·naṃ आहिण्डित्वाā·hiṇ·ḍit·vā यंyaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci अभेसज्जंa·bhe·saj·jaṃ पस्सेय्यासिpas·sey·yā·si तंtaṃ आहरा”ति।ā·ha·rā

    “Tena hi, bhaṇe jīvaka, khaṇittiṁ ādāya takkasilāya samantā yojanaṁ āhiṇḍitvā yaṁ kiñci abhesajjaṁ passeyyāsi taṁ āharā”ti.

    “Listen, Jīvaka. Take a spade and walk as far as 13 kilometers all around Takkasilā and bring back whatever plants you see that are not medicinal.”

76. 76

    “एवं,e·vaṃ आचरिया”तिā·ca·ri·yā खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तस्सtas·sa वेज्जस्सvej·jas·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā खणित्तिंkha·ṇit·tiṃ आदायā·dā·ya तक्कसिलायtak·ka·si·lā·ya समन्ताsa·man·tā योजनंyo·ja·naṃ आहिण्डन्तोā·hiṇ·ḍan·to नna किञ्चिkiñ·ci अभेसज्जंa·bhe·saj·jaṃ अद्दस।ad·da·sa

    “Evaṁ, ācariyā”ti kho jīvako komārabhacco tassa vejjassa paṭissutvā khaṇittiṁ ādāya takkasilāya samantā yojanaṁ āhiṇḍanto na kiñci abhesajjaṁ addasa.

    Saying, “Yes, teacher,” he did just that. But he did not see any non-medicinal plants.

77. 77

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co येनye·na सोso वेज्जोvej·jo तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तंtaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco yena so vejjo tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā taṁ vejjaṁ etadavoca—

    He then went back to the physician and told him what had happened.

78. 78

    “आहिण्डन्तोम्हि,ā·hiṇ·ḍan·tom·hi आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya तक्कसिलायtak·ka·si·lā·ya समन्ताsa·man·tā योजनं,yo·ja·naṃ नna किञ्चिkiñ·ci अभेसज्जंa·bhe·saj·jaṃ अद्दसन्”ति।ad·da·san

    “āhiṇḍantomhi, ācariya, takkasilāya samantā yojanaṁ, na kiñci abhesajjaṁ addasan”ti.

    (Pāli only)

79. 79

    “सुसिक्खितोसि,su·sik·khi·to·si भणेbha·ṇe जीवक।jī·va·ka

    “Susikkhitosi, bhaṇe jīvaka.

    The physician said, “You’re well-trained, Jīvaka.

80. 80

    अलंa·laṃ तेte एत्तकंet·ta·kaṃ जीविकाया”तिjī·vi·kā·yā जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa परित्तंpa·rit·taṃ पाथेय्यंpā·they·yaṃ पादासि।pā·dā·si

    Alaṁ te ettakaṁ jīvikāyā”ti jīvakassa komārabhaccassa parittaṁ pātheyyaṁ pādāsi.

    It’s enough for you to live on.” And he gave Jīvaka a small amount of provisions for the journey.

81. 81

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तंtaṃ परित्तंpa·rit·taṃ पाथेय्यंpā·they·yaṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तेनte·na पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

    Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco taṁ parittaṁ pātheyyaṁ ādāya yena rājagahaṁ tena pakkāmi.

    Jīvaka left for Rājagaha,

82. 82

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa तंtaṃ परित्तंpa·rit·taṃ पाथेय्यंpā·they·yaṃ अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge साकेतेsā·ke·te परिक्खयंpa·rik·kha·yaṃ अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

    Atha kho jīvakassa komārabhaccassa taṁ parittaṁ pātheyyaṁ antarāmagge sākete parikkhayaṁ agamāsi.

    but the provisions were exhausted by the time he got to Sāketa.

83. 83

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

    Atha kho jīvakassa komārabhaccassa etadahosi—

    Jīvaka thought,

84. 84

    “इमेi·me खोkho मग्गाmag·gā कन्ताराkan·tā·rā अप्पोदकाap·po·da·kā अप्पभक्खा,ap·pa·bhak·khā नna सुकराsu·ka·rā अपाथेय्येनa·pā·they·ye·na गन्तुं।gan·tuṃ

    “ime kho maggā kantārā appodakā appabhakkhā, na sukarā apātheyyena gantuṁ.

    “These roads go through the wilderness where there’s little water and little food. It’s not easy to travel there without provisions.

85. 85

    यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ पाथेय्यंpā·they·yaṃ परियेसेय्यन्”ति।pa·ri·ye·sey·yan

    Yannūnāhaṁ pātheyyaṁ pariyeseyyan”ti.

    Let me search for provisions.”

86. 86

    2। सेट्ठिभरियावत्थुseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā·vat·thu

    2. Seṭṭhibhariyāvatthu

    2. The account of the wealthy merchant’s wife

87. 87

    तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na साकेतेsā·ke·te सेट्ठिभरियायseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā·ya सत्तवस्सिकोsat·ta·vas·si·ko सीसाबाधोsī·sā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

    Tena kho pana samayena sākete seṭṭhibhariyāya sattavassiko sīsābādho hoti.

    At that time in Sāketa there was a wealthy merchant whose wife had had a headache for seven years.

88. 88

    बहूba·hū महन्ताma·han·tā महन्ताma·han·tā दिसापामोक्खाdi·sā·pā·mok·khā वेज्जाvej·jā आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā नासक्खिंसुnā·sak·khiṃ·su अरोगंa·ro·gaṃ कातुं।kā·tuṃ

    Bahū mahantā mahantā disāpāmokkhā vejjā āgantvā nāsakkhiṁsu arogaṁ kātuṁ.

    Many of the most famous physicians in the world had come to see her, but none was able to cure her.

89. 89

    बहुंba·huṃ हिरञ्ञंhi·rañ·ñaṃ आदायā·dā·ya अगमंसु।a·ga·maṃ·su

    Bahuṁ hiraññaṁ ādāya agamaṁsu.

    And they were very expensive.

90. 90

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co साकेतंsā·ke·taṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā मनुस्सेma·nus·se पुच्छि—puc·chi

    Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco sāketaṁ pavisitvā manusse pucchi—

    When Jīvaka arrived at Sāketa, he asked people,

91. 91

    “को,ko भणे,bha·ṇe गिलानो,gi·lā·no कंkaṃ तिकिच्छामी”ति?ti·kic·chā·mī

    “ko, bhaṇe, gilāno, kaṁ tikicchāmī”ti?

    “Is there anyone who’s sick whom I might treat?”

92. 92

    “एतिस्सा,e·tis·sā आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya सेट्ठिभरियायseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā·ya सत्तवस्सिकोsat·ta·vas·si·ko सीसाबाधो;sī·sā·bā·dho

    “Etissā, ācariya, seṭṭhibhariyāya sattavassiko sīsābādho;

    “There’s a wealthy merchant whose wife has had a headache for seven years.

93. 93

    गच्छ,gac·cha आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya सेट्ठिभरियंseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yaṃ तिकिच्छाही”ति।ti·kic·chā·hī

    gaccha, ācariya, seṭṭhibhariyaṁ tikicchāhī”ti.

    Go, doctor, and treat her.”

94. 94

    अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co येनye·na सेट्ठिस्सseṭ·ṭhis·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā दोवारिकंdo·vā·ri·kaṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

    Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco yena seṭṭhissa gahapatissa nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā dovārikaṁ āṇāpesi—

    Jīvaka went to that merchant’s house and told the doorman,

95. 95

    “गच्छ,gac·cha भणेbha·ṇe दोवारिक,do·vā·ri·ka सेट्ठिभरियायseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā·ya पावद—pā·va·da

    “gaccha, bhaṇe dovārika, seṭṭhibhariyāya pāvada—

    “Go and say this to the merchant’s wife,

96. 96

    ‘वेज्जो,vej·jo अय्ये,ay·ye आगतो,ā·ga·to सोso तंtaṃ दट्ठुकामो’”ति।daṭ·ṭhu·kā·mo

    ‘vejjo, ayye, āgato, so taṁ daṭṭhukāmo’”ti.

    ‘Ma’am, a doctor has arrived. He wishes to see you.’”

97. 97

    “एवं,e·vaṃ आचरिया”तिā·ca·ri·yā खोkho सोso दोवारिकोdo·vā·ri·ko जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā येनye·na सेट्ठिभरियाseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सेट्ठिभरियंseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

    “Evaṁ, ācariyā”ti kho so dovāriko jīvakassa komārabhaccassa paṭissutvā yena seṭṭhibhariyā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā seṭṭhibhariyaṁ etadavoca—

    Saying, “Yes, doctor,” he did as asked.

98. 98

    “वेज्जो,vej·jo अय्ये,ay·ye आगतो;ā·ga·to

    “vejjo, ayye, āgato;

    (Pāli only)

99. 99

    सोso तंtaṃ दट्ठुकामो”ति।daṭ·ṭhu·kā·mo

    so taṁ daṭṭhukāmo”ti.

    (Pāli only)

100. 100

     “कीदिसो,kī·di·so भणेbha·ṇe दोवारिक,do·vā·ri·ka वेज्जो”ति?vej·jo

     “Kīdiso, bhaṇe dovārika, vejjo”ti?

     She replied, “What sort of doctor is it?”

101. 101

     “दहरको,da·ha·ra·ko अय्ये”ति।ay·ye

     “Daharako, ayye”ti.

     “A young one.”

102. 102

     “अलं,a·laṃ भणेbha·ṇe दोवारिक,do·vā·ri·ka किंkiṃ मेme दहरकोda·ha·ra·ko वेज्जोvej·jo करिस्सति?ka·ris·sa·ti

     “Alaṁ, bhaṇe dovārika, kiṁ me daharako vejjo karissati?

     “Forget it. I don’t need a young doctor.

103. 103

     बहूba·hū महन्ताma·han·tā महन्ताma·han·tā दिसापामोक्खाdi·sā·pā·mok·khā वेज्जाvej·jā आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā नासक्खिंसुnā·sak·khiṃ·su अरोगंa·ro·gaṃ कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     Bahū mahantā mahantā disāpāmokkhā vejjā āgantvā nāsakkhiṁsu arogaṁ kātuṁ.

     Many of the most famous physicians in the world have been here, but none was able to cure me.

104. 104

     बहुंba·huṃ हिरञ्ञंhi·rañ·ñaṃ आदायā·dā·ya अगमंसू”ति।a·ga·maṃ·sū

     Bahuṁ hiraññaṁ ādāya agamaṁsū”ti.

     And they were very expensive too.”

105. 105

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso दोवारिकोdo·vā·ri·ko येनye·na जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho so dovāriko yena jīvako komārabhacco tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     The doorman returned to Jīvaka and told him what the merchant’s wife had said.

106. 106

     “सेट्ठिभरिया,seṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

     “seṭṭhibhariyā, ācariya, evamāha—

     (Pāli only)

107. 107

     ‘अलं,a·laṃ भणेbha·ṇe दोवारिक,do·vā·ri·ka किंkiṃ मेme दहरकोda·ha·ra·ko वेज्जोvej·jo करिस्सति?ka·ris·sa·ti

     ‘alaṁ, bhaṇe dovārika, kiṁ me daharako vejjo karissati?

     (Pāli only)

108. 108

     बहूba·hū महन्ताma·han·tā महन्ताma·han·tā दिसापामोक्खाdi·sā·pā·mok·khā वेज्जाvej·jā आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā नासक्खिंसुnā·sak·khiṃ·su अरोगंa·ro·gaṃ कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     Bahū mahantā mahantā disāpāmokkhā vejjā āgantvā nāsakkhiṁsu arogaṁ kātuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

109. 109

     बहुंba·huṃ हिरञ्ञंhi·rañ·ñaṃ आदायā·dā·ya अगमंसू’”ति।a·ga·maṃ·sū

     Bahuṁ hiraññaṁ ādāya agamaṁsū’”ti.

     (Pāli only)

110. 110

     “गच्छ,gac·cha भणेbha·ṇe दोवारिक,do·vā·ri·ka सेट्ठिभरियायseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā·ya पावद—pā·va·da

     “Gaccha, bhaṇe dovārika, seṭṭhibhariyāya pāvada—

     Jīvaka replied,

111. 111

     ‘वेज्जो,vej·jo अय्ये,ay·ye एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

     ‘vejjo, ayye, evamāha—

     “Go and tell her

112. 112

     माmā किर,ki·ra अय्ये,ay·ye पुरेpu·re किञ्चिkiñ·ci अदासि।a·dā·si

     mā kira, ayye, pure kiñci adāsi.

     that she doesn’t have to pay anything in advance.

113. 113

     यदाya·dā अरोगाa·ro·gā अहोसिa·ho·si तदाta·dā यंyaṃ इच्छेय्यासिic·chey·yā·si तंtaṃ दज्जेय्यासी’”ति।daj·jey·yā·sī

     Yadā arogā ahosi tadā yaṁ iccheyyāsi taṁ dajjeyyāsī’”ti.

     When she is cured, she can pay whatever she likes.”

114. 114

     “एवं,e·vaṃ आचरिया”तिā·ca·ri·yā खोkho सोso दोवारिकोdo·vā·ri·ko जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā येनye·na सेट्ठिभरियाseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सेट्ठिभरियंseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     “Evaṁ, ācariyā”ti kho so dovāriko jīvakassa komārabhaccassa paṭissutvā yena seṭṭhibhariyā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā seṭṭhibhariyaṁ etadavoca—

     Saying, “Yes, doctor,” he told the merchant’s wife.

115. 115

     “वेज्जो,vej·jo अय्ये,ay·ye एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

     “vejjo, ayye, evamāha—

     (Pāli only)

116. 116

     ‘माmā किर,ki·ra अय्ये,ay·ye पुरेpu·re किञ्चिkiñ·ci अदासि।a·dā·si

     ‘mā kira, ayye, pure kiñci adāsi.

     (Pāli only)

117. 117

     यदाya·dā अरोगाa·ro·gā अहोसिa·ho·si तदाta·dā यंyaṃ इच्छेय्यासिic·chey·yā·si तंtaṃ दज्जेय्यासी’”ति।daj·jey·yā·sī

     Yadā arogā ahosi tadā yaṁ iccheyyāsi taṁ dajjeyyāsī’”ti.

     (Pāli only)

118. 118

     “तेनte·na हि,hi भणेbha·ṇe दोवारिक,do·vā·ri·ka वेज्जोvej·jo आगच्छतू”ति।ā·gac·cha·tū

     “Tena hi, bhaṇe dovārika, vejjo āgacchatū”ti.

     She said, “Well then, let him in.”

119. 119

     “एवं,e·vaṃ अय्ये”तिay·ye खोkho सोso दोवारिकोdo·vā·ri·ko सेट्ठिभरियायseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā·ya पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā येनye·na जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     “Evaṁ, ayye”ti kho so dovāriko seṭṭhibhariyāya paṭissutvā yena jīvako komārabhacco tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     Saying, “Yes, ma’am,” he went to Jīvaka and told him.

120. 120

     “सेट्ठिभरियाseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā तं,taṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya पक्कोसती”ति।pak·ko·sa·tī

     “seṭṭhibhariyā taṁ, ācariya, pakkosatī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

121. 121

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co येनye·na सेट्ठिभरियाseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सेट्ठिभरियायseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā·ya विकारंvi·kā·raṃ सल्लक्खेत्वाsal·lak·khet·vā सेट्ठिभरियंseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco yena seṭṭhibhariyā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā seṭṭhibhariyāya vikāraṁ sallakkhetvā seṭṭhibhariyaṁ etadavoca—

     Jīvaka then approached the merchant’s wife. After examining her, he said to her,

122. 122

     “पसतेन,pa·sa·te·na अय्ये,ay·ye सप्पिनाsap·pi·nā अत्थो”ति।at·tho

     “pasatena, ayye, sappinā attho”ti.

     “Ma’am, I need a handful of ghee.”

123. 123

     अथa·tha खोkho सेट्ठिभरियाseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa पसतंpa·sa·taṃ सप्पिंsap·piṃ दापेसि।dā·pe·si

     Atha kho seṭṭhibhariyā jīvakassa komārabhaccassa pasataṁ sappiṁ dāpesi.

     She got him a handful of ghee.

124. 124

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तंtaṃ पसतंpa·sa·taṃ सप्पिंsap·piṃ नानाभेसज्जेहिnā·nā·bhe·saj·je·hi निप्पचित्वाnip·pa·cit·vā सेट्ठिभरियंseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yaṃ मञ्चकेmañ·ca·ke उत्तानंut·tā·naṃ निपातेत्वाni·pā·tet·vā नत्थुतोnat·thu·to अदासि।a·dā·si

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco taṁ pasataṁ sappiṁ nānābhesajjehi nippacitvā seṭṭhibhariyaṁ mañcake uttānaṁ nipātetvā natthuto adāsi.

     Jīvaka cooked that ghee with a number of medicines. He then had her lie down on her back on a bed, and he gave her the medicine through the nose.

125. 125

     अथa·tha खोkho तंtaṃ सप्पिsap·pi नत्थुतोnat·thu·to दिन्नंdin·naṃ मुखतोmu·kha·to उग्गञ्छि।ug·gañ·chi

     Atha kho taṁ sappi natthuto dinnaṁ mukhato uggañchi.

     The medicine emerged in her mouth.

126. 126

     अथa·tha खोkho सेट्ठिभरियाseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā पटिग्गहेpa·ṭig·ga·he निट्ठुभित्वाniṭ·ṭhu·bhit·vā दासिंdā·siṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho seṭṭhibhariyā paṭiggahe niṭṭhubhitvā dāsiṁ āṇāpesi—

     She then spat it out into a container and told a slave,

127. 127

     “हन्द,han·da जे,je इमंi·maṃ सप्पिंsap·piṃ पिचुनाpi·cu·nā गण्हाही”ति।gaṇ·hā·hī

     “handa, je, imaṁ sappiṁ picunā gaṇhāhī”ti.

     “Listen, save this ghee in a cotton wad.”

128. 128

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho jīvakassa komārabhaccassa etadahosi—

     Jīvaka thought,

129. 129

     “अच्छरियंac·cha·ri·yaṃ यावyā·va लूखायंlū·khā·yaṃ घरणी,gha·ra·ṇī यत्रyat·ra हिhi नामnā·ma इमंi·maṃ छड्डनीयधम्मंchaḍ·ḍa·nī·ya·dham·maṃ सप्पिंsap·piṃ पिचुनाpi·cu·nā गाहापेस्सति।gā·hā·pes·sa·ti

     “acchariyaṁ yāva lūkhāyaṁ gharaṇī, yatra hi nāma imaṁ chaḍḍanīyadhammaṁ sappiṁ picunā gāhāpessati.

     “It’s astonishing how wretched this housewife is in saving this ghee in a cotton wad, when it should be discarded.

130. 130

     बहुकानिba·hu·kā·ni चca मेme महग्घानिma·hag·ghā·ni भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni उपगतानि।u·pa·ga·tā·ni

     Bahukāni ca me mahagghāni bhesajjāni upagatāni.

     Many of my valuable medicines went into it,

131. 131

     किम्पिkim·pi मायंmā·yaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci देय्यधम्मंdey·ya·dham·maṃ दस्सती”ति।das·sa·tī

     Kimpi māyaṁ kiñci deyyadhammaṁ dassatī”ti.

     but she might not give me anything for my services.”

132. 132

     अथa·tha खोkho सेट्ठिभरियाseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa विकारंvi·kā·raṃ सल्लक्खेत्वाsal·lak·khet·vā जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho seṭṭhibhariyā jīvakassa komārabhaccassa vikāraṁ sallakkhetvā jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     Seeing his body language, the merchant’s wife asked him

133. 133

     “किस्सkis·sa त्वं,tvaṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya विमनोसी”ति?vi·ma·no·sī

     “kissa tvaṁ, ācariya, vimanosī”ti?

     what he was concerned about.

134. 134

     इधi·dha मेme एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Idha me etadahosi—

     He told her,

135. 135

     “अच्छरियंac·cha·ri·yaṃ यावyā·va लूखायंlū·khā·yaṃ घरणी,gha·ra·ṇī यत्रyat·ra हिhi नामnā·ma इमंi·maṃ छड्डनीयधम्मंchaḍ·ḍa·nī·ya·dham·maṃ सप्पिंsap·piṃ पिचुनाpi·cu·nā गाहापेस्सति।gā·hā·pes·sa·ti

     “acchariyaṁ yāva lūkhāyaṁ gharaṇī, yatra hi nāma imaṁ chaḍḍanīyadhammaṁ sappiṁ picunā gāhāpessati.

     (Pāli only)

136. 136

     बहुकानिba·hu·kā·ni चca मेme महग्घानिma·hag·ghā·ni भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni उपगतानि।u·pa·ga·tā·ni

     Bahukāni ca me mahagghāni bhesajjāni upagatāni.

     (Pāli only)

137. 137

     किम्पिkim·pi मायंmā·yaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci देय्यधम्मंdey·ya·dham·maṃ दस्सती”ति।das·sa·tī

     Kimpi māyaṁ kiñci deyyadhammaṁ dassatī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

138. 138

     “मयंma·yaṃ खो,kho आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya आगारिकाā·gā·ri·kā नामnā·ma उपजानामेतस्सu·pa·jā·nā·me·tas·sa संयमस्स।saṃ·ya·mas·sa

     “Mayaṁ kho, ācariya, āgārikā nāma upajānāmetassa saṁyamassa.

     and she said, “We householders know the benefit of such frugality.

139. 139

     वरमेतंva·ra·me·taṃ सप्पिsap·pi दासानंdā·sā·naṃ वाvā कम्मकरानंkam·ma·ka·rā·naṃ वाvā पादब्भञ्जनंpā·dab·bhañ·ja·naṃ वाvā पदीपकरणेpa·dī·pa·ka·ra·ṇe वाvā आसित्तं।ā·sit·taṃ

     Varametaṁ sappi dāsānaṁ vā kammakarānaṁ vā pādabbhañjanaṁ vā padīpakaraṇe vā āsittaṁ.

     This ghee is good for the slaves and workers, for ointment for the feet, or for using in lamps.

140. 140

     माmā खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya विमनोvi·ma·no अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Mā kho tvaṁ, ācariya, vimano ahosi.

     Don’t be concerned, doctor,

141. 141

     नna तेte देय्यधम्मोdey·ya·dham·mo हायिस्सती”ति।hā·yis·sa·tī

     Na te deyyadhammo hāyissatī”ti.

     your fee will be abundant.”

142. 142

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co सेट्ठिभरियायseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā·ya सत्तवस्सिकंsat·ta·vas·si·kaṃ सीसाबाधंsī·sā·bā·dhaṃ एकेनेवe·ke·ne·va नत्थुकम्मेनnat·thu·kam·me·na अपकड्ढि।a·pa·kaḍ·ḍhi

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco seṭṭhibhariyāya sattavassikaṁ sīsābādhaṁ ekeneva natthukammena apakaḍḍhi.

     Jīvaka cured the headache of the merchant’s wife with a single treatment through the nose.

143. 143

     अथa·tha खोkho सेट्ठिभरियाseṭ·ṭhi·bha·ri·yā अरोगाa·ro·gā समानाsa·mā·nā जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa चत्तारिcat·tā·ri सहस्सानिsa·has·sā·ni पादासि।pā·dā·si

     Atha kho seṭṭhibhariyā arogā samānā jīvakassa komārabhaccassa cattāri sahassāni pādāsi.

     When she was well, she gave him four thousand coins.

144. 144

     पुत्तो—put·to

     Putto—

     When her son

145. 145

     “माताmā·tā मेme अरोगाa·ro·gā ठिता”तिṭhi·tā चत्तारिcat·tā·ri सहस्सानिsa·has·sā·ni पादासि।pā·dā·si

     “mātā me arogā ṭhitā”ti cattāri sahassāni pādāsi.

     (Pāli only)

146. 146

     सुणिसा—su·ṇi·sā

     Suṇisā—

     and daughter-in-law

147. 147

     “सस्सुsas·su मेme अरोगाa·ro·gā ठिता”तिṭhi·tā चत्तारिcat·tā·ri सहस्सानिsa·has·sā·ni पादासि।pā·dā·si

     “sassu me arogā ṭhitā”ti cattāri sahassāni pādāsi.

     found out that she was well, they too gave him four thousand coins each,

148. 148

     सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपति—ga·ha·pa·ti

     Seṭṭhi gahapati—

     as did her husband.

149. 149

     “भरियाbha·ri·yā मेme अरोगाa·ro·gā ठिता”तिṭhi·tā चत्तारिcat·tā·ri सहस्सानिsa·has·sā·ni पादासिpā·dā·si दासञ्चdā·sañ·ca दासिञ्चdā·siñ·ca अस्सरथञ्च।as·sa·ra·thañ·ca

     “bhariyā me arogā ṭhitā”ti cattāri sahassāni pādāsi dāsañca dāsiñca assarathañca.

     The merchant also gave him a male and a female slave, and a carriage with horses.

150. 150

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तानिtā·ni सोळससहस्सानिso·ḷa·sa·sa·has·sā·ni आदायā·dā·ya दासञ्चdā·sañ·ca दासिञ्चdā·siñ·ca अस्सरथञ्चas·sa·ra·thañ·ca येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तेनte·na पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco tāni soḷasasahassāni ādāya dāsañca dāsiñca assarathañca yena rājagahaṁ tena pakkāmi.

     Jīvaka took those sixteen thousand coins, as well as the male and female slaves and the carriage with horses, and he left for Rājagaha.

151. 151

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ येनye·na अभयोa·bha·yo राजकुमारोrā·ja·ku·mā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā अभयंa·bha·yaṃ राजकुमारंrā·ja·ku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Anupubbena yena rājagahaṁ yena abhayo rājakumāro tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā abhayaṁ rājakumāraṁ etadavoca—

     When he eventually arrived, he went to Prince Abhaya and said,

152. 152

     “इदंi·daṃ मे,me देव,de·va पठमकम्मंpa·ṭha·ma·kam·maṃ सोळससहस्सानिso·ḷa·sa·sa·has·sā·ni दासोdā·so चca दासीdā·sī चca अस्सरथोas·sa·ra·tho च।ca

     “idaṁ me, deva, paṭhamakammaṁ soḷasasahassāni dāso ca dāsī ca assaratho ca.

     “For my first job, sir, I earned sixteen thousand coins, a male and a female slave, and a carriage with horses.

153. 153

     पटिग्गण्हातुpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·tu मेme देवोde·vo पोसावनिकन्”ति।po·sā·va·ni·kan

     Paṭiggaṇhātu me devo posāvanikan”ti.

     Please accept it for bringing me up.”

154. 154

     “अलं,a·laṃ भणेbha·ṇe जीवक;jī·va·ka

     “Alaṁ, bhaṇe jīvaka;

     “There’s no need, Jīvaka.

155. 155

     तुय्हमेवtuy·ha·me·va होतु।ho·tu

     tuyhameva hotu.

     You should keep it all.

156. 156

     अम्हाकञ्ञेवam·hā·kañ·ñe·va अन्तेपुरेan·te·pu·re निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ मापेही”ति।mā·pe·hī

     Amhākaññeva antepure nivesanaṁ māpehī”ti.

     But please build a house in our compound.”

157. 157

     “एवं,e·vaṃ देवा”तिde·vā खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co अभयस्सa·bha·yas·sa राजकुमारस्सrā·ja·ku·mā·ras·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā अभयस्सa·bha·yas·sa राजकुमारस्सrā·ja·ku·mā·ras·sa अन्तेपुरेan·te·pu·re निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ मापेसि।mā·pe·si

     “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho jīvako komārabhacco abhayassa rājakumārassa paṭissutvā abhayassa rājakumārassa antepure nivesanaṁ māpesi.

     Saying, “Yes,” he did just that.

158. 158

     3। बिम्बिसारराजवत्थुbim·bi·sā·ra·rā·ja·vat·thu

     3. Bimbisārarājavatthu

     3. The account of King Bimbisāra

159. 159

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa भगन्दलाबाधोbha·gan·da·lā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa bhagandalābādho hoti.

     At that time King Seniya Bimbisāra of Magadha had hemorrhoids.

160. 160

     साटकाsā·ṭa·kā लोहितेनlo·hi·te·na मक्खियन्ति।mak·khi·yan·ti

     Sāṭakā lohitena makkhiyanti.

     His wrap garments were soiled with blood,

161. 161

     देवियोde·vi·yo दिस्वाdis·vā उप्पण्डेन्ति—up·paṇ·ḍen·ti

     Deviyo disvā uppaṇḍenti—

     and the queens made fun of him,

162. 162

     “उतुनीu·tu·nī दानिdā·ni देवो,de·vo पुप्फंpup·phaṃ देवस्सde·vas·sa उप्पन्नं,up·pan·naṃ नna चिरंci·raṃ देवोde·vo विजायिस्सती”ति।vi·jā·yis·sa·tī

     “utunī dāni devo, pupphaṁ devassa uppannaṁ, na ciraṁ devo vijāyissatī”ti.

     “Sir, you’re menstruating; your fertile period has arrived. Soon you’ll give birth.”

163. 163

     तेनte·na राजाrā·jā मङ्कुmaṅ·ku होति।ho·ti

     Tena rājā maṅku hoti.

     The king felt humiliated.

164. 164

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro अभयंa·bha·yaṃ राजकुमारंrā·ja·ku·mā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro abhayaṁ rājakumāraṁ etadavoca—

     Soon afterwards he told Prince Abhaya what had happened,

165. 165

     “मय्हंmay·haṃ खो,kho भणेbha·ṇe अभय,a·bha·ya तादिसोtā·di·so आबाधो,ā·bā·dho साटकाsā·ṭa·kā लोहितेनlo·hi·te·na मक्खियन्ति,mak·khi·yan·ti देवियोde·vi·yo मंmaṃ दिस्वाdis·vā उप्पण्डेन्ति—up·paṇ·ḍen·ti

     “mayhaṁ kho, bhaṇe abhaya, tādiso ābādho, sāṭakā lohitena makkhiyanti, deviyo maṁ disvā uppaṇḍenti—

     (Pāli only)

166. 166

     ‘उतुनीu·tu·nī दानिdā·ni देवो,de·vo पुप्फंpup·phaṃ देवस्सde·vas·sa उप्पन्नं,up·pan·naṃ नna चिरंci·raṃ देवोde·vo विजायिस्सती’ति।vi·jā·yis·sa·tī

     ‘utunī dāni devo, pupphaṁ devassa uppannaṁ, na ciraṁ devo vijāyissatī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

167. 167

     इङ्घ,iṅ·gha भणेbha·ṇe अभय,a·bha·ya तादिसंtā·di·saṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ जानाहिjā·nā·hi योyo मंmaṃ तिकिच्छेय्या”ति।ti·kic·chey·yā

     Iṅgha, bhaṇe abhaya, tādisaṁ vejjaṁ jānāhi yo maṁ tikiccheyyā”ti.

     adding, “Abhaya, please find a doctor to treat me.”

168. 168

     “अयं,a·yaṃ देव,de·va अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ जीवकोjī·va·ko वेज्जोvej·jo तरुणोta·ru·ṇo भद्रको।bhad·ra·ko

     “Ayaṁ, deva, amhākaṁ jīvako vejjo taruṇo bhadrako.

     “Sir, our young doctor Jīvaka is excellent.

169. 169

     सोso देवंde·vaṃ तिकिच्छिस्सती”ति।ti·kic·chis·sa·tī

     So devaṁ tikicchissatī”ti.

     He’ll treat you.”

170. 170

     “तेनte·na हि,hi भणेbha·ṇe अभय,a·bha·ya जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ आणापेहि;ā·ṇā·pe·hi

     “Tena hi, bhaṇe abhaya, jīvakaṁ vejjaṁ āṇāpehi;

     “Well then, Abhaya, send for Jīvaka.”

171. 171

     सोso मंmaṃ तिकिच्छिस्सती”ति।ti·kic·chis·sa·tī

     so maṁ tikicchissatī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

172. 172

     अथa·tha खोkho अभयोa·bha·yo राजकुमारोrā·ja·ku·mā·ro जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho abhayo rājakumāro jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ āṇāpesi—

     Prince Abhaya then sent for Jīvaka.

173. 173

     “गच्छ,gac·cha भणेbha·ṇe जीवक,jī·va·ka राजानंrā·jā·naṃ तिकिच्छाही”ति।ti·kic·chā·hī

     “gaccha, bhaṇe jīvaka, rājānaṁ tikicchāhī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

174. 174

     “एवं,e·vaṃ देवा”तिde·vā खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co अभयस्सa·bha·yas·sa राजकुमारस्सrā·ja·ku·mā·ras·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā नखेनna·khe·na भेसज्जंbhe·saj·jaṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā राजानंrā·jā·naṃ मागधंmā·ga·dhaṃ सेनियंse·ni·yaṃ बिम्बिसारंbim·bi·sā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho jīvako komārabhacco abhayassa rājakumārassa paṭissutvā nakhena bhesajjaṁ ādāya yena rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ seniyaṁ bimbisāraṁ etadavoca—

     Saying, “Yes, sir,” Jīvaka took some medicine on his nail and went to King Bimbisāra. He said,

175. 175

     “आबाधंā·bā·dhaṃ ते,te देव,de·va पस्सामा”ति।pas·sā·mā

     “ābādhaṁ te, deva, passāmā”ti.

     “Sir, let me see your affliction.”

176. 176

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa भगन्दलाबाधंbha·gan·da·lā·bā·dhaṃ एकेनेवe·ke·ne·va आलेपेनā·le·pe·na अपकड्ढि।a·pa·kaḍ·ḍhi

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa bhagandalābādhaṁ ekeneva ālepena apakaḍḍhi.

     Jīvaka then cured King Bimbisāra’s hemorrhoids with one application of ointment.

177. 177

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro अरोगोa·ro·go समानोsa·mā·no पञ्चpañ·ca इत्थिसतानिit·thi·sa·tā·ni सब्बालङ्कारंsab·bā·laṅ·kā·raṃ भूसापेत्वाbhū·sā·pet·vā ओमुञ्चापेत्वाo·muñ·cā·pet·vā पुञ्जंpuñ·jaṃ कारापेत्वाkā·rā·pet·vā जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro arogo samāno pañca itthisatāni sabbālaṅkāraṁ bhūsāpetvā omuñcāpetvā puñjaṁ kārāpetvā jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     When the king was well, he had five hundred women adorned with every kind of ornament. He then had the ornaments removed and made into a pile. And he said to Jīvaka,

178. 178

     “एतं,e·taṃ भणेbha·ṇe जीवक,jī·va·ka पञ्चन्नंpañ·can·naṃ इत्थिसतानंit·thi·sa·tā·naṃ सब्बालङ्कारंsab·bā·laṅ·kā·raṃ तुय्हंtuy·haṃ होतू”ति।ho·tū

     “etaṁ, bhaṇe jīvaka, pañcannaṁ itthisatānaṁ sabbālaṅkāraṁ tuyhaṁ hotū”ti.

     “Jīvaka, these ornaments from five hundred women are all yours.”

179. 179

     “अलं,a·laṃ देव,de·va अधिकारंa·dhi·kā·raṃ मेme देवोde·vo सरतू”ति।sa·ra·tū

     “Alaṁ, deva, adhikāraṁ me devo saratū”ti.

     “There’s no need. Please just remember my act of service.”

180. 180

     “तेनte·na हि,hi भणेbha·ṇe जीवक,jī·va·ka मंmaṃ उपट्ठह,u·paṭ·ṭha·ha इत्थागारञ्च,it·thā·gā·rañ·ca बुद्धप्पमुखञ्चbud·dhap·pa·mu·khañ·ca भिक्खुसङ्घन्”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghan

     “Tena hi, bhaṇe jīvaka, maṁ upaṭṭhaha, itthāgārañca, buddhappamukhañca bhikkhusaṅghan”ti.

     “Well then, Jīvaka, please attend on me, the harem, and the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha.”

181. 181

     “एवं,e·vaṃ देवा”तिde·vā खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

     “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho jīvako komārabhacco rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa paccassosi.

     “Yes, sir.”

182. 182

     4। राजगहसेट्ठिवत्थुrā·ja·ga·ha·seṭ·ṭhi·vat·thu

     4. Rājagahaseṭṭhivatthu

     4. The account of the wealthy merchant of Rājagaha

183. 183

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na राजगहकस्सrā·ja·ga·ha·kas·sa सेट्ठिस्सseṭ·ṭhis·sa सत्तवस्सिकोsat·ta·vas·si·ko सीसाबाधोsī·sā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena rājagahakassa seṭṭhissa sattavassiko sīsābādho hoti.

     At that time a wealthy merchant of Rājagaha had had a headache for seven years.

184. 184

     बहूba·hū महन्ताma·han·tā महन्ताma·han·tā दिसापामोक्खाdi·sā·pā·mok·khā वेज्जाvej·jā आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā नासक्खिंसुnā·sak·khiṃ·su अरोगंa·ro·gaṃ कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     Bahū mahantā mahantā disāpāmokkhā vejjā āgantvā nāsakkhiṁsu arogaṁ kātuṁ.

     Many of the most famous physicians in the world had come to see him, but none was able to cure him.

185. 185

     बहुंba·huṃ हिरञ्ञंhi·rañ·ñaṃ आदायā·dā·ya अगमंसु।a·ga·maṃ·su

     Bahuṁ hiraññaṁ ādāya agamaṁsu.

     They were very expensive,

186. 186

     अपिa·pi चca वेज्जेहिvej·je·hi पच्चक्खातोpac·cak·khā·to होति।ho·ti

     Api ca vejjehi paccakkhāto hoti.

     yet they gave up on him.

187. 187

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce वेज्जाvej·jā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ekacce vejjā evamāhaṁsu—

     Some of them said,

188. 188

     “पञ्चमंpañ·ca·maṃ दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti कालंkā·laṃ करिस्सती”ति।ka·ris·sa·tī

     “pañcamaṁ divasaṁ seṭṭhi gahapati kālaṁ karissatī”ti.

     “The merchant will die in five days.”

189. 189

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce वेज्जाvej·jā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ekacce vejjā evamāhaṁsu—

     Others said,

190. 190

     “सत्तमंsat·ta·maṃ दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti कालंkā·laṃ करिस्सती”ति।ka·ris·sa·tī

     “sattamaṁ divasaṁ seṭṭhi gahapati kālaṁ karissatī”ti.

     “The merchant will die in seven days.”

191. 191

     अथa·tha खोkho राजगहकस्सrā·ja·ga·ha·kas·sa नेगमस्सne·ga·mas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho rājagahakassa negamassa etadahosi—

     The householder association of Rājagaha considered,

192. 192

     “अयंa·yaṃ खोkho सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti बहूपकारोba·hū·pa·kā·ro रञ्ञोrañ·ño चेवce·va नेगमस्सne·ga·mas·sa च।ca

     “ayaṁ kho seṭṭhi gahapati bahūpakāro rañño ceva negamassa ca.

     “This merchant has done much for the king and for this association,

193. 193

     अपिa·pi चca वेज्जेहिvej·je·hi पच्चक्खातो।pac·cak·khā·to

     Api ca vejjehi paccakkhāto.

     and now the doctors have given up on him.

194. 194

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce वेज्जाvej·jā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ekacce vejjā evamāhaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

195. 195

     ‘पञ्चमंpañ·ca·maṃ दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti कालंkā·laṃ करिस्सती’ति।ka·ris·sa·tī

     ‘pañcamaṁ divasaṁ seṭṭhi gahapati kālaṁ karissatī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

196. 196

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce वेज्जाvej·jā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ekacce vejjā evamāhaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

197. 197

     ‘सत्तमंsat·ta·maṃ दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti कालंkā·laṃ करिस्सती’ति।ka·ris·sa·tī

     ‘sattamaṁ divasaṁ seṭṭhi gahapati kālaṁ karissatī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

198. 198

     अयञ्चa·yañ·ca रञ्ञोrañ·ño जीवकोjī·va·ko वेज्जोvej·jo तरुणोta·ru·ṇo भद्रको।bhad·ra·ko

     Ayañca rañño jīvako vejjo taruṇo bhadrako.

     But there’s Jīvaka, the king’s excellent young doctor.

199. 199

     यन्नूनyan·nū·na मयंma·yaṃ राजानंrā·jā·naṃ जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ याचेय्यामyā·cey·yā·ma सेट्ठिंseṭ·ṭhiṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ तिकिच्छितुन्”ति।ti·kic·chi·tun

     Yannūna mayaṁ rājānaṁ jīvakaṁ vejjaṁ yāceyyāma seṭṭhiṁ gahapatiṁ tikicchitun”ti.

     Let’s ask the king for Jīvaka to treat the merchant.”

200. 200

     अथa·tha खोkho राजगहकोrā·ja·ga·ha·ko नेगमोne·ga·mo येनye·na राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā राजानंrā·jā·naṃ मागधंmā·ga·dhaṃ सेनियंse·ni·yaṃ बिम्बिसारंbim·bi·sā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho rājagahako negamo yena rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ seniyaṁ bimbisāraṁ etadavoca—

     They then went to the king and told him about the merchant,

201. 201

     “अयं,a·yaṃ देव,de·va सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti बहूपकारोba·hū·pa·kā·ro देवस्सde·vas·sa चेवce·va नेगमस्सne·ga·mas·sa च;ca

     “ayaṁ, deva, seṭṭhi gahapati bahūpakāro devassa ceva negamassa ca;

     (Pāli only)

202. 202

     अपिa·pi चca वेज्जेहिvej·je·hi पच्चक्खातो।pac·cak·khā·to

     api ca vejjehi paccakkhāto.

     (Pāli only)

203. 203

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce वेज्जाvej·jā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ekacce vejjā evamāhaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

204. 204

     ‘पञ्चमंpañ·ca·maṃ दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti कालंkā·laṃ करिस्सती’ति।ka·ris·sa·tī

     ‘pañcamaṁ divasaṁ seṭṭhi gahapati kālaṁ karissatī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

205. 205

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce वेज्जाvej·jā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ekacce vejjā evamāhaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

206. 206

     ‘सत्तमंsat·ta·maṃ दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti कालंkā·laṃ करिस्सती’ति।ka·ris·sa·tī

     ‘sattamaṁ divasaṁ seṭṭhi gahapati kālaṁ karissatī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

207. 207

     साधुsā·dhu देवोde·vo जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ आणापेतुā·ṇā·pe·tu सेट्ठिंseṭ·ṭhiṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ तिकिच्छितुन्”ति।ti·kic·chi·tun

     Sādhu devo jīvakaṁ vejjaṁ āṇāpetu seṭṭhiṁ gahapatiṁ tikicchitun”ti.

     adding, “Sir, please ask doctor Jīvaka to treat the merchant.”

208. 208

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ āṇāpesi—

     And that’s what the king did.

209. 209

     “गच्छ,gac·cha भणेbha·ṇe जीवक,jī·va·ka सेट्ठिंseṭ·ṭhiṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ तिकिच्छाही”ति।ti·kic·chā·hī

     “gaccha, bhaṇe jīvaka, seṭṭhiṁ gahapatiṁ tikicchāhī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

210. 210

     “एवं,e·vaṃ देवा”तिde·vā खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā येनye·na सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सेट्ठिस्सseṭ·ṭhis·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa विकारंvi·kā·raṃ सल्लक्खेत्वाsal·lak·khet·vā सेट्ठिंseṭ·ṭhiṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho jīvako komārabhacco rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa paṭissutvā yena seṭṭhi gahapati tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā seṭṭhissa gahapatissa vikāraṁ sallakkhetvā seṭṭhiṁ gahapatiṁ etadavoca—

     Saying, “Yes, sir,” Jīvaka went to that merchant, examined him, and said,

211. 211

     “सचेsa·ce त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti अरोगोa·ro·go भवेय्यासि,bha·vey·yā·si किंkiṃ मेme अस्सas·sa देय्यधम्मो”ति?dey·ya·dham·mo

     “sace tvaṁ, gahapati, arogo bhaveyyāsi, kiṁ me assa deyyadhammo”ti?

     “If I were to cure you, what fee would you pay me?”

212. 212

     “सब्बंsab·baṃ सापतेय्यञ्चsā·pa·tey·yañ·ca ते,te आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya होतु,ho·tu अहञ्चa·hañ·ca तेte दासो”ति।dā·so

     “Sabbaṁ sāpateyyañca te, ācariya, hotu, ahañca te dāso”ti.

     “I would give you all my wealth, doctor, and I would become your slave.”

213. 213

     “सक्खिस्ससिsak·khis·sa·si पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti एकेनe·ke·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति?ni·paj·ji·tun

     “Sakkhissasi pana tvaṁ, gahapati, ekena passena sattamāse nipajjitun”ti?

     “Are you able to lie on one side for seven months?”

214. 214

     “सक्कोमहं,sak·ko·ma·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya एकेनe·ke·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति।ni·paj·ji·tun

     “Sakkomahaṁ, ācariya, ekena passena sattamāse nipajjitun”ti.

     “I am.”

215. 215

     “सक्खिस्ससिsak·khis·sa·si पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti दुतियेनdu·ti·ye·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति?ni·paj·ji·tun

     “Sakkhissasi pana tvaṁ, gahapati, dutiyena passena sattamāse nipajjitun”ti?

     “Are you able to lie on the other side for seven months?”

216. 216

     “सक्कोमहं,sak·ko·ma·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya दुतियेनdu·ti·ye·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति।ni·paj·ji·tun

     “Sakkomahaṁ, ācariya, dutiyena passena sattamāse nipajjitun”ti.

     “I am.”

217. 217

     “सक्खिस्ससिsak·khis·sa·si पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti उत्तानोut·tā·no सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति?ni·paj·ji·tun

     “Sakkhissasi pana tvaṁ, gahapati, uttāno sattamāse nipajjitun”ti?

     “Are you able to lie on your back for seven months?”

218. 218

     “सक्कोमहं,sak·ko·ma·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya उत्तानोut·tā·no सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति।ni·paj·ji·tun

     “Sakkomahaṁ, ācariya, uttāno sattamāse nipajjitun”ti.

     “I am.”

219. 219

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co सेट्ठिंseṭ·ṭhiṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ मञ्चकेmañ·ca·ke निपातेत्वाni·pā·tet·vā मञ्चकेmañ·ca·ke सम्बन्धित्वाsam·ban·dhit·vā सीसच्छविंsī·sac·cha·viṃ उप्पाटेत्वाup·pā·ṭet·vā सिब्बिनिंsib·bi·niṃ विनामेत्वाvi·nā·met·vā द्वेdve पाणकेpā·ṇa·ke नीहरित्वाnī·ha·rit·vā महाजनस्सma·hā·ja·nas·sa दस्सेसि—das·se·si

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco seṭṭhiṁ gahapatiṁ mañcake nipātetvā mañcake sambandhitvā sīsacchaviṁ uppāṭetvā sibbiniṁ vināmetvā dve pāṇake nīharitvā mahājanassa dassesi—

     Jīvaka then had the merchant lie down on a bed. He bound him to the bed, removed some skin from his head, opened a suture in the skull, and removed two insects. He showed them to the crowd, saying,

220. 220

     “पस्सथय्ये,pas·sa·thay·ye इमेi·me द्वेdve पाणके,pā·ṇa·ke एकंe·kaṃ खुद्दकंkhud·da·kaṃ एकंe·kaṃ महल्लकं।ma·hal·la·kaṃ

     “passathayye, ime dve pāṇake, ekaṁ khuddakaṁ ekaṁ mahallakaṁ.

     “Sirs, look at these two insects, one small and one large.

221. 221

     येye तेte आचरियाā·ca·ri·yā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ye te ācariyā evamāhaṁsu—

     The doctors who said

222. 222

     ‘पञ्चमंpañ·ca·maṃ दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti कालंkā·laṃ करिस्सती’ति—ka·ris·sa·tī

     ‘pañcamaṁ divasaṁ seṭṭhi gahapati kālaṁ karissatī’ti—

     he would live for five days

223. 223

     तेहायंte·hā·yaṃ महल्लकोma·hal·la·ko पाणकोpā·ṇa·ko दिट्ठो।diṭ·ṭho

     tehāyaṁ mahallako pāṇako diṭṭho.

     had seen the large insect.

224. 224

     पञ्चमंpañ·ca·maṃ दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सेट्ठिस्सseṭ·ṭhis·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa मत्थलुङ्गंmat·tha·luṅ·gaṃ परियादियिस्सति।pa·ri·yā·di·yis·sa·ti

     Pañcamaṁ divasaṁ seṭṭhissa gahapatissa matthaluṅgaṁ pariyādiyissati.

     In five days it would have destroyed the merchant’s brain.

225. 225

     मत्थलुङ्गस्सmat·tha·luṅ·gas·sa परियादानाpa·ri·yā·dā·nā सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti कालंkā·laṃ करिस्सति।ka·ris·sa·ti

     Matthaluṅgassa pariyādānā seṭṭhi gahapati kālaṁ karissati.

     Because of that he would have died.

226. 226

     सुदिट्ठोsu·diṭ·ṭho तेहिte·hi आचरियेहि।ā·ca·ri·ye·hi

     Sudiṭṭho tehi ācariyehi.

     Those doctors were right.

227. 227

     येye तेte आचरियाā·ca·ri·yā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ye te ācariyā evamāhaṁsu—

     And those doctors who said

228. 228

     ‘सत्तमंsat·ta·maṃ दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti कालंkā·laṃ करिस्सती’ति—ka·ris·sa·tī

     ‘sattamaṁ divasaṁ seṭṭhi gahapati kālaṁ karissatī’ti—

     he would live for seven days

229. 229

     तेहायंte·hā·yaṃ खुद्दकोkhud·da·ko पाणकोpā·ṇa·ko दिट्ठो।diṭ·ṭho

     tehāyaṁ khuddako pāṇako diṭṭho.

     had seen the small insect.

230. 230

     सत्तमंsat·ta·maṃ दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सेट्ठिस्सseṭ·ṭhis·sa गहपतिस्सga·ha·pa·tis·sa मत्थलुङ्गंmat·tha·luṅ·gaṃ परियादियिस्सति।pa·ri·yā·di·yis·sa·ti

     Sattamaṁ divasaṁ seṭṭhissa gahapatissa matthaluṅgaṁ pariyādiyissati.

     In seven days it would have destroyed the merchant’s brain.

231. 231

     मत्थलुङ्गस्सmat·tha·luṅ·gas·sa परियादानाpa·ri·yā·dā·nā सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti कालंkā·laṃ करिस्सति।ka·ris·sa·ti

     Matthaluṅgassa pariyādānā seṭṭhi gahapati kālaṁ karissati.

     Because of that he would have died.

232. 232

     सुदिट्ठोsu·diṭ·ṭho तेहिte·hi आचरियेही”ति।ā·ca·ri·ye·hī

     Sudiṭṭho tehi ācariyehī”ti.

     Those doctors were right, too.”

233. 233

     सिब्बिनिंsib·bi·niṃ सम्पटिपाटेत्वाsam·pa·ṭi·pā·ṭet·vā सीसच्छविंsī·sac·cha·viṃ सिब्बित्वाsib·bit·vā आलेपंā·le·paṃ अदासि।a·dā·si

     Sibbiniṁ sampaṭipāṭetvā sīsacchaviṁ sibbitvā ālepaṁ adāsi.

     He then closed the suture in the skull, sewed the skin back together, and applied an ointment.

234. 234

     अथa·tha खोkho सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti सत्ताहस्सsat·tā·has·sa अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho seṭṭhi gahapati sattāhassa accayena jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     After seven days the merchant said to Jīvaka,

235. 235

     “नाहं,nā·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi एकेनe·ke·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति।ni·paj·ji·tun

     “nāhaṁ, ācariya, sakkomi ekena passena sattamāse nipajjitun”ti.

     “Doctor, I’m unable to lie on one side for seven months.”

236. 236

     “ननुna·nu मेme त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti पटिस्सुणि—pa·ṭis·su·ṇi

     “Nanu me tvaṁ, gahapati, paṭissuṇi—

     “But didn’t you say you were?”

237. 237

     सक्कोमहं,sak·ko·ma·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya एकेनe·ke·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति?ni·paj·ji·tun

     sakkomahaṁ, ācariya, ekena passena sattamāse nipajjitun”ti?

     (Pāli only)

238. 238

     “सच्चाहं,sac·cā·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya पटिस्सुणिं,pa·ṭis·su·ṇiṃ अपाहंa·pā·haṃ मरिस्सामि,ma·ris·sā·mi नाहंnā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi एकेनe·ke·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति।ni·paj·ji·tun

     “Saccāhaṁ, ācariya, paṭissuṇiṁ, apāhaṁ marissāmi, nāhaṁ sakkomi ekena passena sattamāse nipajjitun”ti.

     “I did, but I’ll die. I’m unable to do it.”

239. 239

     “तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti दुतियेनdu·ti·ye·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जाही”ति।ni·paj·jā·hī

     “Tena hi tvaṁ, gahapati, dutiyena passena sattamāse nipajjāhī”ti.

     “Well then, lie on the other side for seven months.”

240. 240

     अथa·tha खोkho सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti सत्ताहस्सsat·tā·has·sa अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho seṭṭhi gahapati sattāhassa accayena jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     After seven days the merchant said to Jīvaka,

241. 241

     “नाहं,nā·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi दुतियेनdu·ti·ye·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति।ni·paj·ji·tun

     “nāhaṁ, ācariya, sakkomi dutiyena passena sattamāse nipajjitun”ti.

     “Doctor, I’m unable to lie on the other side for seven months.”

242. 242

     “ननुna·nu मेme त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti पटिस्सुणि—pa·ṭis·su·ṇi

     “Nanu me tvaṁ, gahapati, paṭissuṇi—

     “But didn’t you say you were?”

243. 243

     सक्कोमहं,sak·ko·ma·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya दुतियेनdu·ti·ye·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति?ni·paj·ji·tun

     sakkomahaṁ, ācariya, dutiyena passena sattamāse nipajjitun”ti?

     (Pāli only)

244. 244

     “सच्चाहं,sac·cā·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya पटिस्सुणिं,pa·ṭis·su·ṇiṃ अपाहंa·pā·haṃ मरिस्सामि,ma·ris·sā·mi नाहं,nā·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi दुतियेनdu·ti·ye·na पस्सेनpas·se·na सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति।ni·paj·ji·tun

     “Saccāhaṁ, ācariya, paṭissuṇiṁ, apāhaṁ marissāmi, nāhaṁ, ācariya, sakkomi dutiyena passena sattamāse nipajjitun”ti.

     “I did, but I’ll die. I’m unable to do it.”

245. 245

     “तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti उत्तानोut·tā·no सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जाही”ति।ni·paj·jā·hī

     “Tena hi tvaṁ, gahapati, uttāno sattamāse nipajjāhī”ti.

     “Well then, lie on your back for seven months.”

246. 246

     अथa·tha खोkho सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti सत्ताहस्सsat·tā·has·sa अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho seṭṭhi gahapati sattāhassa accayena jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     After seven days the merchant said to Jīvaka,

247. 247

     “नाहं,nā·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi उत्तानोut·tā·no सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति।ni·paj·ji·tun

     “nāhaṁ, ācariya, sakkomi uttāno sattamāse nipajjitun”ti.

     “Doctor, I’m unable to lie on my back for seven months.”

248. 248

     “ननुna·nu मेme त्वं,tvaṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti पटिस्सुणि—pa·ṭis·su·ṇi

     “Nanu me tvaṁ, gahapati, paṭissuṇi—

     “But didn’t you say you were?”

249. 249

     सक्कोमहं,sak·ko·ma·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya उत्तानोut·tā·no सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति?ni·paj·ji·tun

     sakkomahaṁ, ācariya, uttāno sattamāse nipajjitun”ti?

     (Pāli only)

250. 250

     “सच्चाहं,sac·cā·haṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya पटिस्सुणिं,pa·ṭis·su·ṇiṃ अपाहंa·pā·haṃ मरिस्सामि,ma·ris·sā·mi नाहंnā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi उत्तानोut·tā·no सत्तमासेsat·ta·mā·se निपज्जितुन्”ति।ni·paj·ji·tun

     “Saccāhaṁ, ācariya, paṭissuṇiṁ, apāhaṁ marissāmi, nāhaṁ sakkomi uttāno sattamāse nipajjitun”ti.

     “I did, but I’ll die. I’m unable to do it.”

251. 251

     “अहञ्चेa·hañ·ce तं,taṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti नna वदेय्यं,va·dey·yaṃ एत्तकम्पिet·ta·kam·pi त्वंtvaṃ नna निपज्जेय्यासि,ni·paj·jey·yā·si अपिa·pi चca पटिकच्चेवpa·ṭi·kac·ce·va मयाma·yā ञातो—ñā·to

     “Ahañce taṁ, gahapati, na vadeyyaṁ, ettakampi tvaṁ na nipajjeyyāsi, api ca paṭikacceva mayā ñāto—

     “If I hadn’t said this to you, you wouldn’t have been able to lie down for so long.

252. 252

     तीहिtī·hi सत्ताहेहिsat·tā·he·hi सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti अरोगोa·ro·go भविस्सतीति।bha·vis·sa·tī·ti

     tīhi sattāhehi seṭṭhi gahapati arogo bhavissatīti.

     I already knew that you would be well in three times seven days.

253. 253

     उट्ठेहि,uṭ·ṭhe·hi गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti अरोगोसि।a·ro·go·si

     Uṭṭhehi, gahapati, arogosi.

     Get up, you’re cured.

254. 254

     जानासिjā·nā·si किंkiṃ मेme देय्यधम्मो”ति?dey·ya·dham·mo

     Jānāsi kiṁ me deyyadhammo”ti?

     But do you remember my fee?”

255. 255

     “सब्बंsab·baṃ सापतेय्यञ्चsā·pa·tey·yañ·ca ते,te आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya होतु,ho·tu अहञ्चa·hañ·ca तेte दासो”ति।dā·so

     “Sabbaṁ sāpateyyañca te, ācariya, hotu, ahañca te dāso”ti.

     “All my wealth is yours, doctor, and I’m your slave.”

256. 256

     “अलं,a·laṃ गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti माmā मेme त्वंtvaṃ सब्बंsab·baṃ सापतेय्यंsā·pa·tey·yaṃ अदासि,a·dā·si माmā चca मेme दासो।dā·so

     “Alaṁ, gahapati, mā me tvaṁ sabbaṁ sāpateyyaṁ adāsi, mā ca me dāso.

     “There’s no need for that.

257. 257

     रञ्ञोrañ·ño सतसहस्संsa·ta·sa·has·saṃ देहि,de·hi मय्हंmay·haṃ सतसहस्सन्”ति।sa·ta·sa·has·san

     Rañño satasahassaṁ dehi, mayhaṁ satasahassan”ti.

     Just give one hundred thousand coins to the king and another one hundred thousand to me.”

258. 258

     अथa·tha खोkho सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti अरोगोa·ro·go समानोsa·mā·no रञ्ञोrañ·ño सतसहस्संsa·ta·sa·has·saṃ अदासि,a·dā·si जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa सतसहस्सं।sa·ta·sa·has·saṃ

     Atha kho seṭṭhi gahapati arogo samāno rañño satasahassaṁ adāsi, jīvakassa komārabhaccassa satasahassaṁ.

     And being well, he did just that.

259. 259

     5। सेट्ठिपुत्तवत्थुseṭ·ṭhi·put·ta·vat·thu

     5. Seṭṭhiputtavatthu

     5. The account of the wealthy merchant’s son

260. 260

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na बाराणसेय्यकस्सbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·kas·sa सेट्ठिपुत्तस्सseṭ·ṭhi·put·tas·sa मोक्खचिकायmok·kha·ci·kā·ya कीळन्तस्सkī·ḷan·tas·sa अन्तगण्ठाबाधोan·ta·gaṇ·ṭhā·bā·dho होति,ho·ti येनye·na यागुपिyā·gu·pi पीताpī·tā नna सम्माsam·mā परिणामंpa·ri·ṇā·maṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti भत्तम्पिbhat·tam·pi भुत्तंbhut·taṃ नna सम्माsam·mā परिणामंpa·ri·ṇā·maṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti उच्चारोपिuc·cā·ro·pi पस्सावोपिpas·sā·vo·pi नna पगुणो।pa·gu·ṇo

     Tena kho pana samayena bārāṇaseyyakassa seṭṭhiputtassa mokkhacikāya kīḷantassa antagaṇṭhābādho hoti, yena yāgupi pītā na sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, bhattampi bhuttaṁ na sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, uccāropi passāvopi na paguṇo.

     On one occasion the son of a wealthy merchant in Benares twisted his gut while turning somersaults. Because of that, he was not able to digest congee or food, and he couldn’t urinate or defecate.

261. 261

     सोso तेनte·na किसोki·so होतिho·ti लूखोlū·kho दुब्बण्णोdub·baṇ·ṇo उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजातोup·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·to धमनिसन्थतगत्तो।dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·to

     So tena kiso hoti lūkho dubbaṇṇo uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāto dhamanisanthatagatto.

     He became thin, haggard, and pale, with veins protruding all over his body.

262. 262

     अथa·tha खोkho बाराणसेय्यकस्सbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·kas·sa सेट्ठिस्सseṭ·ṭhis·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho bārāṇaseyyakassa seṭṭhissa etadahosi—

     The merchant considered this

263. 263

     “मय्हंmay·haṃ खोkho पुत्तस्सput·tas·sa तादिसोtā·di·so आबाधो,ā·bā·dho येनye·na यागुपिyā·gu·pi पीताpī·tā नna सम्माsam·mā परिणामंpa·ri·ṇā·maṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti भत्तम्पिbhat·tam·pi भुत्तंbhut·taṃ नna सम्माsam·mā परिणामंpa·ri·ṇā·maṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti उच्चारोपिuc·cā·ro·pi पस्सावोपिpas·sā·vo·pi नna पगुणो।pa·gu·ṇo

     “mayhaṁ kho puttassa tādiso ābādho, yena yāgupi pītā na sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, bhattampi bhuttaṁ na sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, uccāropi passāvopi na paguṇo.

     (Pāli only)

264. 264

     सोso तेनte·na किसोki·so लूखोlū·kho दुब्बण्णोdub·baṇ·ṇo उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजातोup·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·to धमनिसन्थतगत्तो।dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·to

     So tena kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāto dhamanisanthatagatto.

     (Pāli only)

265. 265

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā राजानंrā·jā·naṃ जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ याचेय्यंyā·cey·yaṃ पुत्तंput·taṃ मेme तिकिच्छितुन्”ति।ti·kic·chi·tun

     Yannūnāhaṁ rājagahaṁ gantvā rājānaṁ jīvakaṁ vejjaṁ yāceyyaṁ puttaṁ me tikicchitun”ti.

     and thought, “Why don’t I go to Rājagaha and ask the king for doctor Jīvaka to treat my son?”

266. 266

     अथa·tha खोkho बाराणसेय्यकोbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·ko सेट्ठिseṭ·ṭhi राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā येनye·na राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā राजानंrā·jā·naṃ मागधंmā·ga·dhaṃ सेनियंse·ni·yaṃ बिम्बिसारंbim·bi·sā·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho bārāṇaseyyako seṭṭhi rājagahaṁ gantvā yena rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ māgadhaṁ seniyaṁ bimbisāraṁ etadavoca—

     He then traveled to Rājagaha, went to King Bimbisāra, and told him about his son,

267. 267

     “मय्हंmay·haṃ खो,kho देव,de·va पुत्तस्सput·tas·sa तादिसोtā·di·so आबाधो,ā·bā·dho येनye·na यागुपिyā·gu·pi पीताpī·tā नna सम्माsam·mā परिणामंpa·ri·ṇā·maṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti भत्तम्पिbhat·tam·pi भुत्तंbhut·taṃ नna सम्माsam·mā परिणामंpa·ri·ṇā·maṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti उच्चारोपिuc·cā·ro·pi पस्सावोपिpas·sā·vo·pi नna पगुणो।pa·gu·ṇo

     “mayhaṁ kho, deva, puttassa tādiso ābādho, yena yāgupi pītā na sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, bhattampi bhuttaṁ na sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, uccāropi passāvopi na paguṇo.

     (Pāli only)

268. 268

     सोso तेनte·na किसोki·so लूखोlū·kho दुब्बण्णोdub·baṇ·ṇo उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजातोup·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·to धमनिसन्थतगत्तो।dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·to

     So tena kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāto dhamanisanthatagatto.

     (Pāli only)

269. 269

     साधुsā·dhu देवोde·vo जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ आणापेतुā·ṇā·pe·tu पुत्तंput·taṃ मेme तिकिच्छितुन्”ति।ti·kic·chi·tun

     Sādhu devo jīvakaṁ vejjaṁ āṇāpetu puttaṁ me tikicchitun”ti.

     adding, “Sir, please ask doctor Jīvaka to treat my son.”

270. 270

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ āṇāpesi—

     And that’s what the king did.

271. 271

     “गच्छ,gac·cha भणेbha·ṇe जीवक,jī·va·ka बाराणसिंbā·rā·ṇa·siṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā बाराणसेय्यकंbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·kaṃ सेट्ठिपुत्तंseṭ·ṭhi·put·taṃ तिकिच्छाही”ति।ti·kic·chā·hī

     “gaccha, bhaṇe jīvaka, bārāṇasiṁ gantvā bārāṇaseyyakaṁ seṭṭhiputtaṁ tikicchāhī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

272. 272

     “एवं,e·vaṃ देवा”तिde·vā खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā बाराणसिंbā·rā·ṇa·siṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā येनye·na बाराणसेय्यकोbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·ko सेट्ठिपुत्तोseṭ·ṭhi·put·to तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā बाराणसेय्यकस्सbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·kas·sa सेट्ठिपुत्तस्सseṭ·ṭhi·put·tas·sa विकारंvi·kā·raṃ सल्लक्खेत्वाsal·lak·khet·vā जनंja·naṃ उस्सारेत्वाus·sā·ret·vā तिरोकरणियंti·ro·ka·ra·ṇi·yaṃ परिक्खिपित्वाpa·rik·khi·pit·vā थम्भेtham·bhe उब्बन्धित्वाub·ban·dhit·vā भरियंbha·ri·yaṃ पुरतोpu·ra·to ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā उदरच्छविंu·da·rac·cha·viṃ उप्पाटेत्वाup·pā·ṭet·vā अन्तगण्ठिंan·ta·gaṇ·ṭhiṃ नीहरित्वाnī·ha·rit·vā भरियायbha·ri·yā·ya दस्सेसि—das·se·si

     “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho jīvako komārabhacco rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa paṭissutvā bārāṇasiṁ gantvā yena bārāṇaseyyako seṭṭhiputto tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bārāṇaseyyakassa seṭṭhiputtassa vikāraṁ sallakkhetvā janaṁ ussāretvā tirokaraṇiyaṁ parikkhipitvā thambhe ubbandhitvā bhariyaṁ purato ṭhapetvā udaracchaviṁ uppāṭetvā antagaṇṭhiṁ nīharitvā bhariyāya dassesi—

     Jīvaka consented and then traveled to Benares where he went to that merchant. He examined his son, dismissed the people there, put up a curtain all around, and tied him to a pillar. He then had his wife stand in front of him, cut open his belly, and pulled out his twisted gut. He showed it to his wife, saying,

273. 273

     “पस्सpas·sa तेte सामिकस्सsā·mi·kas·sa आबाधं,ā·bā·dhaṃ इमिनाi·mi·nā यागुपिyā·gu·pi पीताpī·tā नna सम्माsam·mā परिणामंpa·ri·ṇā·maṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti भत्तम्पिbhat·tam·pi भुत्तंbhut·taṃ नna सम्माsam·mā परिणामंpa·ri·ṇā·maṃ गच्छति,gac·cha·ti उच्चारोपिuc·cā·ro·pi पस्सावोपिpas·sā·vo·pi नna पगुणो;pa·gu·ṇo

     “passa te sāmikassa ābādhaṁ, iminā yāgupi pītā na sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, bhattampi bhuttaṁ na sammā pariṇāmaṁ gacchati, uccāropi passāvopi na paguṇo;

     “See, this is your husband’s affliction.

274. 274

     इमिनायंi·mi·nā·yaṃ किसोki·so लूखोlū·kho दुब्बण्णोdub·baṇ·ṇo उप्पण्डुप्पण्डुकजातोup·paṇ·ḍup·paṇ·ḍu·ka·jā·to धमनिसन्थतगत्तो”ति।dha·ma·ni·san·tha·ta·gat·to

     imināyaṁ kiso lūkho dubbaṇṇo uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajāto dhamanisanthatagatto”ti.

     It’s because of this that he’s in such a bad state.”

275. 275

     अन्तगण्ठिंan·ta·gaṇ·ṭhiṃ विनिवेठेत्वाvi·ni·ve·ṭhet·vā अन्तानिan·tā·ni पटिपवेसेत्वाpa·ṭi·pa·ve·set·vā उदरच्छविंu·da·rac·cha·viṃ सिब्बित्वाsib·bit·vā आलेपंā·le·paṃ अदासि।a·dā·si

     Antagaṇṭhiṁ viniveṭhetvā antāni paṭipavesetvā udaracchaviṁ sibbitvā ālepaṁ adāsi.

     He then untwisted the gut, put it back, sewed his belly back together, and applied ointment.

276. 276

     अथa·tha खोkho बाराणसेय्यकोbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·ko सेट्ठिपुत्तोseṭ·ṭhi·put·to नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va अरोगोa·ro·go अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Atha kho bārāṇaseyyako seṭṭhiputto nacirasseva arogo ahosi.

     Soon the merchant’s son was healthy again.

277. 277

     अथa·tha खोkho बाराणसेय्यकोbā·rā·ṇa·sey·ya·ko सेट्ठि—seṭ·ṭhi

     Atha kho bārāṇaseyyako seṭṭhi—

     (Pāli only)

278. 278

     “पुत्तोput·to मेme अरोगोa·ro·go ठितो”तिṭhi·to जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa सोळससहस्सानिso·ḷa·sa·sa·has·sā·ni पादासि।pā·dā·si

     “putto me arogo ṭhito”ti jīvakassa komārabhaccassa soḷasasahassāni pādāsi.

     His father gave sixteen thousand coins to Jīvaka,

279. 279

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तानिtā·ni सोळससहस्सानिso·ḷa·sa·sa·has·sā·ni आदायā·dā·ya पुनदेवpu·na·de·va राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ पच्चागञ्छि।pac·cā·gañ·chi

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco tāni soḷasasahassāni ādāya punadeva rājagahaṁ paccāgañchi.

     and Jīvaka returned to Rājagaha.

280. 280

     6। पज्जोतराजवत्थुpaj·jo·ta·rā·ja·vat·thu

     6. Pajjotarājavatthu

     6. The account of King Pajjota

281. 281

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na रञ्ञोrañ·ño पज्जोतस्सpaj·jo·tas·sa पण्डुरोगाबाधोpaṇ·ḍu·ro·gā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena rañño pajjotassa paṇḍurogābādho hoti.

     At that time King Pajjota had jaundice.

282. 282

     बहूba·hū महन्ताma·han·tā महन्ताma·han·tā दिसापामोक्खाdi·sā·pā·mok·khā वेज्जाvej·jā आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā नासक्खिंसुnā·sak·khiṃ·su अरोगंa·ro·gaṃ कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     Bahū mahantā mahantā disāpāmokkhā vejjā āgantvā nāsakkhiṁsu arogaṁ kātuṁ.

     Many of the most famous physicians in the world had come to see him, but none was able to cure him.

283. 283

     बहुंba·huṃ हिरञ्ञंhi·rañ·ñaṃ आदायā·dā·ya अगमंसु।a·ga·maṃ·su

     Bahuṁ hiraññaṁ ādāya agamaṁsu.

     And they were very expensive.

284. 284

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā पज्जोतोpaj·jo·to रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke दूतंdū·taṃ पाहेसि—pā·he·si

     Atha kho rājā pajjoto rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa santike dūtaṁ pāhesi—

     King Pajjota then sent a message to King Bimbisāra:

285. 285

     “मय्हंmay·haṃ खोkho तादिसोtā·di·so आबाधो,ā·bā·dho साधुsā·dhu देवोde·vo जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ आणापेतु,ā·ṇā·pe·tu सोso मंmaṃ तिकिच्छिस्सती”ति।ti·kic·chis·sa·tī

     “mayhaṁ kho tādiso ābādho, sādhu devo jīvakaṁ vejjaṁ āṇāpetu, so maṁ tikicchissatī”ti.

     “Sir, I have such-and-such a disease. Please ask doctor Jīvaka to treat me.”

286. 286

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ āṇāpesi—

     King Bimbisāra told Jīvaka,

287. 287

     “गच्छ,gac·cha भणेbha·ṇe जीवक;jī·va·ka

     “gaccha, bhaṇe jīvaka;

     “Go to Ujjenī, Jīvaka,

288. 288

     उज्जेनिंuj·je·niṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā राजानंrā·jā·naṃ पज्जोतंpaj·jo·taṃ तिकिच्छाही”ति।ti·kic·chā·hī

     ujjeniṁ gantvā rājānaṁ pajjotaṁ tikicchāhī”ti.

     and treat King Pajjota.”

289. 289

     “एवं,e·vaṃ देवा”तिde·vā खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā उज्जेनिंuj·je·niṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā येनye·na राजाrā·jā पज्जोतोpaj·jo·to तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā रञ्ञोrañ·ño पज्जोतस्सpaj·jo·tas·sa विकारंvi·kā·raṃ सल्लक्खेत्वाsal·lak·khet·vā राजानंrā·jā·naṃ पज्जोतंpaj·jo·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     “Evaṁ, devā”ti kho jīvako komārabhacco rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa paṭissutvā ujjeniṁ gantvā yena rājā pajjoto tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rañño pajjotassa vikāraṁ sallakkhetvā rājānaṁ pajjotaṁ etadavoca—

     Jīvaka consented and traveled to Ujjenī. He then went to King Pajjota, examined him, and said,

290. 290

     “सप्पिंsap·piṃ देहि,de·hi सप्पिं,sap·piṃ देव,de·va निप्पचिस्सामि।nip·pa·cis·sā·mi

     “sappiṁ dehi, sappiṁ, deva, nippacissāmi.

     “Please give me some ghee, sir.

291. 291

     तंtaṃ देवोde·vo पिविस्सती”ति।pi·vis·sa·tī

     Taṁ devo pivissatī”ti.

     I’ll make a medicine from it for you to drink.”

292. 292

     “अलं,a·laṃ भणेbha·ṇe जीवक,jī·va·ka यंyaṃ तेte सक्काsak·kā विनाvi·nā सप्पिनाsap·pi·nā अरोगंa·ro·gaṃ कातुंkā·tuṃ तंtaṃ करोहि।ka·ro·hi

     “Alaṁ, bhaṇe jīvaka, yaṁ te sakkā vinā sappinā arogaṁ kātuṁ taṁ karohi.

     “Forget it, Jīvaka. Make whatever will cure me that doesn’t contain ghee.

293. 293

     जेगुच्छंje·guc·chaṃ मेme सप्पि,sap·pi पटिकूलन्”ति।pa·ṭi·kū·lan

     Jegucchaṁ me sappi, paṭikūlan”ti.

     I hate ghee; it’s disgusting.”

294. 294

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho jīvakassa komārabhaccassa etadahosi—

     Jīvaka thought,

295. 295

     “इमस्सi·mas·sa खोkho रञ्ञोrañ·ño तादिसोtā·di·so आबाधो,ā·bā·dho नna सक्काsak·kā विनाvi·nā सप्पिनाsap·pi·nā अरोगंa·ro·gaṃ कातुं।kā·tuṃ

     “imassa kho rañño tādiso ābādho, na sakkā vinā sappinā arogaṁ kātuṁ.

     “I won’t be able to cure this sickness without ghee.

296. 296

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सप्पिंsap·piṃ निप्पचेय्यंnip·pa·cey·yaṃ कसाववण्णंka·sā·va·vaṇ·ṇaṃ कसावगन्धंka·sā·va·gan·dhaṃ कसावरसन्”ति।ka·sā·va·ra·san

     Yannūnāhaṁ sappiṁ nippaceyyaṁ kasāvavaṇṇaṁ kasāvagandhaṁ kasāvarasan”ti.

     Why don’t I prepare medicine from ghee, but with a bitter color, smell, and taste?”

297. 297

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co नानाभेसज्जेहिnā·nā·bhe·saj·je·hi सप्पिंsap·piṃ निप्पचिnip·pa·ci कसाववण्णंka·sā·va·vaṇ·ṇaṃ कसावगन्धंka·sā·va·gan·dhaṃ कसावरसं।ka·sā·va·ra·saṃ

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco nānābhesajjehi sappiṁ nippaci kasāvavaṇṇaṁ kasāvagandhaṁ kasāvarasaṁ.

     Jīvaka then cooked ghee with a number of medicines, but he made sure it had the color, smell, and taste of a bitter substance.

298. 298

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho jīvakassa komārabhaccassa etadahosi—

     But it occurred to him,

299. 299

     “इमस्सi·mas·sa खोkho रञ्ञोrañ·ño सप्पिsap·pi पीतंpī·taṃ परिणामेन्तंpa·ri·ṇā·men·taṃ उद्देकंud·de·kaṃ दस्सति।das·sa·ti

     “imassa kho rañño sappi pītaṁ pariṇāmentaṁ uddekaṁ dassati.

     “When the king is digesting the ghee after drinking it, it will make him vomit.

300. 300

     चण्डोयंcaṇ·ḍo·yaṃ राजाrā·jā घातापेय्यापिghā·tā·pey·yā·pi मं।maṃ

     Caṇḍoyaṁ rājā ghātāpeyyāpi maṁ.

     And because he’s temperamental, he might have me executed.

301. 301

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ पटिकच्चेवpa·ṭi·kac·ce·va आपुच्छेय्यन्”ति।ā·puc·chey·yan

     Yannūnāhaṁ paṭikacceva āpuccheyyan”ti.

     Let me take leave in advance.”

302. 302

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co येनye·na राजाrā·jā पज्जोतोpaj·jo·to तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā राजानंrā·jā·naṃ पज्जोतंpaj·jo·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco yena rājā pajjoto tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā rājānaṁ pajjotaṁ etadavoca—

     He then went to the king and said,

303. 303

     “मयंma·yaṃ खो,kho देव,de·va वेज्जाvej·jā नामnā·ma तादिसेनtā·di·se·na मुहुत्तेनmu·hut·te·na मूलानिmū·lā·ni उद्धरामud·dha·rā·ma भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni संहराम।saṃ·ha·rā·ma

     “mayaṁ kho, deva, vejjā nāma tādisena muhuttena mūlāni uddharāma bhesajjāni saṁharāma.

     “Sir, we doctors need to pull up roots and collect medicines at short notice.

304. 304

     साधुsā·dhu देवोde·vo वाहनागारेसुvā·ha·nā·gā·re·su चca द्वारेसुdvā·re·su चca आणापेतु—ā·ṇā·pe·tu

     Sādhu devo vāhanāgāresu ca dvāresu ca āṇāpetu—

     Please instruct the stables and the gates:

305. 305

     येनye·na वाहनेनvā·ha·ne·na जीवकोjī·va·ko इच्छतिic·cha·ti तेनte·na वाहनेनvā·ha·ne·na गच्छतु,gac·cha·tu येनye·na द्वारेनdvā·re·na इच्छतिic·cha·ti तेनte·na द्वारेनdvā·re·na गच्छतु,gac·cha·tu यंyaṃ कालंkā·laṃ इच्छतिic·cha·ti तंtaṃ कालंkā·laṃ गच्छतु,gac·cha·tu यंyaṃ कालंkā·laṃ इच्छतिic·cha·ti तंtaṃ कालंkā·laṃ पविसतू”ति।pa·vi·sa·tū

     yena vāhanena jīvako icchati tena vāhanena gacchatu, yena dvārena icchati tena dvārena gacchatu, yaṁ kālaṁ icchati taṁ kālaṁ gacchatu, yaṁ kālaṁ icchati taṁ kālaṁ pavisatū”ti.

     ‘Jīvaka may ride on whatever animal he wishes, depart by whatever gate he desires, and he may come and go as he pleases.’”

306. 306

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā पज्जोतोpaj·jo·to वाहनागारेसुvā·ha·nā·gā·re·su चca द्वारेसुdvā·re·su चca आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho rājā pajjoto vāhanāgāresu ca dvāresu ca āṇāpesi—

     The king did as Jīvaka had asked.

307. 307

     “येनye·na वाहनेनvā·ha·ne·na जीवकोjī·va·ko इच्छतिic·cha·ti तेनte·na वाहनेनvā·ha·ne·na गच्छतु,gac·cha·tu येनye·na द्वारेनdvā·re·na इच्छतिic·cha·ti तेनte·na द्वारेनdvā·re·na गच्छतु,gac·cha·tu यंyaṃ कालंkā·laṃ इच्छतिic·cha·ti तंtaṃ कालंkā·laṃ गच्छतु,gac·cha·tu यंyaṃ कालंkā·laṃ इच्छतिic·cha·ti तंtaṃ कालंkā·laṃ पविसतू”ति।pa·vi·sa·tū

     “yena vāhanena jīvako icchati tena vāhanena gacchatu, yena dvārena icchati tena dvārena gacchatu, yaṁ kālaṁ icchati taṁ kālaṁ gacchatu, yaṁ kālaṁ icchati taṁ kālaṁ pavisatū”ti.

     (Pāli only)

308. 308

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na रञ्ञोrañ·ño पज्जोतस्सpaj·jo·tas·sa भद्दवतिकाbhad·da·va·ti·kā नामnā·ma हत्थिनिकाhat·thi·ni·kā पञ्ञासयोजनिकाpañ·ñā·sa·yo·ja·ni·kā होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena rañño pajjotassa bhaddavatikā nāma hatthinikā paññāsayojanikā hoti.

     At that time King Pajjota had a she-elephant called Bhaddavatikā, which could traverse 650 kilometers in a day.

309. 309

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co रञ्ञोrañ·ño पज्जोतस्सpaj·jo·tas·sa सप्पिंsap·piṃ उपनामेसि—u·pa·nā·me·si

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco rañño pajjotassa sappiṁ upanāmesi—

     After bringing the ghee to the king

310. 310

     “कसावंka·sā·vaṃ देवोde·vo पिवतू”ति।pi·va·tū

     “kasāvaṁ devo pivatū”ti.

     (Pāli only)

311. 311

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co राजानंrā·jā·naṃ पज्जोतंpaj·jo·taṃ सप्पिंsap·piṃ पायेत्वाpā·yet·vā हत्थिसालंhat·thi·sā·laṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā भद्दवतिकायbhad·da·va·ti·kā·ya हत्थिनिकायhat·thi·ni·kā·ya नगरम्हाna·ga·ram·hā निप्पति।nip·pa·ti

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco rājānaṁ pajjotaṁ sappiṁ pāyetvā hatthisālaṁ gantvā bhaddavatikāya hatthinikāya nagaramhā nippati.

     and having him drink it, Jīvaka went to the elephant stables and fled the city on Bhaddavatikā.

312. 312

     अथa·tha खोkho रञ्ञोrañ·ño पज्जोतस्सpaj·jo·tas·sa तंtaṃ सप्पिsap·pi पीतंpī·taṃ परिणामेन्तंpa·ri·ṇā·men·taṃ उद्देकंud·de·kaṃ अदासि।a·dā·si

     Atha kho rañño pajjotassa taṁ sappi pītaṁ pariṇāmentaṁ uddekaṁ adāsi.

     Soon afterwards, while King Pajjota was digesting that ghee, he vomited.

313. 313

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā पज्जोतोpaj·jo·to मनुस्सेma·nus·se एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho rājā pajjoto manusse etadavoca—

     He said to his men,

314. 314

     “दुट्ठेन,duṭ·ṭhe·na भणे,bha·ṇe जीवकेनjī·va·ke·na सप्पिंsap·piṃ पायितोम्हि।pā·yi·tom·hi

     “duṭṭhena, bhaṇe, jīvakena sappiṁ pāyitomhi.

     “That scoundrel Jīvaka made me drink ghee.

315. 315

     तेनte·na हि,hi भणे,bha·ṇe जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ विचिनथा”ति।vi·ci·na·thā

     Tena hi, bhaṇe, jīvakaṁ vejjaṁ vicinathā”ti.

     Find out where he is.”

316. 316

     “भद्दवतिकाय,bhad·da·va·ti·kā·ya देव,de·va हत्थिनिकायhat·thi·ni·kā·ya नगरम्हाna·ga·ram·hā निप्पतितो”ति।nip·pa·ti·to

     “Bhaddavatikāya, deva, hatthinikāya nagaramhā nippatito”ti.

     “Sir, he’s fled the city on Bhaddavatikā.”

317. 317

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na रञ्ञोrañ·ño पज्जोतस्सpaj·jo·tas·sa काकोkā·ko नामnā·ma दासोdā·so सट्ठियोजनिकोsaṭ·ṭhi·yo·ja·ni·ko होति,ho·ti अमनुस्सेनa·ma·nus·se·na पटिच्चpa·ṭic·ca जातो।jā·to

     Tena kho pana samayena rañño pajjotassa kāko nāma dāso saṭṭhiyojaniko hoti, amanussena paṭicca jāto.

     At that time King Pajjota had a slave called Kāka, whose mother was a spirit and who could traverse 780 kilometers in a day.

318. 318

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā पज्जोतोpaj·jo·to काकंkā·kaṃ दासंdā·saṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho rājā pajjoto kākaṁ dāsaṁ āṇāpesi—

     The king told Kāka,

319. 319

     “गच्छ,gac·cha भणेbha·ṇe काक,kā·ka जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ वेज्जंvej·jaṃ निवत्तेहि—ni·vat·te·hi

     “gaccha, bhaṇe kāka, jīvakaṁ vejjaṁ nivattehi—

     “Go, Kāka, and make Jīvaka turn back.

320. 320

     राजाrā·jā तं,taṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya निवत्तापेतीति।ni·vat·tā·pe·tī·ti

     rājā taṁ, ācariya, nivattāpetīti.

     Tell him that the king is asking him to return.

321. 321

     एतेe·te खो,kho भणेbha·ṇe काक,kā·ka वेज्जाvej·jā नामnā·ma बहुमाया।ba·hu·mā·yā

     Ete kho, bhaṇe kāka, vejjā nāma bahumāyā.

     But Kāka, these doctors are full of tricks.

322. 322

     माmā चस्सcas·sa किञ्चिkiñ·ci पटिग्गहेसी”ति।pa·ṭig·ga·he·sī

     Mā cassa kiñci paṭiggahesī”ti.

     Don’t receive anything from him.”

323. 323

     अथa·tha खोkho काकोkā·ko दासोdā·so जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge कोसम्बियंko·sam·bi·yaṃ सम्भावेसिsam·bhā·ve·si पातरासंpā·ta·rā·saṃ करोन्तं।ka·ron·taṃ

     Atha kho kāko dāso jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ antarāmagge kosambiyaṁ sambhāvesi pātarāsaṁ karontaṁ.

     Kāka caught up with Jīvaka at Kosambī, while he was still on his way and having breakfast.

324. 324

     अथa·tha खोkho काकोkā·ko दासोdā·so जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho kāko dāso jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     Kāka said,

325. 325

     “राजाrā·jā तं,taṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya निवत्तापेती”ति।ni·vat·tā·pe·tī

     “rājā taṁ, ācariya, nivattāpetī”ti.

     “Doctor, the king is asking you to return.”

326. 326

     “आगमेहि,ā·ga·me·hi भणेbha·ṇe काक,kā·ka यावyā·va भुञ्जाम।bhuñ·jā·ma

     “Āgamehi, bhaṇe kāka, yāva bhuñjāma.

     “Wait, Kāka, until I’ve finished eating.

327. 327

     हन्द,han·da भणेbha·ṇe काक,kā·ka भुञ्जस्सू”ति।bhuñ·jas·sū

     Handa, bhaṇe kāka, bhuñjassū”ti.

     Why don’t you have something too?”

328. 328

     “अलं,a·laṃ आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya रञ्ञाम्हिrañ·ñām·hi आणत्तो—ā·ṇat·to

     “Alaṁ, ācariya, raññāmhi āṇatto—

     “There’s no need.

329. 329

     एतेe·te खो,kho भणेbha·ṇe काक,kā·ka वेज्जाvej·jā नामnā·ma बहुमाया,ba·hu·mā·yā माmā चस्सcas·sa किञ्चिkiñ·ci पटिग्गहेसी”ति।pa·ṭig·ga·he·sī

     ete kho, bhaṇe kāka, vejjā nāma bahumāyā, mā cassa kiñci paṭiggahesī”ti.

     The king told me that doctors are full of tricks and that I shouldn’t receive anything from you.”

330. 330

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co नखेनna·khe·na भेसज्जंbhe·saj·jaṃ ओलुम्पेत्वाo·lum·pet·vā आमलकञ्चā·ma·la·kañ·ca खादतिkhā·da·ti पानीयञ्चpā·nī·yañ·ca पिवति।pi·va·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena jīvako komārabhacco nakhena bhesajjaṁ olumpetvā āmalakañca khādati pānīyañca pivati.

     Jīvaka then removed the medicinal part of an emblic myrobalan fruit with his nail, before eating it and drinking water.

331. 331

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co काकंkā·kaṃ दासंdā·saṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco kākaṁ dāsaṁ etadavoca—

     And he said to Kāka,

332. 332

     “हन्द,han·da भणेbha·ṇe काक,kā·ka आमलकञ्चā·ma·la·kañ·ca खादkhā·da पानीयञ्चpā·nī·yañ·ca पिवस्सू”ति।pi·vas·sū

     “handa, bhaṇe kāka, āmalakañca khāda pānīyañca pivassū”ti.

     “Here, Kāka, have some emblic myrobalan and water.”

333. 333

     अथa·tha खोkho काकोkā·ko दासो—dā·so

     Atha kho kāko dāso—

     Kāka thought,

334. 334

     “अयंa·yaṃ खोkho वेज्जोvej·jo आमलकञ्चā·ma·la·kañ·ca खादतिkhā·da·ti पानीयञ्चpā·nī·yañ·ca पिवति,pi·va·ti नna अरहतिa·ra·ha·ti किञ्चिkiñ·ci पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ होतुन्”ति—ho·tun

     “ayaṁ kho vejjo āmalakañca khādati pānīyañca pivati, na arahati kiñci pāpakaṁ hotun”ti—

     “The doctor is eating and drinking it. It can’t be anything bad.”

335. 335

     उपड्ढामलकञ्चu·paḍ·ḍhā·ma·la·kañ·ca खादिkhā·di पानीयञ्चpā·nī·yañ·ca अपायि।a·pā·yi

     upaḍḍhāmalakañca khādi pānīyañca apāyi.

     So he ate half a fruit and drank the water.

336. 336

     तस्सtas·sa तंtaṃ उपड्ढामलकंu·paḍ·ḍhā·ma·la·kaṃ खादितंkhā·di·taṃ तत्थेवtat·the·va निच्छारेसि।nic·chā·re·si

     Tassa taṁ upaḍḍhāmalakaṁ khāditaṁ tattheva nicchāresi.

     When he had eaten it, he vomited right there.

337. 337

     अथa·tha खोkho काकोkā·ko दासोdā·so जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho kāko dāso jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     He asked Jīvaka,

338. 338

     “अत्थिat·thi मे,me आचरिय,ā·ca·ri·ya जीवितन्”ति?jī·vi·tan

     “atthi me, ācariya, jīvitan”ti?

     “Will I survive?”

339. 339

     “मा,mā भणेbha·ṇe काक,kā·ka भायि,bhā·yi त्वञ्चेवtvañ·ce·va अरोगोa·ro·go भविस्ससिbha·vis·sa·si राजाrā·jā च।ca

     “Mā, bhaṇe kāka, bhāyi, tvañceva arogo bhavissasi rājā ca.

     “Don’t be afraid, Kāka. Both you and the king will be well.

340. 340

     चण्डोcaṇ·ḍo सोso राजाrā·jā घातापेय्यापिghā·tā·pey·yā·pi मं,maṃ तेनाहंte·nā·haṃ नna निवत्तामी”तिni·vat·tā·mī

     Caṇḍo so rājā ghātāpeyyāpi maṁ, tenāhaṁ na nivattāmī”ti

     But the king is temperamental and might have me executed. Because of that I won’t return.”

341. 341

     भद्दवतिकंbhad·da·va·ti·kaṃ हत्थिनिकंhat·thi·ni·kaṃ काकस्सkā·kas·sa निय्यादेत्वाniy·yā·det·vā येनye·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ तेनte·na पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     bhaddavatikaṁ hatthinikaṁ kākassa niyyādetvā yena rājagahaṁ tena pakkāmi.

     After handing back the she-elephant Bhaddavatikā to Kāka, he continued on to Rājagaha.

342. 342

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na येनye·na राजाrā·jā मागधोmā·ga·dho सेनियोse·ni·yo बिम्बिसारोbim·bi·sā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā रञ्ञोrañ·ño मागधस्सmā·ga·dhas·sa सेनियस्सse·ni·yas·sa बिम्बिसारस्सbim·bi·sā·ras·sa एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

     Anupubbena yena rājā māgadho seniyo bimbisāro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

     When he eventually arrived, he went to King Bimbisāra and told him what had happened.

343. 343

     “सुट्ठु,suṭ·ṭhu भणेbha·ṇe जीवक,jī·va·ka अकासिa·kā·si यम्पिyam·pi नna निवत्तो,ni·vat·to चण्डोcaṇ·ḍo सोso राजाrā·jā घातापेय्यापिghā·tā·pey·yā·pi तन्”ति।tan

     “Suṭṭhu, bhaṇe jīvaka, akāsi yampi na nivatto, caṇḍo so rājā ghātāpeyyāpi tan”ti.

     The king said, “It’s good, Jīvaka, that you didn’t return. That king is temperamental and might even have had you executed.”

344. 344

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā पज्जोतोpaj·jo·to अरोगोa·ro·go समानोsa·mā·no जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa सन्तिकेsan·ti·ke दूतंdū·taṃ पाहेसि—pā·he·si

     Atha kho rājā pajjoto arogo samāno jīvakassa komārabhaccassa santike dūtaṁ pāhesi—

     When King Pajjota was cured, he sent a message to Jīvaka:

345. 345

     “आगच्छतुā·gac·cha·tu जीवको,jī·va·ko वरंva·raṃ दस्सामी”ति।das·sā·mī

     “āgacchatu jīvako, varaṁ dassāmī”ti.

     “Come, Jīvaka, I wish to give you a gift.”

346. 346

     “अलं,a·laṃ अय्यो,ay·yo अधिकारंa·dhi·kā·raṃ मेme देवोde·vo सरतू”ति।sa·ra·tū

     “Alaṁ, ayyo, adhikāraṁ me devo saratū”ti.

     He replied, “There’s no need, sir. Please just remember my act of service.”

347. 347

     7। सिवेय्यकदुस्सयुगकथाsi·vey·ya·ka·dus·sa·yu·ga·ka·thā

     7. Siveyyakadussayugakathā

     7. The account of the two valuable cloths

348. 348

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na रञ्ञोrañ·ño पज्जोतस्सpaj·jo·tas·sa सिवेय्यकंsi·vey·ya·kaṃ दुस्सयुगंdus·sa·yu·gaṃ उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ होति—ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena rañño pajjotassa siveyyakaṁ dussayugaṁ uppannaṁ hoti—

     Soon afterwards King Pajjota obtained two valuable cloths.

349. 349

     बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सानंdus·sā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगानंdus·sa·yu·gā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगसतानंdus·sa·yu·ga·sa·tā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगसहस्सानंdus·sa·yu·ga·sa·has·sā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगसतसहस्सानंdus·sa·yu·ga·sa·ta·sa·has·sā·naṃ अग्गञ्चag·gañ·ca सेट्ठञ्चseṭ·ṭhañ·ca मोक्खञ्चmok·khañ·ca उत्तमञ्चut·ta·mañ·ca पवरञ्च।pa·va·rañ·ca

     bahūnaṁ dussānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugasahassānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugasatasahassānaṁ aggañca seṭṭhañca mokkhañca uttamañca pavarañca.

     They were extremely exquisite and fine, one in a million.

350. 350

     अथa·tha खोkho राजाrā·jā पज्जोतोpaj·jo·to तंtaṃ सिवेय्यकंsi·vey·ya·kaṃ दुस्सयुगंdus·sa·yu·gaṃ जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa पाहेसि।pā·he·si

     Atha kho rājā pajjoto taṁ siveyyakaṁ dussayugaṁ jīvakassa komārabhaccassa pāhesi.

     The king sent them to Jīvaka.

351. 351

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho jīvakassa komārabhaccassa etadahosi—

     Jīvaka thought,

352. 352

     “इदंi·daṃ खोkho मेme सिवेय्यकंsi·vey·ya·kaṃ दुस्सयुगंdus·sa·yu·gaṃ रञ्ञाrañ·ñā पज्जोतेनpaj·jo·te·na पहितं—pa·hi·taṃ

     “idaṁ kho me siveyyakaṁ dussayugaṁ raññā pajjotena pahitaṁ—

     (Pāli only)

353. 353

     बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सानंdus·sā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगानंdus·sa·yu·gā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगसतानंdus·sa·yu·ga·sa·tā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगसहस्सानंdus·sa·yu·ga·sa·has·sā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगसतसहस्सानंdus·sa·yu·ga·sa·ta·sa·has·sā·naṃ अग्गञ्चag·gañ·ca सेट्ठञ्चseṭ·ṭhañ·ca मोक्खञ्चmok·khañ·ca उत्तमञ्चut·ta·mañ·ca पवरञ्च।pa·va·rañ·ca

     bahūnaṁ dussānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugasahassānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugasatasahassānaṁ aggañca seṭṭhañca mokkhañca uttamañca pavarañca.

     (Pāli only)

354. 354

     नयिदंna·yi·daṃ अञ्ञोañ·ño कोचिko·ci पच्चारहतिpac·cā·ra·ha·ti अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra तेनte·na भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अरहताa·ra·ha·tā सम्मासम्बुद्धेन,sam·mā·sam·bud·dhe·na रञ्ञाrañ·ñā वाvā मागधेनmā·ga·dhe·na सेनियेनse·ni·ye·na बिम्बिसारेना”ति।bim·bi·sā·re·nā

     Nayidaṁ añño koci paccārahati aññatra tena bhagavatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena, raññā vā māgadhena seniyena bimbisārenā”ti.

     “No one is worthy of these except the Buddha, the Perfected and fully Awakened One, or King Bimbisāra.”

355. 355

     8। समत्तिंसविरेचनकथाsa·mat·tiṃ·sa·vi·re·ca·na·ka·thā

     8. Samattiṁsavirecanakathā

     8. The account of the thirty purgings

356. 356

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कायोkā·yo दोसाभिसन्नोdo·sā·bhi·san·no होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhagavato kāyo dosābhisanno hoti.

     On one occasion the Buddha’s body was full of impurities.

357. 357

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

     He said to Venerable Ānanda,

358. 358

     “दोसाभिसन्नोdo·sā·bhi·san·no खो,kho आनन्द,ā·nan·da तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa कायो।kā·yo

     “dosābhisanno kho, ānanda, tathāgatassa kāyo.

     “Ānanda, my body is full of impurities.

359. 359

     इच्छतिic·cha·ti तथागतोta·thā·ga·to विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ पातुन्”ति।pā·tun

     Icchati tathāgato virecanaṁ pātun”ti.

     I would like to take a purgative.”

360. 360

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do येनye·na जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmā ānando yena jīvako komārabhacco tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     Ānanda went to Jīvaka and told him what the Buddha had said.

361. 361

     “दोसाभिसन्नोdo·sā·bhi·san·no खो,kho आवुसोā·vu·so जीवक,jī·va·ka तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa कायो।kā·yo

     “dosābhisanno kho, āvuso jīvaka, tathāgatassa kāyo.

     (Pāli only)

362. 362

     इच्छतिic·cha·ti तथागतोta·thā·ga·to विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ पातुन्”ति।pā·tun

     Icchati tathāgato virecanaṁ pātun”ti.

     (Pāli only)

363. 363

     “तेनte·na हि,hi भन्तेbhan·te आनन्द,ā·nan·da भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कायंkā·yaṃ कतिपाहंka·ti·pā·haṃ सिनेहेथा”ति।si·ne·he·thā

     “Tena hi, bhante ānanda, bhagavato kāyaṁ katipāhaṁ sinehethā”ti.

     And Jīvaka replied, “Well then, Venerable Ānanda, oil the Buddha’s body for a few days.”

364. 364

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कायंkā·yaṃ कतिपाहंka·ti·pā·haṃ सिनेहेत्वाsi·ne·het·vā येनye·na जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato kāyaṁ katipāhaṁ sinehetvā yena jīvako komārabhacco tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ etadavoca—

     After doing as instructed, Ānanda returned to Jīvaka to let him know, adding,

365. 365

     “सिनिद्धोsi·nid·dho खो,kho आवुसोā·vu·so जीवक,jī·va·ka तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa कायो।kā·yo

     “siniddho kho, āvuso jīvaka, tathāgatassa kāyo.

     (Pāli only)

366. 366

     यस्सदानिyas·sa·dā·ni कालंkā·laṃ मञ्ञसी”ति।mañ·ña·sī

     Yassadāni kālaṁ maññasī”ti.

     “Please continue the treatment.”

367. 367

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho jīvakassa komārabhaccassa etadahosi—

     Jīvaka thought,

368. 368

     “नna खोkho मेतंme·taṃ पतिरूपंpa·ti·rū·paṃ योहंyo·haṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to ओळारिकंo·ḷā·ri·kaṃ विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ ददेय्यन्”ति।da·dey·yan

     “na kho metaṁ patirūpaṁ yohaṁ bhagavato oḷārikaṁ virecanaṁ dadeyyan”ti.

     “It would not be appropriate for me to give the Buddha a powerful purgative.”

369. 369

     तीणिtī·ṇi उप्पलहत्थानिup·pa·la·hat·thā·ni नानाभेसज्जेहिnā·nā·bhe·saj·je·hi परिभावेत्वाpa·ri·bhā·vet·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एकंe·kaṃ उप्पलहत्थंup·pa·la·hat·thaṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to उपनामेसि—u·pa·nā·me·si

     Tīṇi uppalahatthāni nānābhesajjehi paribhāvetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā ekaṁ uppalahatthaṁ bhagavato upanāmesi—

     He then prepared three handfuls of blue water-lily flowers with a variety of medicines, went to the Buddha, and gave him one handful, saying,

370. 370

     “इमं,i·maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ उप्पलहत्थंup·pa·la·hat·thaṃ उपसिङ्घतु।u·pa·siṅ·gha·tu

     “imaṁ, bhante, bhagavā paṭhamaṁ uppalahatthaṁ upasiṅghatu.

     “Sir, please smell the first handful.

371. 371

     इदंi·daṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दसक्खत्तुंda·sak·khat·tuṃ विरेचेस्सती”ति।vi·re·ces·sa·tī

     Idaṁ bhagavantaṁ dasakkhattuṁ virecessatī”ti.

     This will purge you ten times.”

372. 372

     दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ उप्पलहत्थंup·pa·la·hat·thaṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to उपनामेसि—u·pa·nā·me·si

     Dutiyaṁ uppalahatthaṁ bhagavato upanāmesi—

     He then brought him the second

373. 373

     “इमं,i·maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ उप्पलहत्थंup·pa·la·hat·thaṃ उपसिङ्घतु।u·pa·siṅ·gha·tu

     “imaṁ, bhante, bhagavā dutiyaṁ uppalahatthaṁ upasiṅghatu.

     (Pāli only)

374. 374

     इदंi·daṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दसक्खत्तुंda·sak·khat·tuṃ विरेचेस्सती”ति।vi·re·ces·sa·tī

     Idaṁ bhagavantaṁ dasakkhattuṁ virecessatī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

375. 375

     ततियंta·ti·yaṃ उप्पलहत्थंup·pa·la·hat·thaṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to उपनामेसि—u·pa·nā·me·si

     Tatiyaṁ uppalahatthaṁ bhagavato upanāmesi—

     and the third handful, repeating the instruction,

376. 376

     “इमं,i·maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā ततियंta·ti·yaṃ उप्पलहत्थंup·pa·la·hat·thaṃ उपसिङ्घतु।u·pa·siṅ·gha·tu

     “imaṁ, bhante, bhagavā tatiyaṁ uppalahatthaṁ upasiṅghatu.

     (Pāli only)

377. 377

     इदंi·daṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दसक्खत्तुंda·sak·khat·tuṃ विरेचेस्सती”ति।vi·re·ces·sa·tī

     Idaṁ bhagavantaṁ dasakkhattuṁ virecessatī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

378. 378

     एवंe·vaṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to समत्तिंसायsa·mat·tiṃ·sā·ya विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ भविस्सतीति।bha·vis·sa·tī·ti

     Evaṁ bhagavato samattiṁsāya virecanaṁ bhavissatīti.

     adding, “In this way you’ll have thirty purgings.”

379. 379

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co भगवतोbha·ga·va·to समत्तिंसायsa·mat·tiṃ·sā·ya विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco bhagavato samattiṁsāya virecanaṁ datvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

     After giving the Buddha thirty purgings, he bowed down, circumambulated him with his right side toward him, and left.

380. 380

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa बहिba·hi द्वारकोट्ठकाdvā·ra·koṭ·ṭha·kā निक्खन्तस्सnik·khan·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho jīvakassa komārabhaccassa bahi dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhantassa etadahosi—

     When he was outside the gatehouse, Jīvaka thought,

381. 381

     “मयाma·yā खोkho भगवतोbha·ga·va·to समत्तिंसायsa·mat·tiṃ·sā·ya विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ दिन्नं।din·naṃ

     “mayā kho bhagavato samattiṁsāya virecanaṁ dinnaṁ.

     “I’ve given thirty purgings to the Buddha,

382. 382

     दोसाभिसन्नोdo·sā·bhi·san·no तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa कायो।kā·yo

     Dosābhisanno tathāgatassa kāyo.

     for his body is full of impurities.

383. 383

     नna भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ समत्तिंसक्खत्तुंsa·mat·tiṃ·sak·khat·tuṃ विरेचेस्सति,vi·re·ces·sa·ti एकूनत्तिंसक्खत्तुंe·kū·nat·tiṃ·sak·khat·tuṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ विरेचेस्सति।vi·re·ces·sa·ti

     Na bhagavantaṁ samattiṁsakkhattuṁ virecessati, ekūnattiṁsakkhattuṁ bhagavantaṁ virecessati.

     But he’ll only be purged twenty-nine times.

384. 384

     अपिa·pi चca भगवाbha·ga·vā विरित्तोvi·rit·to नहायिस्सति।na·hā·yis·sa·ti

     Api ca bhagavā viritto nahāyissati.

     After being purged, however, he’ll take a bath,

385. 385

     नहातंna·hā·taṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सकिंsa·kiṃ विरेचेस्सति।vi·re·ces·sa·ti

     Nahātaṁ bhagavantaṁ sakiṁ virecessati.

     which will count as one purging.

386. 386

     एवंe·vaṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to समत्तिंसायsa·mat·tiṃ·sā·ya विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ भविस्सती”ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

     Evaṁ bhagavato samattiṁsāya virecanaṁ bhavissatī”ti.

     In this way the Buddha will have had exactly thirty purgings.”

387. 387

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa चेतसाce·ta·sā चेतोपरिवितक्कमञ्ञायce·to·pa·ri·vi·tak·ka·mañ·ñā·ya आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā jīvakassa komārabhaccassa cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

     The Buddha read Jīvaka’s mind. He told Ānanda about it,

388. 388

     “इधानन्द,i·dhā·nan·da जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa बहिba·hi द्वारकोट्ठकाdvā·ra·koṭ·ṭha·kā निक्खन्तस्सnik·khan·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     “idhānanda, jīvakassa komārabhaccassa bahi dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhantassa etadahosi—

     (Pāli only)

389. 389

     ‘मयाma·yā खोkho भगवतोbha·ga·va·to समत्तिंसायsa·mat·tiṃ·sā·ya विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ दिन्नं।din·naṃ

     ‘mayā kho bhagavato samattiṁsāya virecanaṁ dinnaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

390. 390

     दोसाभिसन्नोdo·sā·bhi·san·no तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa कायो।kā·yo

     Dosābhisanno tathāgatassa kāyo.

     (Pāli only)

391. 391

     नna भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ समतिंसक्खत्तुंsa·ma·tiṃ·sak·khat·tuṃ विरेचेस्सति,vi·re·ces·sa·ti एकूनत्तिंसक्खत्तुंe·kū·nat·tiṃ·sak·khat·tuṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ विरेचेस्सति।vi·re·ces·sa·ti

     Na bhagavantaṁ samatiṁsakkhattuṁ virecessati, ekūnattiṁsakkhattuṁ bhagavantaṁ virecessati.

     (Pāli only)

392. 392

     अपिa·pi चca भगवाbha·ga·vā विरित्तोvi·rit·to नहायिस्सति।na·hā·yis·sa·ti

     Api ca bhagavā viritto nahāyissati.

     (Pāli only)

393. 393

     नहातंna·hā·taṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सकिंsa·kiṃ विरेचेस्सति।vi·re·ces·sa·ti

     Nahātaṁ bhagavantaṁ sakiṁ virecessati.

     (Pāli only)

394. 394

     एवंe·vaṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to समत्तिंसायsa·mat·tiṃ·sā·ya विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ भविस्सती’ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

     Evaṁ bhagavato samattiṁsāya virecanaṁ bhavissatī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

395. 395

     तेनte·na हानन्द,hā·nan·da उण्होदकंuṇ·ho·da·kaṃ पटियादेही”ति।pa·ṭi·yā·de·hī

     Tena hānanda, uṇhodakaṁ paṭiyādehī”ti.

     adding, “Well then, Ānanda, prepare hot water,”

396. 396

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā उण्होदकंuṇ·ho·da·kaṃ पटियादेसि।pa·ṭi·yā·de·si

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā uṇhodakaṁ paṭiyādesi.

     and Ānanda did as requested.

397. 397

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Jīvaka then went back to the Buddha, bowed, sat down,

398. 398

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho jīvako komārabhacco bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and asked,

399. 399

     “विरित्तो,vi·rit·to भन्ते,bhan·te भगवा”ति?bha·ga·vā

     “viritto, bhante, bhagavā”ti?

     “Sir, are you purged?”

400. 400

     “विरित्तोम्हि,vi·rit·tom·hi जीवका”ति।jī·va·kā

     “Virittomhi, jīvakā”ti.

     “I am, Jīvaka.”

401. 401

     “इधi·dha मय्हं,may·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te बहिba·hi द्वारकोट्ठकाdvā·ra·koṭ·ṭha·kā निक्खन्तस्सnik·khan·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     “Idha mayhaṁ, bhante, bahi dvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhantassa etadahosi—

     Jīvaka told him what he had thought outside the gatehouse,

402. 402

     ‘मयाma·yā खोkho भगवतोbha·ga·va·to समत्तिंसायsa·mat·tiṃ·sā·ya विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ दिन्नं।din·naṃ

     ‘mayā kho bhagavato samattiṁsāya virecanaṁ dinnaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

403. 403

     दोसाभिसन्नोdo·sā·bhi·san·no तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa कायो।kā·yo

     Dosābhisanno tathāgatassa kāyo.

     (Pāli only)

404. 404

     नna भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ समत्तिंसक्खत्तुंsa·mat·tiṃ·sak·khat·tuṃ विरेचेस्सति,vi·re·ces·sa·ti एकूनत्तिंसक्खत्तुंe·kū·nat·tiṃ·sak·khat·tuṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ विरेचेस्सति।vi·re·ces·sa·ti

     Na bhagavantaṁ samattiṁsakkhattuṁ virecessati, ekūnattiṁsakkhattuṁ bhagavantaṁ virecessati.

     (Pāli only)

405. 405

     अपिa·pi चca भगवाbha·ga·vā विरित्तोvi·rit·to नहायिस्सति।na·hā·yis·sa·ti

     Api ca bhagavā viritto nahāyissati.

     (Pāli only)

406. 406

     नहातंna·hā·taṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सकिंsa·kiṃ विरेचेस्सति।vi·re·ces·sa·ti

     Nahātaṁ bhagavantaṁ sakiṁ virecessati.

     (Pāli only)

407. 407

     एवंe·vaṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to समत्तिंसायsa·mat·tiṃ·sā·ya विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ भविस्सती’ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

     Evaṁ bhagavato samattiṁsāya virecanaṁ bhavissatī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

408. 408

     नहायतु,na·hā·ya·tu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवा,bha·ga·vā नहायतुna·hā·ya·tu सुगतो”ति।su·ga·to

     Nahāyatu, bhante, bhagavā, nahāyatu sugato”ti.

     adding, “Sir, please bathe.”

409. 409

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā उण्होदकंuṇ·ho·da·kaṃ नहायि।na·hā·yi

     Atha kho bhagavā uṇhodakaṁ nahāyi.

     The Buddha had a hot bath.

410. 410

     नहातंna·hā·taṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सकिंsa·kiṃ विरेचेसि।vi·re·ce·si

     Nahātaṁ bhagavantaṁ sakiṁ virecesi.

     When he had bathed, the Buddha was purged once,

411. 411

     एवंe·vaṃ भगवतोbha·ga·va·to समत्तिंसायsa·mat·tiṃ·sā·ya विरेचनंvi·re·ca·naṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Evaṁ bhagavato samattiṁsāya virecanaṁ ahosi.

     adding up to a total of thirty purgings.

412. 412

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     Jīvaka said to the Buddha,

413. 413

     “याव,yā·va भन्ते,bhan·te भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कायोkā·yo पकतत्तोpa·ka·tat·to होति,ho·ti अलंa·laṃ यूसपिण्डपातेना”ति।yū·sa·piṇ·ḍa·pā·te·nā

     “yāva, bhante, bhagavato kāyo pakatatto hoti, alaṁ yūsapiṇḍapātenā”ti.

     “Sir, until your body is back to normal, please don’t take any mung-bean broth.”

414. 414

     9। वरयाचनाकथाva·ra·yā·ca·nā·ka·thā

     9. Varayācanākathā

     9. The account of asking for a favor

415. 415

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवतोbha·ga·va·to कायोkā·yo नचिरस्सेवna·ci·ras·se·va पकतत्तोpa·ka·tat·to अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Atha kho bhagavato kāyo nacirasseva pakatatto ahosi.

     Soon the Buddha’s body was back to normal.

416. 416

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तंtaṃ सिवेय्यकंsi·vey·ya·kaṃ दुस्सयुगंdus·sa·yu·gaṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco taṁ siveyyakaṁ dussayugaṁ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Jīvaka then took those two valuable cloths and went to the Buddha. He bowed, sat down,

417. 417

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho jīvako komārabhacco bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and said,

418. 418

     “एकाहं,e·kā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ वरंva·raṃ याचामी”ति।yā·cā·mī

     “ekāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ varaṁ yācāmī”ti.

     “Sir, I wish to ask for a favor.”

419. 419

     “अतिक्कन्तवराa·tik·kan·ta·va·rā खो,kho जीवक,jī·va·ka तथागता”ति।ta·thā·ga·tā

     “Atikkantavarā kho, jīvaka, tathāgatā”ti.

     “Buddhas don’t grant favors, Jīvaka.”

420. 420

     “यञ्च,yañ·ca भन्ते,bhan·te कप्पतिkap·pa·ti यञ्चyañ·ca अनवज्जन्”ति।a·na·vaj·jan

     “Yañca, bhante, kappati yañca anavajjan”ti.

     “It’s allowable and blameless.”

421. 421

     “वदेहि,va·de·hi जीवका”ति।jī·va·kā

     “Vadehi, jīvakā”ti.

     “Well then, say what it is.”

422. 422

     “भगवा,bha·ga·vā भन्ते,bhan·te पंसुकूलिको,paṃ·su·kū·li·ko भिक्खुसङ्घोbhik·khu·saṅ·gho च।ca

     “Bhagavā, bhante, paṁsukūliko, bhikkhusaṅgho ca.

     “The Buddha and the Sangha of monks wear rag robes.

423. 423

     इदंi·daṃ मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सिवेय्यकंsi·vey·ya·kaṃ दुस्सयुगंdus·sa·yu·gaṃ रञ्ञाrañ·ñā पज्जोतेनpaj·jo·te·na पहितं—pa·hi·taṃ

     Idaṁ me, bhante, siveyyakaṁ dussayugaṁ raññā pajjotena pahitaṁ—

     But I’ve received these two valuable cloths from King Pajjota

424. 424

     बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सानंdus·sā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगानंdus·sa·yu·gā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगसतानंdus·sa·yu·ga·sa·tā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगसहस्सानंdus·sa·yu·ga·sa·has·sā·naṃ बहूनंba·hū·naṃ दुस्सयुगसतसहस्सानंdus·sa·yu·ga·sa·ta·sa·has·sā·naṃ अग्गञ्चag·gañ·ca सेट्ठञ्चseṭ·ṭhañ·ca मोक्खञ्चmok·khañ·ca उत्तमञ्चut·ta·mañ·ca पवरञ्च।pa·va·rañ·ca

     bahūnaṁ dussānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugasatānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugasahassānaṁ bahūnaṁ dussayugasatasahassānaṁ aggañca seṭṭhañca mokkhañca uttamañca pavarañca.

     that are extremely exquisite and fine—they are one in a million.

425. 425

     पटिग्गण्हातुpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā सिवेय्यकंsi·vey·ya·kaṃ दुस्सयुगं;dus·sa·yu·gaṃ

     Paṭiggaṇhātu me, bhante, bhagavā siveyyakaṁ dussayugaṁ;

     Please accept them,

426. 426

     भिक्खुसङ्घस्सbhik·khu·saṅ·ghas·sa चca गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ अनुजानातू”ति।a·nu·jā·nā·tū

     bhikkhusaṅghassa ca gahapaticīvaraṁ anujānātū”ti.

     and please allow the Sangha of monks to use robe-cloth given by householders.”

427. 427

     पटिग्गहेसिpa·ṭig·ga·he·si भगवाbha·ga·vā सिवेय्यकंsi·vey·ya·kaṃ दुस्सयुगं।dus·sa·yu·gaṃ

     Paṭiggahesi bhagavā siveyyakaṁ dussayugaṁ.

     The Buddha received the two valuable cloths.

428. 428

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसिsan·das·se·si समादपेसिsa·mā·da·pe·si समुत्तेजेसिsa·mut·te·je·si सम्पहंसेसि।sam·pa·haṃ·se·si

     Atha kho bhagavā jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

     He then instructed, inspired, and gladdened Jīvaka with a teaching,

429. 429

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सितोsan·das·si·to समादपितोsa·mā·da·pi·to समुत्तेजितोsa·mut·te·ji·to सम्पहंसितोsam·pa·haṃ·si·to उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

     after which Jīvaka got up from his seat, bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left.

430. 430

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

431. 431

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गहपतिचीवरं।ga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ

     “anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gahapaticīvaraṁ.

     “Monks, I allow you to use robe-cloth given by householders.

432. 432

     योyo इच्छति,ic·cha·ti पंसुकूलिकोpaṃ·su·kū·li·ko होतु।ho·tu

     Yo icchati, paṁsukūliko hotu.

     Anyone who wishes may wear rag robes

433. 433

     योyo इच्छति,ic·cha·ti गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ सादियतु।sā·di·ya·tu

     Yo icchati, gahapaticīvaraṁ sādiyatu.

     and anyone who wishes may accept robe-cloth from householders.

434. 434

     इतरीतरेनपाहं,i·ta·rī·ta·re·na·pā·haṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सन्तुट्ठिंsan·tuṭ·ṭhiṃ वण्णेमी”ति।vaṇ·ṇe·mī

     Itarītarenapāhaṁ, bhikkhave, santuṭṭhiṁ vaṇṇemī”ti.

     But I praise contentment with one or the other.”

435. 435

     अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he मनुस्सा—ma·nus·sā

     Assosuṁ kho rājagahe manussā—

     The people of Rājagaha heard

436. 436

     “भगवताbha·ga·va·tā किरki·ra भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ अनुञ्ञातन्”ति।a·nuñ·ñā·tan

     “bhagavatā kira bhikkhūnaṁ gahapaticīvaraṁ anuññātan”ti.

     that the Buddha had allowed the monks to use robe-cloth given by householders.

437. 437

     तेte चca मनुस्साma·nus·sā हट्ठाhaṭ·ṭhā अहेसुंa·he·suṃ उदग्गा—u·dag·gā

     Te ca manussā haṭṭhā ahesuṁ udaggā—

     They were excited and joyful, thinking,

438. 438

     “इदानिi·dā·ni खोkho मयंma·yaṃ दानानिdā·nā·ni दस्सामdas·sā·ma पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni करिस्साम,ka·ris·sā·ma यतोya·to भगवताbha·ga·va·tā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ अनुञ्ञातन्”ति।a·nuñ·ñā·tan

     “idāni kho mayaṁ dānāni dassāma puññāni karissāma, yato bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṁ gahapaticīvaraṁ anuññātan”ti.

     “Now we’ll give gifts and make merit.”

439. 439

     एकाहेनेवe·kā·he·ne·va राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he बहूनिba·hū·ni चीवरसहस्सानिcī·va·ra·sa·has·sā·ni उप्पज्जिंसु।up·paj·jiṃ·su

     Ekāheneva rājagahe bahūni cīvarasahassāni uppajjiṁsu.

     In just a single day many thousands of robes were given at Rājagaha.

440. 440

     अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho जानपदाjā·na·pa·dā मनुस्सा—ma·nus·sā

     Assosuṁ kho jānapadā manussā—

     And the same thing happened in the country.

441. 441

     “भगवताbha·ga·va·tā किरki·ra भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ अनुञ्ञातन्”ति।a·nuñ·ñā·tan

     “bhagavatā kira bhikkhūnaṁ gahapaticīvaraṁ anuññātan”ti.

     (Pāli only)

442. 442

     तेte चca मनुस्साma·nus·sā हट्ठाhaṭ·ṭhā अहेसुंa·he·suṃ उदग्गा—u·dag·gā

     Te ca manussā haṭṭhā ahesuṁ udaggā—

     (Pāli only)

443. 443

     “इदानिi·dā·ni खोkho मयंma·yaṃ दानानिdā·nā·ni दस्सामdas·sā·ma पुञ्ञानिpuñ·ñā·ni करिस्साम,ka·ris·sā·ma यतोya·to भगवताbha·ga·va·tā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ अनुञ्ञातन्”ति।a·nuñ·ñā·tan

     “idāni kho mayaṁ dānāni dassāma puññāni karissāma, yato bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṁ gahapaticīvaraṁ anuññātan”ti.

     (Pāli only)

444. 444

     जनपदेपिja·na·pa·de·pi एकाहेनेवe·kā·he·ne·va बहूनिba·hū·ni चीवरसहस्सानिcī·va·ra·sa·has·sā·ni उप्पज्जिंसु।up·paj·jiṃ·su

     Janapadepi ekāheneva bahūni cīvarasahassāni uppajjiṁsu.

     (Pāli only)

445. 445

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पावारोpā·vā·ro उप्पन्नोup·pan·no होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena saṅghassa pāvāro uppanno hoti.

     At that time, a fleecy robe was offered to the Sangha.

446. 446

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     They told the Buddha.

447. 447

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पावारन्”ति।pā·vā·ran

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pāvāran”ti.

     “I allow fleecy robes.”

448. 448

     कोसेय्यपावारोko·sey·ya·pā·vā·ro उप्पन्नोup·pan·no होति।ho·ti

     Koseyyapāvāro uppanno hoti.

     And a silken, fleecy robe was offered.

449. 449

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

450. 450

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कोसेय्यपावारन्”ति।ko·sey·ya·pā·vā·ran

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, koseyyapāvāran”ti.

     “I allow silken, fleecy robes.”

451. 451

     कोजवंko·ja·vaṃ उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ होति।ho·ti

     Kojavaṁ uppannaṁ hoti.

     And a woolen, fleecy robe was offered.

452. 452

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

453. 453

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कोजवन्”ति।ko·ja·van

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kojavan”ti.

     “I allow woolen, fleecy robes.”

454. 454

     पठमभाणवारोpa·ṭha·ma·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Paṭhamabhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.

     The first section for recitation is finished.

455. 455

     10। कम्बलानुजाननादिकथाkam·ba·lā·nu·jā·na·nā·di·ka·thā

     10. Kambalānujānanādikathā

     10. Discussion on the allowance of wool

456. 456

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na कासिराजाkā·si·rā·jā जीवकस्सjī·va·kas·sa कोमारभच्चस्सko·mā·ra·bhac·cas·sa अड्ढकासिकंaḍ·ḍha·kā·si·kaṃ कम्बलंkam·ba·laṃ पाहेसिpā·he·si उपड्ढकासिनंu·paḍ·ḍha·kā·si·naṃ खममानं।kha·ma·mā·naṃ

     Tena kho pana samayena kāsirājā jīvakassa komārabhaccassa aḍḍhakāsikaṁ kambalaṁ pāhesi upaḍḍhakāsinaṁ khamamānaṁ.

     On one occasion the king of Kāsi sent a valuable, woolen Kāsi cloth to Jīvaka.

457. 457

     अथa·tha खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co तंtaṃ अड्ढकासिकंaḍ·ḍha·kā·si·kaṃ कम्बलंkam·ba·laṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho jīvako komārabhacco taṁ aḍḍhakāsikaṁ kambalaṁ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Jīvaka took the cloth and went to the Buddha. He bowed, sat down,

458. 458

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho जीवकोjī·va·ko कोमारभच्चोko·mā·ra·bhac·co भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho jīvako komārabhacco bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and told him what had happened,

459. 459

     “अयंa·yaṃ मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te अड्ढकासिकोaḍ·ḍha·kā·si·ko कम्बलोkam·ba·lo कासिरञ्ञाkā·si·rañ·ñā पहितोpa·hi·to उपड्ढकासिनंu·paḍ·ḍha·kā·si·naṃ खममानो।kha·ma·mā·no

     “ayaṁ me, bhante, aḍḍhakāsiko kambalo kāsiraññā pahito upaḍḍhakāsinaṁ khamamāno.

     (Pāli only)

460. 460

     पटिग्गण्हातुpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā कम्बलं,kam·ba·laṃ यंyaṃ ममस्सma·mas·sa दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ हितायhi·tā·ya सुखाया”ति।su·khā·yā

     Paṭiggaṇhātu me, bhante, bhagavā kambalaṁ, yaṁ mamassa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.

     adding, “Sir, please accept this woolen cloth for my long-lasting benefit and happiness.”

461. 461

     पटिग्गहेसिpa·ṭig·ga·he·si भगवाbha·ga·vā कम्बलं।kam·ba·laṃ

     Paṭiggahesi bhagavā kambalaṁ.

     The Buddha received the woolen cloth.

462. 462

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā जीवकंjī·va·kaṃ कोमारभच्चंko·mā·ra·bhac·caṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसिsan·das·se·si …पे…pe

     Atha kho bhagavā jīvakaṁ komārabhaccaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi …pe…

     He then instructed, inspired, and gladdened Jīvaka with a teaching,

463. 463

     पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

     after which Jīvaka got up from his seat, bowed down, circumambulated the Buddha with his right side toward him, and left.

464. 464

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

465. 465

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कम्बलन्”ति।kam·ba·lan

     “anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kambalan”ti.

     “I allow wool.”

466. 466

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa उच्चावचानिuc·cā·va·cā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni उप्पन्नानिup·pan·nā·ni होन्ति।hon·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena saṅghassa uccāvacāni cīvarāni uppannāni honti.

     At that time various kinds of robe-cloth were offered to the Sangha.

467. 467

     अथa·tha खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

     The monks thought,

468. 468

     “किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho भगवताbha·ga·va·tā चीवरंcī·va·raṃ अनुञ्ञातं,a·nuñ·ñā·taṃ किंkiṃ अननुञ्ञातन्”ति?a·na·nuñ·ñā·tan

     “kiṁ nu kho bhagavatā cīvaraṁ anuññātaṁ, kiṁ ananuññātan”ti?

     “What kind of robe-cloth has and hasn’t the Buddha allowed?”

469. 469

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     They told the Buddha.

470. 470

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve छcha चीवरानि—cī·va·rā·ni

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, cha cīvarāni—

     “I allow six kinds of robe-cloth:

471. 471

     खोमंkho·maṃ कप्पासिकंkap·pā·si·kaṃ कोसेय्यंko·sey·yaṃ कम्बलंkam·ba·laṃ साणंsā·ṇaṃ भङ्गन्”ति।bhaṅ·gan

     khomaṁ kappāsikaṁ koseyyaṁ kambalaṁ sāṇaṁ bhaṅgan”ti.

     linen, cotton, silk, wool, sunn hemp, and hemp.”

472. 472

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ सादियन्तिsā·di·yan·ti तेte कुक्कुच्चायन्ताkuk·kuc·cā·yan·tā पंसुकूलंpaṃ·su·kū·laṃ नna सादियन्ति—sā·di·yan·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena ye te bhikkhū gahapaticīvaraṁ sādiyanti te kukkuccāyantā paṁsukūlaṁ na sādiyanti—

     Soon afterwards the monks thought, “The Buddha has only allowed one kind of robe, not two,”

473. 473

     “एकंयेवe·kaṃ·ye·va भगवताbha·ga·va·tā चीवरंcī·va·raṃ अनुञ्ञातं,a·nuñ·ñā·taṃ नna द्वे”ति।dve

     “ekaṁyeva bhagavatā cīvaraṁ anuññātaṁ, na dve”ti.

     and being afraid of wrongdoing, they did not accept rags after receiving robe-cloth from householders.

474. 474

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

475. 475

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गहपतिचीवरंga·ha·pa·ti·cī·va·raṃ सादियन्तेनsā·di·yan·te·na पंसुकूलम्पिpaṃ·su·kū·lam·pi सादियितुं;sā·di·yi·tuṃ

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gahapaticīvaraṁ sādiyantena paṁsukūlampi sādiyituṁ;

     “I allow you to accept rags after receiving robe-cloth from a householder.

476. 476

     तदुभयेनपाहं,ta·du·bha·ye·na·pā·haṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सन्तुट्ठिंsan·tuṭ·ṭhiṃ वण्णेमी”ति।vaṇ·ṇe·mī

     tadubhayenapāhaṁ, bhikkhave, santuṭṭhiṁ vaṇṇemī”ti.

     But I praise contentment with both.”

477. 477

     11। पंसुकूलपरियेसनकथाpaṃ·su·kū·la·pa·ri·ye·sa·na·ka·thā

     11. Paṁsukūlapariyesanakathā

     11. Discussion on searching for rags

478. 478

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā भिक्खूbhik·khū कोसलेसुko·sa·le·su जनपदेja·na·pa·de अद्धानमग्गप्पटिपन्नाad·dhā·na·mag·gap·pa·ṭi·pan·nā होन्ति।hon·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū kosalesu janapade addhānamaggappaṭipannā honti.

     On one occasion when a number of monks were traveling through the Kosalan country,

479. 479

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū सुसानंsu·sā·naṃ ओक्कमिंसुok·ka·miṃ·su पंसुकूलाय,paṃ·su·kū·lā·ya एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū नागमेसुं।nā·ga·me·suṃ

     Ekacce bhikkhū susānaṁ okkamiṁsu paṁsukūlāya, ekacce bhikkhū nāgamesuṁ.

     some of them entered a charnel ground to look for rags, while the others walked on.

480. 480

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū सुसानंsu·sā·naṃ ओक्कमिंसुok·ka·miṃ·su पंसुकूलायpaṃ·su·kū·lā·ya तेte पंसुकूलानिpaṃ·su·kū·lā·ni लभिंसु।la·bhiṃ·su

     Ye te bhikkhū susānaṁ okkamiṁsu paṁsukūlāya te paṁsukūlāni labhiṁsu.

     The former monks got hold of rags,

481. 481

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū नागमेसुंnā·ga·me·suṃ तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ye te bhikkhū nāgamesuṁ te evamāhaṁsu—

     and the others said,

482. 482

     “अम्हाकम्पि,am·hā·kam·pi आवुसो,ā·vu·so भागंbhā·gaṃ देथा”ति।de·thā

     “amhākampi, āvuso, bhāgaṁ dethā”ti.

     “Please give us a share.”

483. 483

     तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Te evamāhaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

484. 484

     “नna मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तुम्हाकंtum·hā·kaṃ भागंbhā·gaṃ दस्साम।das·sā·ma

     “na mayaṁ, āvuso, tumhākaṁ bhāgaṁ dassāma.

     “But why didn’t you wait, then?

485. 485

     किस्सkis·sa तुम्हेtum·he नागमित्था”ति?nā·ga·mit·thā

     Kissa tumhe nāgamitthā”ti?

     We won’t give you a share.”

486. 486

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     They told the Buddha.

487. 487

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve नागमेन्तानंnā·ga·men·tā·naṃ नाकामाnā·kā·mā भागंbhā·gaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, nāgamentānaṁ nākāmā bhāgaṁ dātun”ti.

     “If you’re unwilling, you don’t have to give a share to those who don’t wait.”

488. 488

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā भिक्खूbhik·khū कोसलेसुko·sa·le·su जनपदेja·na·pa·de अद्धानमग्गप्पटिपन्नाad·dhā·na·mag·gap·pa·ṭi·pan·nā होन्ति।hon·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū kosalesu janapade addhānamaggappaṭipannā honti.

     On another occasion when a number of monks were traveling through the Kosalan country,

489. 489

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū सुसानंsu·sā·naṃ ओक्कमिंसुok·ka·miṃ·su पंसुकूलाय,paṃ·su·kū·lā·ya एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū आगमेसुं।ā·ga·me·suṃ

     Ekacce bhikkhū susānaṁ okkamiṁsu paṁsukūlāya, ekacce bhikkhū āgamesuṁ.

     some of them entered a charnel ground to look for rags, while the others waited.

490. 490

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū सुसानंsu·sā·naṃ ओक्कमिंसुok·ka·miṃ·su पंसुकूलायpaṃ·su·kū·lā·ya तेte पंसुकूलानिpaṃ·su·kū·lā·ni लभिंसु।la·bhiṃ·su

     Ye te bhikkhū susānaṁ okkamiṁsu paṁsukūlāya te paṁsukūlāni labhiṁsu.

     The former monks got hold of rags,

491. 491

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū आगमेसुंā·ga·me·suṃ तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ye te bhikkhū āgamesuṁ te evamāhaṁsu—

     and the others said,

492. 492

     “अम्हाकम्पि,am·hā·kam·pi आवुसो,ā·vu·so भागंbhā·gaṃ देथा”ति।de·thā

     “amhākampi, āvuso, bhāgaṁ dethā”ti.

     “Please give us a share.”

493. 493

     तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Te evamāhaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

494. 494

     “नna मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तुम्हाकंtum·hā·kaṃ भागंbhā·gaṃ दस्साम।das·sā·ma

     “na mayaṁ, āvuso, tumhākaṁ bhāgaṁ dassāma.

     “But why didn’t you come with us, then?

495. 495

     किस्सkis·sa तुम्हेtum·he नna ओक्कमित्था”ति?ok·ka·mit·thā

     Kissa tumhe na okkamitthā”ti?

     We won’t give you a share.”

496. 496

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

497. 497

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आगमेन्तानंā·ga·men·tā·naṃ अकामाa·kā·mā भागंbhā·gaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āgamentānaṁ akāmā bhāgaṁ dātun”ti.

     “Even if you’re unwilling, you should give a share to those who wait.”

498. 498

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā भिक्खूbhik·khū कोसलेसुko·sa·le·su जनपदेja·na·pa·de अद्धानमग्गप्पटिपन्नाad·dhā·na·mag·gap·pa·ṭi·pan·nā होन्ति।hon·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū kosalesu janapade addhānamaggappaṭipannā honti.

     On yet another occasion when a number of monks were traveling through the Kosalan country,

499. 499

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ सुसानंsu·sā·naṃ ओक्कमिंसुok·ka·miṃ·su पंसुकूलाय,paṃ·su·kū·lā·ya एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū पच्छाpac·chā ओक्कमिंसु।ok·ka·miṃ·su

     Ekacce bhikkhū paṭhamaṁ susānaṁ okkamiṁsu paṁsukūlāya, ekacce bhikkhū pacchā okkamiṁsu.

     some of them entered a charnel ground to look for rags first, while the other monks entered afterwards.

500. 500

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ सुसानंsu·sā·naṃ ओक्कमिंसुok·ka·miṃ·su पंसुकूलायpaṃ·su·kū·lā·ya तेte पंसुकूलानिpaṃ·su·kū·lā·ni लभिंसु।la·bhiṃ·su

     Ye te bhikkhū paṭhamaṁ susānaṁ okkamiṁsu paṁsukūlāya te paṁsukūlāni labhiṁsu.

     Those who entered first got hold of rags,

501. 501

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū पच्छाpac·chā ओक्कमिंसुok·ka·miṃ·su तेte नna लभिंसु।la·bhiṃ·su

     Ye te bhikkhū pacchā okkamiṁsu te na labhiṁsu.

     but not those who entered afterwards.

502. 502

     तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Te evamāhaṁsu—

     The latter monks said,

503. 503

     “अम्हाकम्पि,am·hā·kam·pi आवुसो,ā·vu·so भागंbhā·gaṃ देथा”ति।de·thā

     “amhākampi, āvuso, bhāgaṁ dethā”ti.

     “Please give us a share.”

504. 504

     तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Te evamāhaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

505. 505

     “नna मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तुम्हाकंtum·hā·kaṃ भागंbhā·gaṃ दस्साम।das·sā·ma

     “na mayaṁ, āvuso, tumhākaṁ bhāgaṁ dassāma.

     “But why did you come in afterwards, then?

506. 506

     किस्सkis·sa तुम्हेtum·he पच्छाpac·chā ओक्कमित्था”ति?ok·ka·mit·thā

     Kissa tumhe pacchā okkamitthā”ti?

     We won’t give you a share.”

507. 507

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

508. 508

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पच्छाpac·chā ओक्कन्तानंok·kan·tā·naṃ नाकामाnā·kā·mā भागंbhā·gaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pacchā okkantānaṁ nākāmā bhāgaṁ dātun”ti.

     “If you’re unwilling, you don’t have to give a share to those who enter afterwards.”

509. 509

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā भिक्खूbhik·khū कोसलेसुko·sa·le·su जनपदेja·na·pa·de अद्धानमग्गप्पटिपन्नाad·dhā·na·mag·gap·pa·ṭi·pan·nā होन्ति।hon·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū kosalesu janapade addhānamaggappaṭipannā honti.

     On yet another occasion when a number of monks were traveling through the Kosalan country,

510. 510

     तेte सदिसाsa·di·sā सुसानंsu·sā·naṃ ओक्कमिंसुok·ka·miṃ·su पंसुकूलाय।paṃ·su·kū·lā·ya

     Te sadisā susānaṁ okkamiṁsu paṁsukūlāya.

     they all entered a charnel ground together to look for rags.

511. 511

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū पंसुकूलानिpaṃ·su·kū·lā·ni लभिंसु,la·bhiṃ·su एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū नna लभिंसु।la·bhiṃ·su

     Ekacce bhikkhū paṁsukūlāni labhiṁsu, ekacce bhikkhū na labhiṁsu.

     Some of them got hold of rags, while others did not.

512. 512

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū नna लभिंसु,la·bhiṃ·su तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ye te bhikkhū na labhiṁsu, te evamāhaṁsu—

     The latter monks said,

513. 513

     “अम्हाकम्पि,am·hā·kam·pi आवुसो,ā·vu·so भागंbhā·gaṃ देथा”ति।de·thā

     “amhākampi, āvuso, bhāgaṁ dethā”ti.

     “Please give us a share.”

514. 514

     तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Te evamāhaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

515. 515

     “नna मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तुम्हाकंtum·hā·kaṃ भागंbhā·gaṃ दस्साम।das·sā·ma

     “na mayaṁ, āvuso, tumhākaṁ bhāgaṁ dassāma.

     “But why didn’t you get any?

516. 516

     किस्सkis·sa तुम्हेtum·he नna लभित्था”ति?la·bhit·thā

     Kissa tumhe na labhitthā”ti?

     We won’t give you a share.”

517. 517

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

518. 518

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सदिसानंsa·di·sā·naṃ ओक्कन्तानंok·kan·tā·naṃ अकामाa·kā·mā भागंbhā·gaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sadisānaṁ okkantānaṁ akāmā bhāgaṁ dātun”ti.

     “Even if you’re unwilling, you should give a share to those who enter together with you.”

519. 519

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā भिक्खूbhik·khū कोसलेसुko·sa·le·su जनपदेja·na·pa·de अद्धानमग्गप्पटिपन्नाad·dhā·na·mag·gap·pa·ṭi·pan·nā होन्ति।hon·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū kosalesu janapade addhānamaggappaṭipannā honti.

     On yet another occasion when a number of monks were traveling through the Kosalan country,

520. 520

     तेte कतिकंka·ti·kaṃ कत्वाkat·vā सुसानंsu·sā·naṃ ओक्कमिंसुok·ka·miṃ·su पंसुकूलाय।paṃ·su·kū·lā·ya

     Te katikaṁ katvā susānaṁ okkamiṁsu paṁsukūlāya.

     they entered a charnel ground together to look for rags after making an agreement to share.

521. 521

     एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū पंसुकूलानिpaṃ·su·kū·lā·ni लभिंसु,la·bhiṃ·su एकच्चेe·kac·ce भिक्खूbhik·khū नna लभिंसु।la·bhiṃ·su

     Ekacce bhikkhū paṁsukūlāni labhiṁsu, ekacce bhikkhū na labhiṁsu.

     Some of them got hold of rags, while others did not.

522. 522

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū नna लभिंसुla·bhiṃ·su तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Ye te bhikkhū na labhiṁsu te evamāhaṁsu—

     The latter monks said,

523. 523

     “अम्हाकम्पि,am·hā·kam·pi आवुसो,ā·vu·so भागंbhā·gaṃ देथा”ति।de·thā

     “amhākampi, āvuso, bhāgaṁ dethā”ti.

     “Please give us a share.”

524. 524

     तेte एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Te evamāhaṁsu—

     (Pāli only)

525. 525

     “नna मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तुम्हाकंtum·hā·kaṃ भागंbhā·gaṃ दस्साम।das·sā·ma

     “na mayaṁ, āvuso, tumhākaṁ bhāgaṁ dassāma.

     “But why didn’t you get any?

526. 526

     किस्सkis·sa तुम्हेtum·he नna लभित्था”ति?la·bhit·thā

     Kissa tumhe na labhitthā”ti?

     We won’t give you a share.”

527. 527

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

528. 528

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कतिकंka·ti·kaṃ कत्वाkat·vā ओक्कन्तानंok·kan·tā·naṃ अकामाa·kā·mā भागंbhā·gaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, katikaṁ katvā okkantānaṁ akāmā bhāgaṁ dātun”ti.

     “Even if you’re unwilling, if you have made an agreement about it, you should give a share to those who enter.”

529. 529

     12। चीवरपटिग्गाहकसम्मुतिकथाcī·va·ra·pa·ṭig·gā·ha·ka·sam·mu·ti·ka·thā

     12. Cīvarapaṭiggāhakasammutikathā

     12. Discussion on the appointment of a receiver of robe-cloth

530. 530

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na मनुस्साma·nus·sā चीवरंcī·va·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya आरामंā·rā·maṃ आगच्छन्ति।ā·gac·chan·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena manussā cīvaraṁ ādāya ārāmaṁ āgacchanti.

     At that time people brought robe-cloth to the monastery,

531. 531

     तेte पटिग्गाहकंpa·ṭig·gā·ha·kaṃ अलभमानाa·la·bha·mā·nā पटिहरन्ति।pa·ṭi·ha·ran·ti

     Te paṭiggāhakaṁ alabhamānā paṭiharanti.

     but not finding anyone to receive it, they took it back.

532. 532

     चीवरंcī·va·raṃ परित्तंpa·rit·taṃ उप्पज्जति।up·paj·ja·ti

     Cīvaraṁ parittaṁ uppajjati.

     As a result, only a little robe-cloth was given at that monastery.

533. 533

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     They told the Buddha.

534. 534

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतंsa·man·nā·ga·taṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ चीवरपटिग्गाहकंcī·va·ra·pa·ṭig·gā·ha·kaṃ सम्मन्नितुं—sam·man·ni·tuṃ

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgataṁ bhikkhuṁ cīvarapaṭiggāhakaṁ sammannituṁ—

     “You should appoint a monk who has five qualities as the receiver of robe-cloth:

535. 535

     योyo नna छन्दागतिंchan·dā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna दोसागतिंdo·sā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna मोहागतिंmo·hā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna भयागतिंbha·yā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya गहितागहितञ्चga·hi·tā·ga·hi·tañ·ca जानेय्य।jā·ney·ya

     yo na chandāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na dosāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na mohāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na bhayāgatiṁ gaccheyya, gahitāgahitañca jāneyya.

     he’s not biased by favoritism, ill will, confusion, or fear, and he knows what has and what hasn’t been received.

536. 536

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बो।sam·man·ni·tab·bo

     Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbo.

     And he should be appointed like this.

537. 537

     पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ भिक्खुbhik·khu याचितब्बो;yā·ci·tab·bo

     Paṭhamaṁ bhikkhu yācitabbo;

     First a monk should be asked,

538. 538

     याचित्वाyā·cit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

     yācitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

     and then a competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:

539. 539

     ‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     ‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

540. 540

     यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लंpat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ चीवरपटिग्गाहकंcī·va·ra·pa·ṭig·gā·ha·kaṃ सम्मन्नेय्य।sam·man·ney·ya

     Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ cīvarapaṭiggāhakaṁ sammanneyya.

     If the Sangha is ready, it should appoint monk so-and-so as the receiver of robe-cloth.

541. 541

     एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

     Esā ñatti.

     This is the motion.

542. 542

     सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

543. 543

     सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ चीवरपटिग्गाहकंcī·va·ra·pa·ṭig·gā·ha·kaṃ सम्मन्नति।sam·man·na·ti

     Saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ cīvarapaṭiggāhakaṁ sammannati.

     The Sangha appoints monk so-and-so as the receiver of robe-cloth.

544. 544

     यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no चीवरपटिग्गाहकस्सcī·va·ra·pa·ṭig·gā·ha·kas·sa सम्मुति,sam·mu·ti सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

     Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa bhikkhuno cīvarapaṭiggāhakassa sammuti, so tuṇhassa;

     Any monk who approves of appointing monk so-and-so as the receiver of robe-cloth should remain silent.

545. 545

     यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

     yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

     Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.

546. 546

     सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu चीवरपटिग्गाहको।cī·va·ra·pa·ṭig·gā·ha·ko

     Sammato saṅghena itthannāmo bhikkhu cīvarapaṭiggāhako.

     The Sangha has appointed monk so-and-so as the receiver of robe-cloth.

547. 547

     खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

     Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

     The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”

548. 548

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na चीवरपटिग्गाहकाcī·va·ra·pa·ṭig·gā·ha·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पटिग्गहेत्वाpa·ṭig·ga·het·vā तत्थेवtat·the·va उज्झित्वाuj·jhit·vā पक्कमन्ति।pak·ka·man·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena cīvarapaṭiggāhakā bhikkhū cīvaraṁ paṭiggahetvā tattheva ujjhitvā pakkamanti.

     Soon, after receiving cloth, the receivers of robe-cloth left it right there and went away.

549. 549

     चीवरंcī·va·raṃ नस्सति।nas·sa·ti

     Cīvaraṁ nassati.

     The robe-cloth was lost.

550. 550

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

551. 551

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतंsa·man·nā·ga·taṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ चीवरनिदहकंcī·va·ra·ni·da·ha·kaṃ सम्मन्नितुं—sam·man·ni·tuṃ

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgataṁ bhikkhuṁ cīvaranidahakaṁ sammannituṁ—

     “You should appoint a monk who has five qualities as the keeper of robe-cloth:

552. 552

     योyo नna छन्दागतिंchan·dā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna दोसागतिंdo·sā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna मोहागतिंmo·hā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna भयागतिंbha·yā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya निहितानिहितञ्चni·hi·tā·ni·hi·tañ·ca जानेय्य।jā·ney·ya

     yo na chandāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na dosāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na mohāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na bhayāgatiṁ gaccheyya, nihitānihitañca jāneyya.

     he’s not biased by favoritism, ill will, confusion, or fear, and he knows what is and what isn’t stored.

553. 553

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बो।sam·man·ni·tab·bo

     Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbo.

     And he should be appointed like this.

554. 554

     पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ भिक्खुbhik·khu याचितब्बो;yā·ci·tab·bo

     Paṭhamaṁ bhikkhu yācitabbo;

     First a monk should be asked,

555. 555

     याचित्वाyā·cit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

     yācitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

     and then a competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:

556. 556

     ‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     ‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

557. 557

     यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ चीवरनिदहकंcī·va·ra·ni·da·ha·kaṃ सम्मन्नेय्य।sam·man·ney·ya

     Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ cīvaranidahakaṁ sammanneyya.

     If the Sangha is ready, it should appoint monk so-and-so as the keeper of robe-cloth.

558. 558

     एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

     Esā ñatti.

     This is the motion.

559. 559

     सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

560. 560

     सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ चीवरनिदहकंcī·va·ra·ni·da·ha·kaṃ सम्मन्नति।sam·man·na·ti

     Saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ cīvaranidahakaṁ sammannati.

     The Sangha appoints monk so-and-so as the keeper of robe-cloth.

561. 561

     यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no चीवरनिदहकस्सcī·va·ra·ni·da·ha·kas·sa सम्मुति,sam·mu·ti सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

     Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa bhikkhuno cīvaranidahakassa sammuti, so tuṇhassa;

     Any monk who approves of appointing monk so-and-so as the keeper of robe-cloth should remain silent.

562. 562

     यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

     yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

     Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.

563. 563

     सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu चीवरनिदहको।cī·va·ra·ni·da·ha·ko

     Sammato saṅghena itthannāmo bhikkhu cīvaranidahako.

     The Sangha has appointed monk so-and-so as the keeper of robe-cloth.

564. 564

     खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

     Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

     The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”

565. 565

     13। भण्डागारसम्मुतिआदिकथाbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·ra·sam·mu·ti·ā·di·ka·thā

     13. Bhaṇḍāgārasammutiādikathā

     13. Discussion on the designation of a storeroom, etc.

566. 566

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na चीवरनिदहकोcī·va·ra·ni·da·ha·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu मण्डपेपिmaṇ·ḍa·pe·pi रुक्खमूलेपिruk·kha·mū·le·pi निब्बकोसेपिnib·ba·ko·se·pi चीवरंcī·va·raṃ निदहति,ni·da·ha·ti उन्दूरेहिपिun·dū·re·hi·pi उपचिकाहिपिu·pa·ci·kā·hi·pi खज्जन्ति।khaj·jan·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena cīvaranidahako bhikkhu maṇḍapepi rukkhamūlepi nibbakosepi cīvaraṁ nidahati, undūrehipi upacikāhipi khajjanti.

     Soon afterwards the monk who was the keeper of robe-cloth stored it under a roof cover, at the foot of a tree, and under the eaves of a building. Rats and termites ate it.

567. 567

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

568. 568

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भण्डागारंbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·raṃ सम्मन्नितुं,sam·man·ni·tuṃ यंyaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho आकङ्खतिā·kaṅ·kha·ti विहारंvi·hā·raṃ वाvā अड्ढयोगंaḍ·ḍha·yo·gaṃ वाvā पासादंpā·sā·daṃ वाvā हम्मियंham·mi·yaṃ वाvā गुहंgu·haṃ वा।vā

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, bhaṇḍāgāraṁ sammannituṁ, yaṁ saṅgho ākaṅkhati vihāraṁ vā aḍḍhayogaṁ vā pāsādaṁ vā hammiyaṁ vā guhaṁ vā.

     “I allow you to designate a dwelling, a stilt house, or a cave as a storeroom.

569. 569

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बो।sam·man·ni·tab·bo

     Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbo.

     And this is how it should be designated.

570. 570

     ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

     Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

     A competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:

571. 571

     ‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     ‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

572. 572

     यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ विहारंvi·hā·raṃ भण्डागारंbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·raṃ सम्मन्नेय्य।sam·man·ney·ya

     Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmaṁ vihāraṁ bhaṇḍāgāraṁ sammanneyya.

     If the Sangha is ready, it should designate such-and-such a dwelling as a storeroom.

573. 573

     एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

     Esā ñatti.

     This is the motion.

574. 574

     सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

575. 575

     सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ विहारंvi·hā·raṃ भण्डागारंbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·raṃ सम्मन्नति।sam·man·na·ti

     Saṅgho itthannāmaṁ vihāraṁ bhaṇḍāgāraṁ sammannati.

     The Sangha designates such-and-such a dwelling as a storeroom.

576. 576

     यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa विहारस्सvi·hā·ras·sa भण्डागारस्सbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·ras·sa सम्मुति,sam·mu·ti सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

     Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa vihārassa bhaṇḍāgārassa sammuti, so tuṇhassa;

     Any monk who approves of designating such-and-such a dwelling as a storeroom should remain silent.

577. 577

     यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

     yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

     Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.

578. 578

     सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo विहारोvi·hā·ro भण्डागारं।bhaṇ·ḍā·gā·raṃ

     Sammato saṅghena itthannāmo vihāro bhaṇḍāgāraṁ.

     The Sangha has designated such-and-such a dwelling as a storeroom.

579. 579

     खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

     Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

     The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”

580. 580

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डागारेbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·re चीवरंcī·va·raṃ अगुत्तंa·gut·taṃ होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena saṅghassa bhaṇḍāgāre cīvaraṁ aguttaṁ hoti.

     Soon, the robe-cloth in the Sangha’s storeroom was not looked after.

581. 581

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

582. 582

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतंsa·man·nā·ga·taṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ भण्डागारिकंbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·ri·kaṃ सम्मन्नितुं—योsam·man·ni·tuṃ नna छन्दागतिंchan·dā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna दोसागतिंdo·sā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna मोहागतिंmo·hā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna भयागतिंbha·yā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya गुत्तागुत्तञ्चgut·tā·gut·tañ·ca जानेय्य।jā·ney·ya

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgataṁ bhikkhuṁ bhaṇḍāgārikaṁ sammannituṁ—yo na chandāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na dosāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na mohāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na bhayāgatiṁ gaccheyya, guttāguttañca jāneyya.

     “You should appoint a monk who has five qualities as the storeman: he’s not biased by favoritism, ill will, confusion, or fear, and he knows what is and what isn’t protected.

583. 583

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बो।sam·man·ni·tab·bo

     Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbo.

     And he should be appointed like this.

584. 584

     पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ भिक्खुbhik·khu याचितब्बो;yā·ci·tab·bo

     Paṭhamaṁ bhikkhu yācitabbo;

     First a monk should be asked,

585. 585

     याचित्वाyā·cit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

     yācitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

     and then a competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:

586. 586

     ‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     ‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

587. 587

     यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ भण्डागारिकंbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·ri·kaṃ सम्मन्नेय्य।sam·man·ney·ya

     Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ bhaṇḍāgārikaṁ sammanneyya.

     If the Sangha is ready, it should appoint monk so-and-so as the storeman.

588. 588

     एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

     Esā ñatti.

     This is the motion.

589. 589

     सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

590. 590

     सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ भण्डागारिकंbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·ri·kaṃ सम्मन्नति।sam·man·na·ti

     Saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ bhaṇḍāgārikaṁ sammannati.

     The Sangha appoints monk so-and-so as the storeman.

591. 591

     यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no भण्डागारिकस्सbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·ri·kas·sa सम्मुति,sam·mu·ti सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

     Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa bhikkhuno bhaṇḍāgārikassa sammuti, so tuṇhassa;

     Any monk who approves of appointing monk so-and-so as the storeman should remain silent.

592. 592

     यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

     yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

     Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.

593. 593

     सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu भण्डागारिको।bhaṇ·ḍā·gā·ri·ko

     Sammato saṅghena itthannāmo bhikkhu bhaṇḍāgāriko.

     The Sangha has appointed monk so-and-so as the storeman.

594. 594

     खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

     Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

     The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”

595. 595

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū भण्डागारिकंbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·ri·kaṃ वुट्ठापेन्ति।vuṭ·ṭhā·pen·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū bhaṇḍāgārikaṁ vuṭṭhāpenti.

     Soon afterwards the monks from the group of six dismissed the storeman.

596. 596

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

597. 597

     “न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भण्डागारिकोbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·ri·ko वुट्ठापेतब्बो।vuṭ·ṭhā·pe·tab·bo

     “Na, bhikkhave, bhaṇḍāgāriko vuṭṭhāpetabbo.

     “You shouldn’t dismiss the storeman.

598. 598

     योyo वुट्ठापेय्य,vuṭ·ṭhā·pey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

     Yo vuṭṭhāpeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

     If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”

599. 599

     The distribution of robe-cloth

600. 600

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa भण्डागारेbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·re चीवरंcī·va·raṃ उस्सन्नंus·san·naṃ होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena saṅghassa bhaṇḍāgāre cīvaraṁ ussannaṁ hoti.

     At one time there was much robe-cloth in the Sangha’s storeroom.

601. 601

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

602. 602

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मुखीभूतेनsam·mu·khī·bhū·te·na सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na भाजेतुन्”ति।bhā·je·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sammukhībhūtena saṅghena bhājetun”ti.

     “The present Sangha should distribute it.”

603. 603

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho चीवरंcī·va·raṃ भाजेन्तोbhā·jen·to कोलाहलंko·lā·ha·laṃ अकासि।a·kā·si

     Tena kho pana samayena saṅgho cīvaraṁ bhājento kolāhalaṁ akāsi.

     Soon afterwards there was a racket as the Sangha was distributing that robe-cloth.

604. 604

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

605. 605

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतंsa·man·nā·ga·taṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ चीवरभाजकंcī·va·ra·bhā·ja·kaṃ सम्मन्नितुं—sam·man·ni·tuṃ

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgataṁ bhikkhuṁ cīvarabhājakaṁ sammannituṁ—

     “You should appoint a monk who has five qualities as the distributor of robe-cloth:

606. 606

     योyo नna छन्दागतिंchan·dā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna दोसागतिंdo·sā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna मोहागतिंmo·hā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna भयागतिंbha·yā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya भाजिताभाजितञ्चbhā·ji·tā·bhā·ji·tañ·ca जानेय्य।jā·ney·ya

     yo na chandāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na dosāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na mohāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na bhayāgatiṁ gaccheyya, bhājitābhājitañca jāneyya.

     he’s not biased by favoritism, ill will, confusion, or fear, and he knows what has and what has not been distributed.

607. 607

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बो।sam·man·ni·tab·bo

     Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbo.

     And he should be appointed like this.

608. 608

     पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ भिक्खुbhik·khu याचितब्बो;yā·ci·tab·bo

     Paṭhamaṁ bhikkhu yācitabbo;

     First a monk should be asked,

609. 609

     याचित्वाyā·cit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

     yācitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

     and then a competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:

610. 610

     ‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     ‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

611. 611

     यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ चीवरभाजकंcī·va·ra·bhā·ja·kaṃ सम्मन्नेय्य।sam·man·ney·ya

     Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ cīvarabhājakaṁ sammanneyya.

     If the Sangha is ready, it should appoint monk so-and-so as the distributor of robe-cloth.

612. 612

     एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

     Esā ñatti.

     This is the motion.

613. 613

     सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

     Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

     Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

614. 614

     सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ चीवरभाजकंcī·va·ra·bhā·ja·kaṃ सम्मन्नति।sam·man·na·ti

     Saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ cīvarabhājakaṁ sammannati.

     The Sangha appoints monk so-and-so as the distributor of robe-cloth.

615. 615

     यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no चीवरभाजकस्सcī·va·ra·bhā·ja·kas·sa सम्मुति,sam·mu·ti सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

     Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa bhikkhuno cīvarabhājakassa sammuti, so tuṇhassa;

     Any monk who approves of appointing monk so-and-so as the distributor of robe-cloth should remain silent.

616. 616

     यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

     yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

     Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.

617. 617

     सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu चीवरभाजको।cī·va·ra·bhā·ja·ko

     Sammato saṅghena itthannāmo bhikkhu cīvarabhājako.

     The Sangha has appointed monk so-and-so as the distributor of robe-cloth.

618. 618

     खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

     Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

     The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”

619. 619

     अथa·tha खोkho चीवरभाजकानंcī·va·ra·bhā·ja·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho cīvarabhājakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

     The monks who were the distributors of robe-cloth thought,

620. 620

     “कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खोkho चीवरंcī·va·raṃ भाजेतब्बन्”ति?bhā·je·tab·ban

     “kathaṁ nu kho cīvaraṁ bhājetabban”ti?

     “How should we distribute the robe-cloth?”

621. 621

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

622. 622

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ उच्चिनित्वाuc·ci·nit·vā तुलयित्वाtu·la·yit·vā वण्णावण्णंvaṇ·ṇā·vaṇ·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū गणेत्वाga·ṇet·vā वग्गंvag·gaṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā चीवरपटिवीसंcī·va·ra·pa·ṭi·vī·saṃ ठपेतुन्”ति।ṭha·pe·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṁ uccinitvā tulayitvā vaṇṇāvaṇṇaṁ katvā bhikkhū gaṇetvā vaggaṁ bandhitvā cīvarapaṭivīsaṁ ṭhapetun”ti.

     “You should first sort the cloth, then estimate its value, followed by grouping it according to value, counting the monks, gathering the monks into groups, and finally fixing the shares of robe-cloth.”

623. 623

     अथa·tha खोkho चीवरभाजकानंcī·va·ra·bhā·ja·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho cīvarabhājakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

     The monks who were distributors of robe-cloth thought,

624. 624

     “कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खोkho सामणेरानंsā·ma·ṇe·rā·naṃ चीवरपटिवीसोcī·va·ra·pa·ṭi·vī·so दातब्बो”ति?dā·tab·bo

     “kathaṁ nu kho sāmaṇerānaṁ cīvarapaṭivīso dātabbo”ti?

     “What share of the robe-cloth should we give to the novices?”

625. 625

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

626. 626

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सामणेरानंsā·ma·ṇe·rā·naṃ उपड्ढपटिवीसंu·paḍ·ḍha·pa·ṭi·vī·saṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāmaṇerānaṁ upaḍḍhapaṭivīsaṁ dātun”ti.

     “I allow you to give half a share to the novices.”

627. 627

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu सकेनsa·ke·na भागेनbhā·ge·na उत्तरितुकामोut·ta·ri·tu·kā·mo होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sakena bhāgena uttaritukāmo hoti.

     On one occasion a monk wanted to take his own share and leave.

628. 628

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

629. 629

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उत्तरन्तस्सut·ta·ran·tas·sa सकंsa·kaṃ भागंbhā·gaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, uttarantassa sakaṁ bhāgaṁ dātun”ti.

     “You should give a share to one who’s leaving.”

630. 630

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu अतिरेकभागेनa·ti·re·ka·bhā·ge·na उत्तरितुकामोut·ta·ri·tu·kā·mo होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu atirekabhāgena uttaritukāmo hoti.

     On another occasion a monk wanted to take an extra share and leave.

631. 631

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

632. 632

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनुक्खेपेa·nuk·khe·pe दिन्नेdin·ne अतिरेकभागंa·ti·re·ka·bhā·gaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, anukkhepe dinne atirekabhāgaṁ dātun”ti.

     “I allow you to give an extra share to anyone who gives something in return.”

633. 633

     अथa·tha खोkho चीवरभाजकानंcī·va·ra·bhā·ja·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho cīvarabhājakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

     The distributors of robe-cloth thought,

634. 634

     “कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खोkho चीवरपटिवीसोcī·va·ra·pa·ṭi·vī·so दातब्बो,dā·tab·bo आगतपटिपाटियाā·ga·ta·pa·ṭi·pā·ṭi·yā नुnu खोkho उदाहुu·dā·hu यथावुड्ढन्”ति?ya·thā·vuḍ·ḍhan

     “kathaṁ nu kho cīvarapaṭivīso dātabbo, āgatapaṭipāṭiyā nu kho udāhu yathāvuḍḍhan”ti?

     “How should we give out the shares of robe-cloth? According to the order in which the monks have arrived or according to seniority?”

635. 635

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

636. 636

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve विकलकेvi·ka·la·ke तोसेत्वाto·set·vā कुसपातंku·sa·pā·taṃ कातुन्”ति।kā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vikalake tosetvā kusapātaṁ kātun”ti.

     “You should satisfy those in need and then give out the remainder by drawing lots.”

637. 637

     14। चीवररजनकथाcī·va·ra·ra·ja·na·ka·thā

     14. Cīvararajanakathā

     14. Discussion on the dyeing of robes

638. 638

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū छकणेनपिcha·ka·ṇe·na·pi पण्डुमत्तिकायपिpaṇ·ḍu·mat·ti·kā·ya·pi चीवरंcī·va·raṃ रजन्ति।ra·jan·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū chakaṇenapi paṇḍumattikāyapi cīvaraṁ rajanti.

     At that time the monks dyed the robes even with dung and beige clay.

639. 639

     चीवरंcī·va·raṃ दुब्बण्णंdub·baṇ·ṇaṃ होति।ho·ti

     Cīvaraṁ dubbaṇṇaṁ hoti.

     The robes were discolored.

640. 640

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

641. 641

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve छcha रजनानि—ra·ja·nā·ni

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, cha rajanāni—

     “I allow you to use six kinds of dye:

642. 642

     मूलरजनं,mū·la·ra·ja·naṃ खन्धरजनं,khan·dha·ra·ja·naṃ तचरजनं,ta·ca·ra·ja·naṃ पत्तरजनं,pat·ta·ra·ja·naṃ पुप्फरजनं,pup·pha·ra·ja·naṃ फलरजनन्”ति।pha·la·ra·ja·nan

     mūlarajanaṁ, khandharajanaṁ, tacarajanaṁ, pattarajanaṁ, puppharajanaṁ, phalarajanan”ti.

     dye from roots, dye from wood, dye from bark, dye from leaves, dye from flowers, and dye from fruit.”

643. 643

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū सीतुदकायsī·tu·da·kā·ya चीवरंcī·va·raṃ रजन्ति।ra·jan·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū sītudakāya cīvaraṁ rajanti.

     The monks dyed the robes in cold water.

644. 644

     चीवरंcī·va·raṃ दुग्गन्धंdug·gan·dhaṃ होति।ho·ti

     Cīvaraṁ duggandhaṁ hoti.

     The robes were smelly.

645. 645

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

646. 646

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve रजनंra·ja·naṃ पचितुंpa·ci·tuṃ चुल्लंcul·laṃ रजनकुम्भिन्”ति।ra·ja·na·kum·bhin

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, rajanaṁ pacituṁ cullaṁ rajanakumbhin”ti.

     “I allow a dye-pot to boil the dye.”

647. 647

     रजनंra·ja·naṃ उत्तरियति।ut·ta·ri·ya·ti

     Rajanaṁ uttariyati.

     The dye boiled over.

648. 648

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

649. 649

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उत्तराळुम्पंut·ta·rā·ḷum·paṃ बन्धितुन्”ति।ban·dhi·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, uttarāḷumpaṁ bandhitun”ti.

     “I allow you to attach a collar.”

650. 650

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū नna जानन्तिjā·nan·ti रजनंra·ja·naṃ पक्कंpak·kaṃ वाvā अपक्कंa·pak·kaṃ वा।vā

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū na jānanti rajanaṁ pakkaṁ vā apakkaṁ vā.

     The monks did not know whether the dye was ready or not.

651. 651

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

652. 652

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उदकेu·da·ke वाvā नखपिट्ठिकायna·kha·piṭ·ṭhi·kā·ya वाvā थेवकंthe·va·kaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, udake vā nakhapiṭṭhikāya vā thevakaṁ dātun”ti.

     “You should put a drop in water or on the back of your nail.”

653. 653

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū रजनंra·ja·naṃ ओरोपेन्ताo·ro·pen·tā कुम्भिंkum·bhiṃ आविञ्छन्ति।ā·viñ·chan·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū rajanaṁ oropentā kumbhiṁ āviñchanti.

     To empty the pot, the monks tilted it.

654. 654

     कुम्भीkum·bhī भिज्जति।bhij·ja·ti

     Kumbhī bhijjati.

     The pot broke.

655. 655

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

656. 656

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve रजनुळुङ्कंra·ja·nu·ḷuṅ·kaṃ दण्डकथालकन्”ति।daṇ·ḍa·ka·thā·la·kan

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, rajanuḷuṅkaṁ daṇḍakathālakan”ti.

     “I allow a dye-ladle, with or without a handle.”

657. 657

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ रजनभाजनंra·ja·na·bhā·ja·naṃ नna संविज्जति।saṃ·vij·ja·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṁ rajanabhājanaṁ na saṁvijjati.

     The monks did not have a vessel for the dye.

658. 658

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

659. 659

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve रजनकोलम्बंra·ja·na·ko·lam·baṃ रजनघटन्”ति।ra·ja·na·gha·ṭan

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, rajanakolambaṁ rajanaghaṭan”ti.

     “I allow a basin for dye, a waterpot for dye.”

660. 660

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū पातियापिpā·ti·yā·pi पत्तेपिpat·te·pi चीवरंcī·va·raṃ ओमद्दन्ति।o·mad·dan·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū pātiyāpi pattepi cīvaraṁ omaddanti.

     The monks were kneading the robes in basins and bowls.

661. 661

     चीवरंcī·va·raṃ परिभिज्जति।pa·ri·bhij·ja·ti

     Cīvaraṁ paribhijjati.

     The robes tore.

662. 662

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

663. 663

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve रजनदोणिकन्”ति।ra·ja·na·do·ṇi·kan

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, rajanadoṇikan”ti.

     “I allow a dyeing trough.”

664. 664

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū छमायcha·mā·ya चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पत्थरन्ति।pat·tha·ran·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū chamāya cīvaraṁ pattharanti.

     The monks spread the robes on the ground.

665. 665

     चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पंसुकितंpaṃ·su·ki·taṃ होति।ho·ti

     Cīvaraṁ paṁsukitaṁ hoti.

     The robes got dirty.

666. 666

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

667. 667

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तिणसन्थारकन्”ति।ti·ṇa·san·thā·ra·kan

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tiṇasanthārakan”ti.

     “I allow a spread of grass.”

668. 668

     तिणसन्थारकोti·ṇa·san·thā·ra·ko उपचिकाहिu·pa·ci·kā·hi खज्जति।khaj·ja·ti

     Tiṇasanthārako upacikāhi khajjati.

     The grass was eaten by termites.

669. 669

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

670. 670

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve चीवरवंसंcī·va·ra·vaṃ·saṃ चीवररज्जुन्”ति।cī·va·ra·raj·jun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, cīvaravaṁsaṁ cīvararajjun”ti.

     “I allow a bamboo robe rack and a clothesline.”

671. 671

     मज्झेनmaj·jhe·na लग्गेन्ति।lag·gen·ti

     Majjhena laggenti.

     They hung up the robes by the middle.

672. 672

     रजनंra·ja·naṃ उभतोu·bha·to गलति।ga·la·ti

     Rajanaṁ ubhato galati.

     The dye dripped from both sides.

673. 673

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

674. 674

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कण्णेkaṇ·ṇe बन्धितुन्”ति।ban·dhi·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kaṇṇe bandhitun”ti.

     “You should fasten them at the edge.”

675. 675

     कण्णोkaṇ·ṇo जीरति।jī·ra·ti

     Kaṇṇo jīrati.

     The edge became worn.

676. 676

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

677. 677

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कण्णसुत्तकन्”ति।kaṇ·ṇa·sut·ta·kan

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kaṇṇasuttakan”ti.

     “I allow a string for the edge.”

678. 678

     रजनंra·ja·naṃ एकतोe·ka·to गलति।ga·la·ti

     Rajanaṁ ekato galati.

     The dye dripped from one edge.

679. 679

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

680. 680

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्परिवत्तकंsam·pa·ri·vat·ta·kaṃ सम्परिवत्तकंsam·pa·ri·vat·ta·kaṃ रजेतुं,ra·je·tuṃ नna चca अच्छिन्नेac·chin·ne थेवेthe·ve पक्कमितुन्”ति।pak·ka·mi·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, samparivattakaṁ samparivattakaṁ rajetuṁ, na ca acchinne theve pakkamitun”ti.

     “You should dye them by repeatedly turning them over, and you shouldn’t leave while they’re still dripping.”

681. 681

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पत्थिन्नंpat·thin·naṃ होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena cīvaraṁ patthinnaṁ hoti.

     The robes were starchy.

682. 682

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

683. 683

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve उदकेu·da·ke ओसारेतुन्”ति।o·sā·re·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, udake osāretun”ti.

     “You should rinse them in water.”

684. 684

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na चीवरंcī·va·raṃ फरुसंpha·ru·saṃ होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena cīvaraṁ pharusaṁ hoti.

     The robes were stiff.

685. 685

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

686. 686

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पाणिनाpā·ṇi·nā आकोटेतुन्”ति।ā·ko·ṭe·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pāṇinā ākoṭetun”ti.

     “You should beat them with your hands.”

687. 687

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū अच्छिन्नकानिac·chin·na·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti दन्तकासावानि।dan·ta·kā·sā·vā·ni

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū acchinnakāni cīvarāni dhārenti dantakāsāvāni.

     At that time the monks wore robes consisting of a single piece of cloth, the color of ivory.

688. 688

     मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

     Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

     People complained and criticized them,

689. 689

     “सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma गिहीgi·hī कामभोगिनो”ति।kā·ma·bho·gi·no

     “seyyathāpi nāma gihī kāmabhogino”ti.

     “They’re just like householders who indulge in worldly pleasures!”

690. 690

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     They told the Buddha.

691. 691

     “न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अच्छिन्नकानिac·chin·na·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि।dhā·re·tab·bā·ni

     “Na, bhikkhave, acchinnakāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni.

     “You shouldn’t wear robes consisting of a single piece of cloth.

692. 692

     योyo धारेय्य,dhā·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

     Yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

     If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”

693. 693

     15। छिन्नकचीवरानुजाननchin·na·ka·cī·va·rā·nu·jā·na·na

     15. Chinnakacīvarānujānana

     15. The instruction on robes made of pieces

694. 694

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na दक्खिणागिरिdak·khi·ṇā·gi·ri तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā rājagahe yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena dakkhiṇāgiri tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

     After staying at Rājagaha for as long as he liked, the Buddha set out wandering toward the southern hills.

695. 695

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā मगधखेत्तंma·ga·dha·khet·taṃ अच्छिबद्धंac·chi·bad·dhaṃ पाळिबद्धंpā·ḷi·bad·dhaṃ मरियादबद्धंma·ri·yā·da·bad·dhaṃ सिङ्घाटकबद्धं,siṅ·ghā·ṭa·ka·bad·dhaṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Addasā kho bhagavā magadhakhettaṁ acchibaddhaṁ pāḷibaddhaṁ mariyādabaddhaṁ siṅghāṭakabaddhaṁ, disvāna āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

     He saw the fields of Magadha laid out in rectangles defined by long and short boundaries and their intersections. He said to Venerable Ānanda,

696. 696

     “पस्ससिpas·sa·si नोno त्वं,tvaṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da मगधखेत्तंma·ga·dha·khet·taṃ अच्छिबद्धंac·chi·bad·dhaṃ पाळिबद्धंpā·ḷi·bad·dhaṃ मरियादबद्धंma·ri·yā·da·bad·dhaṃ सिङ्घाटकबद्धन्”ति?siṅ·ghā·ṭa·ka·bad·dhan

     “passasi no tvaṁ, ānanda, magadhakhettaṁ acchibaddhaṁ pāḷibaddhaṁ mariyādabaddhaṁ siṅghāṭakabaddhan”ti?

     “Ānanda, have a look at these fields.”

697. 697

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”ति।bhan·te

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti.

     “Yes, sir.”

698. 698

     “उस्सहसिus·sa·ha·si त्वं,tvaṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एवरूपानिe·va·rū·pā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni संविदहितुन्”ति?saṃ·vi·da·hi·tun

     “Ussahasi tvaṁ, ānanda, bhikkhūnaṁ evarūpāni cīvarāni saṁvidahitun”ti?

     “Are you able to make this kind of robe for the monks?”

699. 699

     “उस्सहामि,us·sa·hā·mi भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

     “Ussahāmi, bhagavā”ti.

     “I am.”

700. 700

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā दक्खिणागिरिस्मिंdak·khi·ṇā·gi·ris·miṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā पुनदेवpu·na·de·va राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ पच्चागञ्छि।pac·cā·gañ·chi

     Atha kho bhagavā dakkhiṇāgirismiṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā punadeva rājagahaṁ paccāgañchi.

     After staying in the southern hills for as long as he liked, the Buddha returned to Rājagaha.

701. 701

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do सम्बहुलानंsam·ba·hu·lā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni संविदहित्वाsaṃ·vi·da·hit·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho āyasmā ānando sambahulānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ cīvarāni saṁvidahitvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     Ānanda then made robes for a number of monks. He went to the Buddha and said,

702. 702

     “पस्सतुpas·sa·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni संविदहितानी”ति।saṃ·vi·da·hi·tā·nī

     “passatu me, bhante, bhagavā cīvarāni saṁvidahitānī”ti.

     “Sir, please have a look at the robes I’ve made.”

703. 703

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

704. 704

     “पण्डितो,paṇ·ḍi·to भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आनन्दो;ā·nan·do महापञ्ञो,ma·hā·pañ·ño भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आनन्दो;ā·nan·do यत्रyat·ra हिhi नामnā·ma मयाma·yā सङ्खित्तेनsaṅ·khit·te·na भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa वित्थारेनvit·thā·re·na अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानिस्सति,ā·jā·nis·sa·ti

     “paṇḍito, bhikkhave, ānando; mahāpañño, bhikkhave, ānando; yatra hi nāma mayā saṅkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṁ ājānissati,

     “Ānanda is clever. He understands the detailed meaning of what I’ve spoken in brief.

705. 705

     कुसिम्पिku·sim·pi नामnā·ma करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti अड्ढकुसिम्पिaḍ·ḍha·ku·sim·pi नामnā·ma करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti मण्डलम्पिmaṇ·ḍa·lam·pi नामnā·ma करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti अड्ढमण्डलम्पिaḍ·ḍha·maṇ·ḍa·lam·pi नामnā·ma करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti विवट्टम्पिvi·vaṭ·ṭam·pi नामnā·ma करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti अनुविवट्टम्पिa·nu·vi·vaṭ·ṭam·pi नामnā·ma करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti गीवेय्यकम्पिgī·vey·ya·kam·pi नामnā·ma करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti जङ्घेय्यकम्पिjaṅ·ghey·ya·kam·pi नामnā·ma करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti बाहन्तम्पिbā·han·tam·pi नामnā·ma करिस्सति,ka·ris·sa·ti छिन्नकंchin·na·kaṃ भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti सत्थलूखंsat·tha·lū·khaṃ समणसारुप्पंsa·ma·ṇa·sā·rup·paṃ पच्चत्थिकानञ्चpac·cat·thi·kā·nañ·ca अनभिच्छितं।a·na·bhic·chi·taṃ

     kusimpi nāma karissati, aḍḍhakusimpi nāma karissati, maṇḍalampi nāma karissati, aḍḍhamaṇḍalampi nāma karissati, vivaṭṭampi nāma karissati, anuvivaṭṭampi nāma karissati, gīveyyakampi nāma karissati, jaṅgheyyakampi nāma karissati, bāhantampi nāma karissati, chinnakaṁ bhavissati, satthalūkhaṁ samaṇasāruppaṁ paccatthikānañca anabhicchitaṁ.

     He can make long strips, short strips, large panels, medium-sized panels, middle sections, intermediate sections, a neckpiece, a calf-piece, and outer sections. In this way the robe will be made of pieces, making it worthless, appropriate for monastics, and undesirable for one’s enemies.

706. 706

     अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve छिन्नकंchin·na·kaṃ सङ्घाटिंsaṅ·ghā·ṭiṃ छिन्नकंchin·na·kaṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ छिन्नकंchin·na·kaṃ अन्तरवासकन्”ति।an·ta·ra·vā·sa·kan

     Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, chinnakaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ chinnakaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ chinnakaṁ antaravāsakan”ti.

     Your outer robe should be made of pieces and so should your upper robe and sarong.”

707. 707

     16। तिचीवरानुजाननti·cī·va·rā·nu·jā·na·na

     16. Ticīvarānujānana

     16. The instruction on the three robes

708. 708

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na वेसालीve·sā·lī तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā rājagahe yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena vesālī tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

     After staying at Rājagaha for as long as he liked, the Buddha set out wandering toward Vesālī.

709. 709

     अद्दसad·da·sa भगवाbha·ga·vā अन्तराan·ta·rā चca राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ अन्तराan·ta·rā चca वेसालिंve·sā·liṃ अद्धानमग्गप्पटिपन्नोad·dhā·na·mag·gap·pa·ṭi·pan·no सम्बहुलेsam·ba·hu·le भिक्खूbhik·khū चीवरेहिcī·va·re·hi उब्भण्डितेub·bhaṇ·ḍi·te सीसेपिsī·se·pi चीवरभिसिंcī·va·ra·bhi·siṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā खन्धेपिkhan·dhe·pi चीवरभिसिंcī·va·ra·bhi·siṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā कटियापिka·ṭi·yā·pi चीवरभिसिंcī·va·ra·bhi·siṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā आगच्छन्ते,ā·gac·chan·te दिस्वानdis·vā·na भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Addasa bhagavā antarā ca rājagahaṁ antarā ca vesāliṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno sambahule bhikkhū cīvarehi ubbhaṇḍite sīsepi cīvarabhisiṁ karitvā khandhepi cīvarabhisiṁ karitvā kaṭiyāpi cīvarabhisiṁ karitvā āgacchante, disvāna bhagavato etadahosi—

     On the road between Rājagaha and Vesālī the Buddha saw a number of monks walking along, loaded up with robes on their heads, shoulders, and hips. He thought,

710. 710

     “अतिलहुंa·ti·la·huṃ खोkho इमेi·me मोघपुरिसाmo·gha·pu·ri·sā चीवरेcī·va·re बाहुल्लायbā·hul·lā·ya आवत्ता।ā·vat·tā

     “atilahuṁ kho ime moghapurisā cīvare bāhullāya āvattā.

     “These foolish men have turned to an abundance in robes too readily.

711. 711

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ चीवरेcī·va·re सीमंsī·maṃ बन्धेय्यं,ban·dhey·yaṃ मरियादंma·ri·yā·daṃ ठपेय्यन्”ति।ṭha·pey·yan

     Yannūnāhaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ cīvare sīmaṁ bandheyyaṁ, mariyādaṁ ṭhapeyyan”ti.

     Let me set a limit on robes for the monks.”

712. 712

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na वेसालीve·sā·lī तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti गोतमकेgo·ta·ma·ke चेतिये।ce·ti·ye

     Atha kho bhagavā anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena vesālī tadavasari. Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā vesāliyaṁ viharati gotamake cetiye.

     Wandering on, the Buddha eventually arrived at Vesālī where he stayed at the Gotamaka Shrine.

713. 713

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā सीतासुsī·tā·su हेमन्तिकासुhe·man·ti·kā·su रत्तीसुrat·tī·su अन्तरट्ठकासुan·ta·raṭ·ṭha·kā·su हिमपातसमयेhi·ma·pā·ta·sa·ma·ye रत्तिंrat·tiṃ अज्झोकासेaj·jho·kā·se एकचीवरोe·ka·cī·va·ro निसीदि।ni·sī·di नna भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सीतंsī·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sītāsu hemantikāsu rattīsu antaraṭṭhakāsu himapātasamaye rattiṁ ajjhokāse ekacīvaro nisīdi. Na bhagavantaṁ sītaṁ ahosi.

     At that time it was midwinter, when the days are cold and snowy. The Buddha sat outside at night without being cold, wearing only one robe.

714. 714

     निक्खन्तेnik·khan·te पठमेpa·ṭha·me यामेyā·me सीतंsī·taṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si दुतियंdu·ti·yaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पारुपि।pā·ru·pi नna भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सीतंsī·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Nikkhante paṭhame yāme sītaṁ bhagavantaṁ ahosi. Dutiyaṁ bhagavā cīvaraṁ pārupi. Na bhagavantaṁ sītaṁ ahosi.

     Becoming cold at the end of the first part of the night, he put on a second robe.

715. 715

     निक्खन्तेnik·khan·te मज्झिमेmaj·jhi·me यामेyā·me सीतंsī·taṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si ततियंta·ti·yaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पारुपि।pā·ru·pi नna भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सीतंsī·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Nikkhante majjhime yāme sītaṁ bhagavantaṁ ahosi. Tatiyaṁ bhagavā cīvaraṁ pārupi. Na bhagavantaṁ sītaṁ ahosi.

     Becoming cold once again at the end of the middle part of the night, he put on a third robe.

716. 716

     निक्खन्तेnik·khan·te पच्छिमेpac·chi·me यामेyā·me उद्धस्तेud·dhas·te अरुणेa·ru·ṇe नन्दिमुखियाnan·di·mu·khi·yā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā सीतंsī·taṃ भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si चतुत्थंca·tut·thaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पारुपि।pā·ru·pi नna भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ सीतंsī·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Nikkhante pacchime yāme uddhaste aruṇe nandimukhiyā rattiyā sītaṁ bhagavantaṁ ahosi. Catutthaṁ bhagavā cīvaraṁ pārupi. Na bhagavantaṁ sītaṁ ahosi.

     At the end of the last part of the night, when the sky was flaring up at dawn, he became cold once more. Putting on a fourth robe, he was fine.

717. 717

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतदहोसि—“येपिe·ta·da·ho·si खोkho तेte कुलपुत्ताku·la·put·tā इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye सीतालुकाsī·tā·lu·kā सीतभीरुकाsī·ta·bhī·ru·kā तेपिte·pi सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तिचीवरेनti·cī·va·re·na यापेतुं।yā·pe·tuṃ

     Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi—“yepi kho te kulaputtā imasmiṁ dhammavinaye sītālukā sītabhīrukā tepi sakkonti ticīvarena yāpetuṁ.

     He thought, “Even those on this spiritual path who come from respectable families, who are sensitive to the cold and fear the cold, are able to get by with three robes.

718. 718

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ चीवरेcī·va·re सीमंsī·maṃ बन्धेय्यं,ban·dhey·yaṃ मरियादंma·ri·yā·daṃ ठपेय्यं,ṭha·pey·yaṃ तिचीवरंti·cī·va·raṃ अनुजानेय्यन्”ति।a·nu·jā·ney·yan

     Yannūnāhaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ cīvare sīmaṁ bandheyyaṁ, mariyādaṁ ṭhapeyyaṁ, ticīvaraṁ anujāneyyan”ti.

     Let me set a limit on robes for the monks. Let me allow them three robes.”

719. 719

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks.

720. 720

     “इधाहं,i·dhā·haṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अन्तराan·ta·rā चca राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ अन्तराan·ta·rā चca वेसालिंve·sā·liṃ अद्धानमग्गप्पटिपन्नोad·dhā·na·mag·gap·pa·ṭi·pan·no अद्दसंad·da·saṃ सम्बहुलेsam·ba·hu·le भिक्खूbhik·khū चीवरेहिcī·va·re·hi उब्भण्डितेub·bhaṇ·ḍi·te सीसेपिsī·se·pi चीवरभिसिंcī·va·ra·bhi·siṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā खन्धेपिkhan·dhe·pi चीवरभिसिंcī·va·ra·bhi·siṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā कटियापिka·ṭi·yā·pi चीवरभिसिंcī·va·ra·bhi·siṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā आगच्छन्ते,ā·gac·chan·te दिस्वानdis·vā·na मेme एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     “idhāhaṁ, bhikkhave, antarā ca rājagahaṁ antarā ca vesāliṁ addhānamaggappaṭipanno addasaṁ sambahule bhikkhū cīvarehi ubbhaṇḍite sīsepi cīvarabhisiṁ karitvā khandhepi cīvarabhisiṁ karitvā kaṭiyāpi cīvarabhisiṁ karitvā āgacchante, disvāna me etadahosi—

     He told them what had happened

721. 721

     ‘अतिलहुंa·ti·la·huṃ खोkho इमेi·me मोघपुरिसाmo·gha·pu·ri·sā चीवरेcī·va·re बाहुल्लायbā·hul·lā·ya आवत्ता।ā·vat·tā

     ‘atilahuṁ kho ime moghapurisā cīvare bāhullāya āvattā.

     (Pāli only)

722. 722

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ चीवरेcī·va·re सीमंsī·maṃ बन्धेय्यं,ban·dhey·yaṃ मरियादंma·ri·yā·daṃ ठपेय्यन्’ति।ṭha·pey·yan

     Yannūnāhaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ cīvare sīmaṁ bandheyyaṁ, mariyādaṁ ṭhapeyyan’ti.

     (Pāli only)

723. 723

     इधाहं,i·dhā·haṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सीतासुsī·tā·su हेमन्तिकासुhe·man·ti·kā·su रत्तीसुrat·tī·su अन्तरट्ठकासुan·ta·raṭ·ṭha·kā·su हिमपातसमयेhi·ma·pā·ta·sa·ma·ye रत्तिंrat·tiṃ अज्झोकासेaj·jho·kā·se एकचीवरोe·ka·cī·va·ro निसीदिं।ni·sī·diṃ नna मंmaṃ सीतंsī·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Idhāhaṁ, bhikkhave, sītāsu hemantikāsu rattīsu antaraṭṭhakāsu himapātasamaye rattiṁ ajjhokāse ekacīvaro nisīdiṁ. Na maṁ sītaṁ ahosi.

     (Pāli only)

724. 724

     निक्खन्तेnik·khan·te पठमेpa·ṭha·me यामेyā·me सीतंsī·taṃ मंmaṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si दुतियाहंdu·ti·yā·haṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पारुपिं।pā·ru·piṃ नna मंmaṃ सीतंsī·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Nikkhante paṭhame yāme sītaṁ maṁ ahosi. Dutiyāhaṁ cīvaraṁ pārupiṁ. Na maṁ sītaṁ ahosi.

     (Pāli only)

725. 725

     निक्खन्तेnik·khan·te मज्झिमेmaj·jhi·me यामेyā·me सीतंsī·taṃ मंmaṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si ततियाहंta·ti·yā·haṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पारुपिं।pā·ru·piṃ नna मंmaṃ सीतंsī·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Nikkhante majjhime yāme sītaṁ maṁ ahosi. Tatiyāhaṁ cīvaraṁ pārupiṁ. Na maṁ sītaṁ ahosi.

     (Pāli only)

726. 726

     निक्खन्तेnik·khan·te पच्छिमेpac·chi·me यामेyā·me उद्धस्तेud·dhas·te अरुणेa·ru·ṇe नन्दिमुखियाnan·di·mu·khi·yā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā सीतंsī·taṃ मंmaṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si चतुत्थाहंca·tut·thā·haṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पारुपिं।pā·ru·piṃ नna मंmaṃ सीतंsī·taṃ अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Nikkhante pacchime yāme uddhaste aruṇe nandimukhiyā rattiyā sītaṁ maṁ ahosi. Catutthāhaṁ cīvaraṁ pārupiṁ. Na maṁ sītaṁ ahosi.

     (Pāli only)

727. 727

     तस्सtas·sa मय्हं,may·haṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Tassa mayhaṁ, bhikkhave, etadahosi—

     and what he had thought, adding:

728. 728

     ‘येपिye·pi खोkho तेte कुलपुत्ताku·la·put·tā इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ धम्मविनयेdham·ma·vi·na·ye सीतालुकाsī·tā·lu·kā सीतभीरुकाsī·ta·bhī·ru·kā तेपिte·pi सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तिचीवरेनti·cī·va·re·na यापेतुं।yā·pe·tuṃ

     ‘yepi kho te kulaputtā imasmiṁ dhammavinaye sītālukā sītabhīrukā tepi sakkonti ticīvarena yāpetuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

729. 729

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ चीवरेcī·va·re सीमंsī·maṃ बन्धेय्यं,ban·dhey·yaṃ मरियादंma·ri·yā·daṃ ठपेय्यं,ṭha·pey·yaṃ तिचीवरंti·cī·va·raṃ अनुजानेय्यन्’ति।a·nu·jā·ney·yan

     Yannūnāhaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ cīvare sīmaṁ bandheyyaṁ, mariyādaṁ ṭhapeyyaṁ, ticīvaraṁ anujāneyyan’ti.

     (Pāli only)

730. 730

     अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तिचीवरं—दिगुणंti·cī·va·raṃ सङ्घाटिं,saṅ·ghā·ṭiṃ एकच्चियंe·kac·ci·yaṃ उत्तरासङ्गं,ut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ एकच्चियंe·kac·ci·yaṃ अन्तरवासकन्”ति।an·ta·ra·vā·sa·kan

     Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ticīvaraṁ—diguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ, ekacciyaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ, ekacciyaṁ antaravāsakan”ti.

     “I allow you three robes: a double-layered outer robe, a single-layered upper robe, and a single-layered sarong.”

731. 731

     17। अतिरेकचीवरकथाa·ti·re·ka·cī·va·ra·ka·thā

     17. Atirekacīvarakathā

     17. Discussion on extra robes

732. 732

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खू—“भगवताbhik·khū तिचीवरंti·cī·va·raṃ अनुञ्ञातन्”ति—a·nuñ·ñā·tan

     Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū—“bhagavatā ticīvaraṁ anuññātan”ti—

     When they heard that the Buddha had allowed three robes,

733. 733

     अञ्ञेनेवañ·ñe·ne·va तिचीवरेनti·cī·va·re·na गामंgā·maṃ पविसन्ति,pa·vi·san·ti अञ्ञेनañ·ñe·na तिचीवरेनti·cī·va·re·na आरामेā·rā·me अच्छन्ति,ac·chan·ti अञ्ञेनañ·ñe·na तिचीवरेनti·cī·va·re·na नहानंna·hā·naṃ ओतरन्ति।o·ta·ran·ti

     aññeneva ticīvarena gāmaṁ pavisanti, aññena ticīvarena ārāme acchanti, aññena ticīvarena nahānaṁ otaranti.

     the monks from the group of six went to the village in one set of three, stayed in the monastery in another set, and went bathing in yet another set.

734. 734

     येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

     Ye te bhikkhū appicchā te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

     The monks of few desires complained and criticized them,

735. 735

     “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū अतिरेकचीवरंa·ti·re·ka·cī·va·raṃ धारेस्सन्ती”ति।dhā·res·san·tī

     “kathañhi nāma chabbaggiyā bhikkhū atirekacīvaraṁ dhāressantī”ti.

     “How can the monks from the group of six keep extra robes?”

736. 736

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     They told the Buddha.

737. 737

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

738. 738

     “न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अतिरेकचीवरंa·ti·re·ka·cī·va·raṃ धारेतब्बं।dhā·re·tab·baṃ

     “na, bhikkhave, atirekacīvaraṁ dhāretabbaṁ.

     “You shouldn’t keep extra robes.

739. 739

     योyo धारेय्य,dhā·rey·ya यथाधम्मोya·thā·dham·mo कारेतब्बो”ति।kā·re·tab·bo

     Yo dhāreyya, yathādhammo kāretabbo”ti.

     If you do, you should be dealt with according to the rule.”

740. 740

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to आनन्दस्सā·nan·das·sa अतिरेकचीवरंa·ti·re·ka·cī·va·raṃ उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato ānandassa atirekacīvaraṁ uppannaṁ hoti.

     Soon, Venerable Ānanda was offered an extra robe.

741. 741

     आयस्माā·yas·mā चca आनन्दोā·nan·do तंtaṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सारिपुत्तस्सsā·ri·put·tas·sa दातुकामोdā·tu·kā·mo होति।ho·ti

     Āyasmā ca ānando taṁ cīvaraṁ āyasmato sāriputtassa dātukāmo hoti.

     He wanted to give it to Venerable Sāriputta

742. 742

     आयस्माā·yas·mā चca सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to साकेतेsā·ke·te विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Āyasmā ca sāriputto sākete viharati.

     who was staying at Sāketa.

743. 743

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to आनन्दस्सā·nan·das·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho āyasmato ānandassa etadahosi—

     (Pāli only)

744. 744

     “भगवताbha·ga·va·tā सिक्खापदंsik·khā·pa·daṃ पञ्ञत्तं—pañ·ñat·taṃ

     “bhagavatā sikkhāpadaṁ paññattaṁ—

     Knowing that the Buddha had laid down a rule against having an extra robe, he thought,

745. 745

     ‘नna अतिरेकचीवरंa·ti·re·ka·cī·va·raṃ धारेतब्बन्’ति।dhā·re·tab·ban

     ‘na atirekacīvaraṁ dhāretabban’ti.

     (Pāli only)

746. 746

     इदञ्चi·dañ·ca मेme अतिरेकचीवरंa·ti·re·ka·cī·va·raṃ उप्पन्नं।up·pan·naṃ

     Idañca me atirekacīvaraṁ uppannaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

747. 747

     अहञ्चिमंa·hañ·ci·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सारिपुत्तस्सsā·ri·put·tas·sa दातुकामो।dā·tu·kā·mo

     Ahañcimaṁ cīvaraṁ āyasmato sāriputtassa dātukāmo.

     (Pāli only)

748. 748

     आयस्माā·yas·mā चca सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to साकेतेsā·ke·te विहरति।vi·ha·ra·ti

     Āyasmā ca sāriputto sākete viharati.

     (Pāli only)

749. 749

     कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खोkho मयाma·yā पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

     Kathaṁ nu kho mayā paṭipajjitabban”ti?

     “What should I do now?”

750. 750

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

     He told the Buddha, who said,

751. 751

     “कीवचिरंkī·va·ci·raṃ पनानन्द,pa·nā·nan·da सारिपुत्तोsā·ri·put·to आगच्छिस्सती”ति?ā·gac·chis·sa·tī

     “Kīvaciraṁ panānanda, sāriputto āgacchissatī”ti?

     “How long is it, Ānanda, before Sāriputta returns?”

752. 752

     “नवमंna·va·maṃ वा,vā भगवा,bha·ga·vā दिवसं,di·va·saṃ दसमंda·sa·maṃ वा”ति।vā

     “Navamaṁ vā, bhagavā, divasaṁ, dasamaṁ vā”ti.

     “Nine or ten days.”

753. 753

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

754. 754

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दसाहपरमंda·sā·ha·pa·ra·maṃ अतिरेकचीवरंa·ti·re·ka·cī·va·raṃ धारेतुन्”ति।dhā·re·tun

     “anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dasāhaparamaṁ atirekacīvaraṁ dhāretun”ti.

     “You should keep an extra robe for ten days at the most.”

755. 755

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अतिरेकचीवरंa·ti·re·ka·cī·va·raṃ उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṁ atirekacīvaraṁ uppannaṁ hoti.

     Soon the monks were given extra robes.

756. 756

     अथa·tha खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

     (Pāli only)

757. 757

     “कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खोkho अम्हेहिam·he·hi अतिरेकचीवरेa·ti·re·ka·cī·va·re पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

     “kathaṁ nu kho amhehi atirekacīvare paṭipajjitabban”ti?

     Not knowing what to do with them,

758. 758

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     they told the Buddha.

759. 759

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अतिरेकचीवरंa·ti·re·ka·cī·va·raṃ विकप्पेतुन्”ति।vi·kap·pe·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, atirekacīvaraṁ vikappetun”ti.

     “I allow you to assign an extra robe to another.”

760. 760

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na बाराणसीbā·rā·ṇa·sī तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā vesāliyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena bārāṇasī tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

     After staying at Vesālī for as long as he liked, the Buddha set out wandering toward Benares.

761. 761

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na बाराणसीbā·rā·ṇa·sī तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

     Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena bārāṇasī tadavasari.

     When he eventually arrived,

762. 762

     तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā बाराणसियंbā·rā·ṇa·si·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti इसिपतनेi·si·pa·ta·ne मिगदाये।mi·ga·dā·ye

     Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṁ viharati isipatane migadāye.

     he stayed in the deer park at Isipattana.

763. 763

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अन्तरवासकोan·ta·ra·vā·sa·ko छिद्दोchid·do होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno antaravāsako chiddo hoti.

     On that occasion the sarong of a certain monk had a hole.

764. 764

     अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho tassa bhikkhuno etadahosi—

     He thought,

765. 765

     “भगवताbha·ga·va·tā तिचीवरंti·cī·va·raṃ अनुञ्ञातं—a·nuñ·ñā·taṃ

     “bhagavatā ticīvaraṁ anuññātaṁ—

     “The Buddha has allowed three robes:

766. 766

     दिगुणाdi·gu·ṇā सङ्घाटि,saṅ·ghā·ṭi एकच्चियोe·kac·ci·yo उत्तरासङ्गो,ut·ta·rā·saṅ·go एकच्चियोe·kac·ci·yo अन्तरवासको।an·ta·ra·vā·sa·ko

     diguṇā saṅghāṭi, ekacciyo uttarāsaṅgo, ekacciyo antaravāsako.

     a double-layered outer robe, a single-layered upper robe, and a single-layered sarong.

767. 767

     अयञ्चa·yañ·ca मेme अन्तरवासकोan·ta·ra·vā·sa·ko छिद्दो।chid·do

     Ayañca me antaravāsako chiddo.

     Since my sarong has a hole,

768. 768

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ अग्गळंag·ga·ḷaṃ अच्छुपेय्यं,ac·chu·pey·yaṃ समन्ततोsa·man·ta·to दुपट्टंdu·paṭ·ṭaṃ भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti मज्झेmaj·jhe एकच्चियन्”ति।e·kac·ci·yan

     Yannūnāhaṁ aggaḷaṁ acchupeyyaṁ, samantato dupaṭṭaṁ bhavissati, majjhe ekacciyan”ti.

     let me add a patch. It will have a double layer of cloth on all sides, but only a single layer in the middle.”

769. 769

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu अग्गळंag·ga·ḷaṃ अच्छुपेसि।ac·chu·pe·si

     Atha kho so bhikkhu aggaḷaṁ acchupesi.

     And that’s what he did.

770. 770

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सेनासनचारिकंse·nā·sa·na·cā·ri·kaṃ आहिण्डन्तोā·hiṇ·ḍan·to तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अग्गळंag·ga·ḷaṃ अच्छुपेन्तं,ac·chu·pen·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनye·na सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Addasā kho bhagavā senāsanacārikaṁ āhiṇḍanto taṁ bhikkhuṁ aggaḷaṁ acchupentaṁ, disvāna yena so bhikkhu tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavoca—

     Just then the Buddha was walking about the dwellings, and he saw that monk patching his robe. He went up to that monk and said,

771. 771

     “किंkiṃ त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu करोसी”ति?ka·ro·sī

     “kiṁ tvaṁ, bhikkhu, karosī”ti?

     “What are you doing, monk?”

772. 772

     “अग्गळं,ag·ga·ḷaṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā अच्छुपेमी”ति।ac·chu·pe·mī

     “Aggaḷaṁ, bhagavā, acchupemī”ti.

     “I’m patching my robe, sir.”

773. 773

     “साधुsā·dhu साधु,sā·dhu भिक्खु;bhik·khu

     “Sādhu sādhu, bhikkhu;

     “Well done.

774. 774

     साधुsā·dhu खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ भिक्खु,bhik·khu अग्गळंag·ga·ḷaṃ अच्छुपेसी”ति।ac·chu·pe·sī

     sādhu kho tvaṁ, bhikkhu, aggaḷaṁ acchupesī”ti.

     It’s good that you are patching your robe.”

775. 775

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

776. 776

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अहतानंa·ha·tā·naṃ दुस्सानंdus·sā·naṃ अहतकप्पानंa·ha·ta·kap·pā·naṃ दिगुणंdi·gu·ṇaṃ सङ्घाटिं,saṅ·ghā·ṭiṃ एकच्चियंe·kac·ci·yaṃ उत्तरासङ्गं,ut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ एकच्चियंe·kac·ci·yaṃ अन्तरवासकं;an·ta·ra·vā·sa·kaṃ

     “anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ahatānaṁ dussānaṁ ahatakappānaṁ diguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ, ekacciyaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ, ekacciyaṁ antaravāsakaṁ;

     “When the cloth is new or nearly new, I allow a double-layered outer robe, a single-layered upper robe, and a single-layered sarong.

777. 777

     उतुद्धटानंu·tud·dha·ṭā·naṃ दुस्सानंdus·sā·naṃ चतुग्गुणंca·tug·gu·ṇaṃ सङ्घाटिं,saṅ·ghā·ṭiṃ दिगुणंdi·gu·ṇaṃ उत्तरासङ्गं,ut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ दिगुणंdi·gu·ṇaṃ अन्तरवासकं;an·ta·ra·vā·sa·kaṃ

     utuddhaṭānaṁ dussānaṁ catugguṇaṁ saṅghāṭiṁ, diguṇaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ, diguṇaṁ antaravāsakaṁ;

     When the cloth is worn, I allow an outer robe of four layers, a double-layered upper robe, and a double-layered sarong.

778. 778

     पंसुकूलेpaṃ·su·kū·le यावदत्थं;yā·va·dat·thaṃ

     paṁsukūle yāvadatthaṁ;

     With rags, you may have as much as you like.

779. 779

     पापणिकेpā·pa·ṇi·ke उस्साहोus·sā·ho करणीयो।ka·ra·ṇī·yo

     pāpaṇike ussāho karaṇīyo.

     With scraps of cloth from a shop, you should search for them.

780. 780

     अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अग्गळंag·ga·ḷaṃ तुन्नंtun·naṃ ओवट्टिकंo·vaṭ·ṭi·kaṃ कण्डुसकंkaṇ·ḍu·sa·kaṃ दळ्हीकम्मन्”ति।da·ḷhī·kam·man

     Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, aggaḷaṁ tunnaṁ ovaṭṭikaṁ kaṇḍusakaṁ daḷhīkamman”ti.

     And I allow patches, mending, hems, strips of cloth for marking, and strengthening.”

781. 781

     18। विसाखावत्थुvi·sā·khā·vat·thu

     18. Visākhāvatthu

     18. The account of Visākhā

782. 782

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā बाराणसियंbā·rā·ṇa·si·yaṃ यथाभिरन्तंya·thā·bhi·ran·taṃ विहरित्वाvi·ha·rit·vā येनye·na सावत्थिsā·vat·thi तेनte·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṁ yathābhirantaṁ viharitvā yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṁ pakkāmi.

     After staying at Benares for as long as he liked, the Buddha set out wandering toward Sāvatthī.

783. 783

     अनुपुब्बेनa·nu·pub·be·na चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no येनye·na सावत्थिsā·vat·thi तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

     Anupubbena cārikaṁ caramāno yena sāvatthi tadavasari.

     When he eventually arrived,

784. 784

     तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne अनाथपिण्डिकस्सa·nā·tha·piṇ·ḍi·kas·sa आरामे।ā·rā·me

     Tatra sudaṁ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.

     he stayed in the Jeta Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s Monastery.

785. 785

     अथa·tha खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho visākhā migāramātā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Soon afterwards Visākhā Migāramātā went to the Buddha, bowed, and sat down.

786. 786

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho विसाखंvi·sā·khaṃ मिगारमातरंmi·gā·ra·mā·ta·raṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसिsan·das·se·si समादपेसिsa·mā·da·pe·si समुत्तेजेसिsa·mut·te·je·si सम्पहंसेसि।sam·pa·haṃ·se·si

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho visākhaṁ migāramātaraṁ bhagavā dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

     When the Buddha had instructed, inspired, and gladdened her with a teaching,

787. 787

     अथa·tha खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सिताsan·das·si·tā समादपिताsa·mā·da·pi·tā समुत्तेजिताsa·mut·te·ji·tā सम्पहंसिताsam·pa·haṃ·si·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho visākhā migāramātā bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     Visākhā said,

788. 788

     “अधिवासेतुa·dhi·vā·se·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेना”ति।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·nā

     “adhivāsetu me, bhante, bhagavā svātanāya bhattaṁ saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghenā”ti.

     “Sir, please accept tomorrow’s meal from me together with the Sangha of monks.”

789. 789

     अधिवासेसिa·dhi·vā·se·si भगवाbha·ga·vā तुण्हीभावेन।tuṇ·hī·bhā·ve·na

     Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.

     The Buddha consented by remaining silent.

790. 790

     अथa·tha खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to अधिवासनंa·dhi·vā·sa·naṃ विदित्वाvi·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho visākhā migāramātā bhagavato adhivāsanaṁ viditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

     Knowing that the Buddha had consented, Visākhā got up from her seat, bowed down, circumambulated him with her right side toward him, and left.

791. 791

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na तस्साtas·sā रत्तियाrat·ti·yā अच्चयेनac·ca·ye·na चातुद्दीपिकोcā·tud·dī·pi·ko महामेघोma·hā·me·gho पावस्सि।pā·vas·si

     Tena kho pana samayena tassā rattiyā accayena cātuddīpiko mahāmegho pāvassi.

     The following morning it was pouring down from a great storm extending over the four continents.

792. 792

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     The Buddha said to the monks,

793. 793

     “यथा,ya·thā भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne वस्सतिvas·sa·ti एवंe·vaṃ चतूसुca·tū·su दीपेसुdī·pe·su वस्सति।vas·sa·ti

     “yathā, bhikkhave, jetavane vassati evaṁ catūsu dīpesu vassati.

     “It rains on the four continents just as it rains here in the Jeta Grove.

794. 794

     ओवस्सापेथ,o·vas·sā·pe·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कायं।kā·yaṃ

     Ovassāpetha, bhikkhave, kāyaṁ.

     Bathe in the rain, monks.

795. 795

     अयंa·yaṃ पच्छिमकोpac·chi·ma·ko चातुद्दीपिकोcā·tud·dī·pi·ko महामेघो”ति।ma·hā·me·gho

     Ayaṁ pacchimako cātuddīpiko mahāmegho”ti.

     This is the last great storm of this kind.”

796. 796

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā निक्खित्तचीवराnik·khit·ta·cī·va·rā कायंkā·yaṃ ओवस्सापेन्ति।o·vas·sā·pen·ti

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā nikkhittacīvarā kāyaṁ ovassāpenti.

     Saying, “Yes, sir,” they took off their robes and bathed in the rain.

797. 797

     अथa·tha खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ खादनीयंkhā·da·nī·yaṃ भोजनीयंbho·ja·nī·yaṃ पटियादापेत्वाpa·ṭi·yā·dā·pet·vā दासिंdā·siṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Atha kho visākhā migāramātā paṇītaṁ khādanīyaṁ bhojanīyaṁ paṭiyādāpetvā dāsiṁ āṇāpesi—

     When Visākhā had had various kinds of fine foods prepared, she told a slave,

798. 798

     “गच्छ,gac·cha जे।je आरामंā·rā·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā कालंkā·laṃ आरोचेहि—कालो,ā·ro·ce·hi भन्ते,bhan·te निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

     “gaccha, je. Ārāmaṁ gantvā kālaṁ ārocehi—kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

     “Go to the monastery and tell the Buddha that the meal is ready.”

799. 799

     “एवं,e·vaṃ अय्ये”तिay·ye खोkho साsā दासीdā·sī विसाखायvi·sā·khā·ya मिगारमातुयाmi·gā·ra·mā·tu·yā पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā आरामंā·rā·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā अद्दसad·da·sa भिक्खूbhik·khū निक्खित्तचीवरेnik·khit·ta·cī·va·re कायंkā·yaṃ ओवस्सापेन्ते,o·vas·sā·pen·te दिस्वान—dis·vā·na

     “Evaṁ, ayye”ti kho sā dāsī visākhāya migāramātuyā paṭissuṇitvā ārāmaṁ gantvā addasa bhikkhū nikkhittacīvare kāyaṁ ovassāpente, disvāna—

     Saying, “Yes, ma’am,” she went to the monastery and saw the monks bathing naked in the rain. She thought,

800. 800

     “नत्थिnat·thi आरामेā·rā·me भिक्खू,bhik·khū आजीवकाā·jī·va·kā कायंkā·yaṃ ओवस्सापेन्ती”ति—o·vas·sā·pen·tī

     “natthi ārāme bhikkhū, ājīvakā kāyaṁ ovassāpentī”ti—

     “There are no monks in the monastery, just Ājīvaka ascetics bathing in the rain.”

801. 801

     येनye·na विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā विसाखंvi·sā·khaṃ मिगारमातरंmi·gā·ra·mā·ta·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     yena visākhā migāramātā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā visākhaṁ migāramātaraṁ etadavoca—

     She returned and told Visākhā what had happened.

802. 802

     “नत्थय्ये,nat·thay·ye आरामेā·rā·me भिक्खू,bhik·khū आजीवकाā·jī·va·kā कायंkā·yaṃ ओवस्सापेन्ती”ति।o·vas·sā·pen·tī

     “natthayye, ārāme bhikkhū, ājīvakā kāyaṁ ovassāpentī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

803. 803

     अथa·tha खोkho विसाखायvi·sā·khā·ya मिगारमातुयाmi·gā·ra·mā·tu·yā पण्डितायpaṇ·ḍi·tā·ya वियत्तायvi·yat·tā·ya मेधाविनियाme·dhā·vi·ni·yā एतदहोसि—“निस्संसयंe·ta·da·ho·si खोkho अय्याay·yā निक्खित्तचीवराnik·khit·ta·cī·va·rā कायंkā·yaṃ ओवस्सापेन्ति।o·vas·sā·pen·ti

     Atha kho visākhāya migāramātuyā paṇḍitāya viyattāya medhāviniyā etadahosi—“nissaṁsayaṁ kho ayyā nikkhittacīvarā kāyaṁ ovassāpenti.

     Being wise and discerning, Visākhā thought, “No doubt the venerables are bathing naked in the rain.

804. 804

     सायंsā·yaṃ बालाbā·lā मञ्ञित्थ—नत्थिmañ·ñit·tha आरामेā·rā·me भिक्खू,bhik·khū आजीवकाā·jī·va·kā कायंkā·yaṃ ओवस्सापेन्ती”ति,o·vas·sā·pen·tī पुनpu·na दासिंdā·siṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Sāyaṁ bālā maññittha—natthi ārāme bhikkhū, ājīvakā kāyaṁ ovassāpentī”ti, puna dāsiṁ āṇāpesi—

     It’s only because of her ignorance that she thinks as she does.”

805. 805

     “गच्छ,gac·cha जे।je आरामंā·rā·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā कालंkā·laṃ आरोचेहि—कालो,ā·ro·ce·hi भन्ते,bhan·te निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

     “gaccha, je. Ārāmaṁ gantvā kālaṁ ārocehi—kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

     So she sent the slave back to the monastery with the same instructions.

806. 806

     अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū गत्तानिgat·tā·ni सीतिंsī·tiṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā कल्लकायाkal·la·kā·yā चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni गहेत्वाga·het·vā यथाविहारंya·thā·vi·hā·raṃ पविसिंसु।pa·vi·siṃ·su

     Atha kho te bhikkhū gattāni sītiṁ karitvā kallakāyā cīvarāni gahetvā yathāvihāraṁ pavisiṁsu.

     When the monks had cooled their bodies and felt invigorated, they took their robes and entered their dwellings.

807. 807

     अथa·tha खोkho साsā दासीdā·sī आरामंā·rā·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā भिक्खूbhik·khū अपस्सन्ती—a·pas·san·tī

     Atha kho sā dāsī ārāmaṁ gantvā bhikkhū apassantī—

     When the slave arrived, she didn’t see any monks. She thought,

808. 808

     “नत्थिnat·thi आरामेā·rā·me भिक्खू,bhik·khū सुञ्ञोsuñ·ño आरामो”ति—ā·rā·mo

     “natthi ārāme bhikkhū, suñño ārāmo”ti—

     “There are no monks in the monastery. It’s empty.”

809. 809

     येनye·na विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā विसाखंvi·sā·khaṃ मिगारमातरंmi·gā·ra·mā·ta·raṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     yena visākhā migāramātā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā visākhaṁ migāramātaraṁ etadavoca—

     She returned and told Visākhā what had happened.

810. 810

     “नत्थय्ये,nat·thay·ye आरामेā·rā·me भिक्खू,bhik·khū सुञ्ञोsuñ·ño आरामो”ति।ā·rā·mo

     “natthayye, ārāme bhikkhū, suñño ārāmo”ti.

     (Pāli only)

811. 811

     अथa·tha खोkho विसाखायvi·sā·khā·ya मिगारमातुयाmi·gā·ra·mā·tu·yā पण्डितायpaṇ·ḍi·tā·ya वियत्तायvi·yat·tā·ya मेधाविनियाme·dhā·vi·ni·yā एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho visākhāya migāramātuyā paṇḍitāya viyattāya medhāviniyā etadahosi—

     Once again Visākhā realized what was going on,

812. 812

     “निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ खोkho अय्याay·yā गत्तानिgat·tā·ni सीतिंsī·tiṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā कल्लकायाkal·la·kā·yā चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni गहेत्वाga·het·vā यथाविहारंya·thā·vi·hā·raṃ पविट्ठा।pa·viṭ·ṭhā

     “nissaṁsayaṁ kho ayyā gattāni sītiṁ karitvā kallakāyā cīvarāni gahetvā yathāvihāraṁ paviṭṭhā.

     (Pāli only)

813. 813

     सायंsā·yaṃ बालाbā·lā मञ्ञित्थ—नत्थिmañ·ñit·tha आरामेā·rā·me भिक्खू,bhik·khū सुञ्ञोsuñ·ño आरामो”ति,ā·rā·mo पुनpu·na दासिंdā·siṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

     Sāyaṁ bālā maññittha—natthi ārāme bhikkhū, suñño ārāmo”ti, puna dāsiṁ āṇāpesi—

     (Pāli only)

814. 814

     “गच्छ,gac·cha जे।je आरामंā·rā·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā कालंkā·laṃ आरोचेहि—कालो,ā·ro·ce·hi भन्ते,bhan·te निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्”ति।bhat·tan

     “gaccha, je. Ārāmaṁ gantvā kālaṁ ārocehi—kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan”ti.

     and she told the slave to go to the monastery one more time.

815. 815

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     When the message had been delivered, the Buddha said to the monks,

816. 816

     “सन्दहथ,san·da·ha·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पत्तचीवरं;pat·ta·cī·va·raṃ कालोkā·lo भत्तस्सा”ति।bhat·tas·sā

     “sandahatha, bhikkhave, pattacīvaraṁ; kālo bhattassā”ti.

     “Get your bowls and robes. It’s time for the meal.”

817. 817

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चस्सोसुं।pac·cas·so·suṃ

     “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṁ.

     “Yes, sir.”

818. 818

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादाय—pat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya

     Atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya—

     The Buddha robed up and took his bowl and robe.

819. 819

     सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi नामnā·ma बलवाba·la·vā पुरिसोpu·ri·so समिञ्जितंsa·miñ·ji·taṃ वाvā बाहंbā·haṃ पसारेय्य,pa·sā·rey·ya पसारितंpa·sā·ri·taṃ वाvā बाहंbā·haṃ समिञ्जेय्य;sa·miñ·jey·ya एवमेव—जेतवनेe·va·me·va अन्तरहितोan·ta·ra·hi·to विसाखायvi·sā·khā·ya मिगारमातुयाmi·gā·ra·mā·tu·yā कोट्ठकेkoṭ·ṭha·ke पातुरहोसि।pā·tu·ra·ho·si

     seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṁ vā bāhaṁ pasāreyya, pasāritaṁ vā bāhaṁ samiñjeyya; evameva—jetavane antarahito visākhāya migāramātuyā koṭṭhake pāturahosi.

     Then, just as a strong man might bend or stretch his arm, the Buddha disappeared from the Jeta Grove and appeared at Visākhā’s gatehouse.

820. 820

     निसीदिni·sī·di भगवाbha·ga·vā पञ्ञत्तेpañ·ñat·te आसनेā·sa·ne सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ भिक्खुसङ्घेन।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na

     Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane saddhiṁ bhikkhusaṅghena.

     He sat down on the prepared seat together with the Sangha of monks.

821. 821

     अथa·tha खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाता—“अच्छरियंmi·gā·ra·mā·tā वतva·ta भो,bho अब्भुतंab·bhu·taṃ वतva·ta भो।bho

     Atha kho visākhā migāramātā—“acchariyaṁ vata bho, abbhutaṁ vata bho.

     Visākhā thought, “The power and might of the Buddha are truly amazing.

822. 822

     तथागतस्सta·thā·ga·tas·sa महिद्धिकताma·hid·dhi·ka·tā महानुभावता,ma·hā·nu·bhā·va·tā यत्रyat·ra हिhi नामnā·ma जण्णुकमत्तेसुपिjaṇ·ṇu·ka·mat·te·su·pi ओघेसुo·ghe·su पवत्तमानेसु,pa·vat·ta·mā·ne·su कटिमत्तेसुपिka·ṭi·mat·te·su·pi ओघेसुo·ghe·su पवत्तमानेसु,pa·vat·ta·mā·ne·su नna हिhi नामnā·ma एकभिक्खुस्सपिe·ka·bhik·khus·sa·pi पादाpā·dā वाvā चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni वाvā अल्लानिal·lā·ni भविस्सन्ती”ति—bha·vis·san·tī

     Tathāgatassa mahiddhikatā mahānubhāvatā, yatra hi nāma jaṇṇukamattesupi oghesu pavattamānesu, kaṭimattesupi oghesu pavattamānesu, na hi nāma ekabhikkhussapi pādā vā cīvarāni vā allāni bhavissantī”ti—

     The water is flowing knee-deep, even waist-deep, yet not a single monk has wet feet or wet robes.”

823. 823

     हट्ठाhaṭ·ṭhā उदग्गाu·dag·gā बुद्धप्पमुखंbud·dhap·pa·mu·khaṃ भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ पणीतेनpa·ṇī·te·na खादनीयेनkhā·da·nī·ye·na भोजनीयेनbho·ja·nī·ye·na सहत्थाsa·hat·thā सन्तप्पेत्वाsan·tap·pet·vā सम्पवारेत्वाsam·pa·vā·ret·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ भुत्ताविंbhut·tā·viṃ ओनीतपत्तपाणिंo·nī·ta·pat·ta·pā·ṇiṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     haṭṭhā udaggā buddhappamukhaṁ bhikkhusaṅghaṁ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena sahatthā santappetvā sampavāretvā bhagavantaṁ bhuttāviṁ onītapattapāṇiṁ ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     Delighted and joyful, she personally served various kinds of fine foods to the Sangha of monks headed by the Buddha. When the Buddha had finished his meal, she sat down to one side

824. 824

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नाni·sin·nā खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho visākhā migāramātā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and said,

825. 825

     “अट्ठाहं,aṭ·ṭhā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ वरानिva·rā·ni याचामी”ति।yā·cā·mī

     “aṭṭhāhaṁ, bhante, bhagavantaṁ varāni yācāmī”ti.

     “Sir, I wish to ask for eight favors.”

826. 826

     “अतिक्कन्तवराa·tik·kan·ta·va·rā खो,kho विसाखे,vi·sā·khe तथागता”ति।ta·thā·ga·tā

     “Atikkantavarā kho, visākhe, tathāgatā”ti.

     “Buddhas don’t grant favors, Visākhā.”

827. 827

     “यानिyā·ni च,ca भन्ते,bhan·te कप्पियानिkap·pi·yā·ni यानिyā·ni चca अनवज्जानी”ति।a·na·vaj·jā·nī

     “Yāni ca, bhante, kappiyāni yāni ca anavajjānī”ti.

     “It’s allowable and blameless.”

828. 828

     “वदेहि,va·de·hi विसाखे”ति।vi·sā·khe

     “Vadehi, visākhe”ti.

     “Well then, say what it is.”

829. 829

     “इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ वस्सिकसाटिकंvas·si·ka·sā·ṭi·kaṃ दातुं,dā·tuṃ आगन्तुकभत्तंā·gan·tu·ka·bhat·taṃ दातुं,dā·tuṃ गमिकभत्तंga·mi·ka·bhat·taṃ दातुं,dā·tuṃ गिलानभत्तंgi·lā·na·bhat·taṃ दातुं,dā·tuṃ गिलानुपट्ठाकभत्तंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ka·bhat·taṃ दातुं,dā·tuṃ गिलानभेसज्जंgi·lā·na·bhe·saj·jaṃ दातुं,dā·tuṃ धुवयागुंdhu·va·yā·guṃ दातुं,dā·tuṃ भिक्खुनिसङ्घस्सbhik·khu·ni·saṅ·ghas·sa उदकसाटिकंu·da·ka·sā·ṭi·kaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     “Icchāmahaṁ, bhante, saṅghassa yāvajīvaṁ vassikasāṭikaṁ dātuṁ, āgantukabhattaṁ dātuṁ, gamikabhattaṁ dātuṁ, gilānabhattaṁ dātuṁ, gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṁ dātuṁ, gilānabhesajjaṁ dātuṁ, dhuvayāguṁ dātuṁ, bhikkhunisaṅghassa udakasāṭikaṁ dātun”ti.

     “For as long as I live I wish to give rainy-season robes to the Sangha, and I wish to give meals to the newly-arrived and departing monastics, as well as to those who are sick and those nursing the sick. I also wish to give medicines to the sick, a regular supply of congee, and bathing robes to the nuns.”

830. 830

     “किंkiṃ पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ विसाखे,vi·sā·khe अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā तथागतंta·thā·ga·taṃ अट्ठaṭ·ṭha वरानिva·rā·ni याचसी”ति?yā·ca·sī

     “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, visākhe, atthavasaṁ sampassamānā tathāgataṁ aṭṭha varāni yācasī”ti?

     “But, Visākhā, what reason do you have for asking me for these eight favors?”

831. 831

     “इधाहं,i·dhā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te दासिंdā·siṃ आणापेसिं—ā·ṇā·pe·siṃ

     “Idhāhaṁ, bhante, dāsiṁ āṇāpesiṁ—

     Visākhā then told the Buddha what had happened to her slave,

832. 832

     ‘गच्छ,gac·cha जे।je आरामंā·rā·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā कालंkā·laṃ आरोचेहि—कालो,ā·ro·ce·hi भन्ते,bhan·te निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ भत्तन्’ति।bhat·tan

     ‘gaccha, je. Ārāmaṁ gantvā kālaṁ ārocehi—kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattan’ti.

     (Pāli only)

833. 833

     अथa·tha खोkho सा,sā भन्ते,bhan·te दासीdā·sī आरामंā·rā·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā अद्दसad·da·sa भिक्खूbhik·khū निक्खित्तचीवरेnik·khit·ta·cī·va·re कायंkā·yaṃ ओवस्सापेन्ते,o·vas·sā·pen·te दिस्वान—dis·vā·na

     Atha kho sā, bhante, dāsī ārāmaṁ gantvā addasa bhikkhū nikkhittacīvare kāyaṁ ovassāpente, disvāna—

     (Pāli only)

834. 834

     ‘नत्थिnat·thi आरामेā·rā·me भिक्खू,bhik·khū आजीवकाā·jī·va·kā कायंkā·yaṃ ओवस्सापेन्ती’ति—o·vas·sā·pen·tī

     ‘natthi ārāme bhikkhū, ājīvakā kāyaṁ ovassāpentī’ti—

     (Pāli only)

835. 835

     येनाहंye·nā·haṃ तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā मंmaṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     yenāhaṁ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā maṁ etadavoca—

     (Pāli only)

836. 836

     ‘नत्थय्ये,nat·thay·ye आरामेā·rā·me भिक्खू,bhik·khū आजीवकाā·jī·va·kā कायंkā·yaṃ ओवस्सापेन्ती’ति।o·vas·sā·pen·tī

     ‘natthayye, ārāme bhikkhū, ājīvakā kāyaṁ ovassāpentī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

837. 837

     असुचि,a·su·ci भन्ते,bhan·te नग्गियंnag·gi·yaṃ जेगुच्छंje·guc·chaṃ पटिकूलं।pa·ṭi·kū·laṃ

     Asuci, bhante, naggiyaṁ jegucchaṁ paṭikūlaṁ.

     adding, “Nakedness is gross, disgusting, and repulsive.

838. 838

     इमाहं,i·mā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā इच्छामिic·chā·mi सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ वस्सिकसाटिकंvas·si·ka·sā·ṭi·kaṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

     Imāhaṁ, bhante, atthavasaṁ sampassamānā icchāmi saṅghassa yāvajīvaṁ vassikasāṭikaṁ dātuṁ.

     This is why I wish to give rainy-season robes to the Sangha for as long as I live.

839. 839

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ भन्ते,bhan·te आगन्तुकोā·gan·tu·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu नna वीथिकुसलोvī·thi·ku·sa·lo नna गोचरकुसलोgo·ca·ra·ku·sa·lo किलन्तोki·lan·to पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरति।ca·ra·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, bhante, āgantuko bhikkhu na vīthikusalo na gocarakusalo kilanto piṇḍāya carati.

     Also, not knowing the streets or where to go, newly-arrived monks will get exhausted while walking for alms.

840. 840

     सोso मेme आगन्तुकभत्तंā·gan·tu·ka·bhat·taṃ भुञ्जित्वाbhuñ·jit·vā वीथिकुसलोvī·thi·ku·sa·lo गोचरकुसलोgo·ca·ra·ku·sa·lo अकिलन्तोa·ki·lan·to पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya चरिस्सति।ca·ris·sa·ti

     So me āgantukabhattaṁ bhuñjitvā vīthikusalo gocarakusalo akilanto piṇḍāya carissati.

     But if they eat a meal from me, they will get to know the streets and where to go for alms, and they will avoid getting exhausted.

841. 841

     इमाहं,i·mā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā इच्छामिic·chā·mi सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ आगन्तुकभत्तंā·gan·tu·ka·bhat·taṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

     Imāhaṁ, bhante, atthavasaṁ sampassamānā icchāmi saṅghassa yāvajīvaṁ āgantukabhattaṁ dātuṁ.

     This is why I wish to give meals to the newly-arrived monks for as long as I live.

842. 842

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ भन्ते,bhan·te गमिकोga·mi·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu अत्तनोat·ta·no भत्तंbhat·taṃ परियेसमानोpa·ri·ye·sa·mā·no सत्थाsat·thā वाvā विहायिस्सति,vi·hā·yis·sa·ti यत्थyat·tha वाvā वासंvā·saṃ गन्तुकामोgan·tu·kā·mo भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti तत्थtat·tha विकालेvi·kā·le उपगच्छिस्सति,u·pa·gac·chis·sa·ti किलन्तोki·lan·to अद्धानंad·dhā·naṃ गमिस्सति।ga·mis·sa·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, bhante, gamiko bhikkhu attano bhattaṁ pariyesamāno satthā vā vihāyissati, yattha vā vāsaṁ gantukāmo bhavissati tattha vikāle upagacchissati, kilanto addhānaṁ gamissati.

     Also, in trying to get a meal, departing monks may bother the Teacher, or they may arrive late at their destination. Or, if they fail to get a meal, they’ll be weak while traveling.

843. 843

     सोso मेme गमिकभत्तंga·mi·ka·bhat·taṃ भुञ्जित्वाbhuñ·jit·vā सत्थाsat·thā नna विहायिस्सति,vi·hā·yis·sa·ti यत्थyat·tha वासंvā·saṃ गन्तुकामोgan·tu·kā·mo भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti तत्थtat·tha कालेkā·le उपगच्छिस्सति,u·pa·gac·chis·sa·ti अकिलन्तोa·ki·lan·to अद्धानंad·dhā·naṃ गमिस्सति।ga·mis·sa·ti

     So me gamikabhattaṁ bhuñjitvā satthā na vihāyissati, yattha vāsaṁ gantukāmo bhavissati tattha kāle upagacchissati, akilanto addhānaṁ gamissati.

     But if they eat a meal from me, they won’t bother the Teacher, they’ll arrive at their destination at an appropriate time, and they won’t be weak while traveling.

844. 844

     इमाहं,i·mā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā इच्छामिic·chā·mi सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ गमिकभत्तंga·mi·ka·bhat·taṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

     Imāhaṁ, bhante, atthavasaṁ sampassamānā icchāmi saṅghassa yāvajīvaṁ gamikabhattaṁ dātuṁ.

     This is why I wish to give meals to the departing monks for as long as I live.

845. 845

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ भन्ते,bhan·te गिलानस्सgi·lā·nas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सप्पायानिsap·pā·yā·ni भोजनानिbho·ja·nā·ni अलभन्तस्सa·la·bhan·tas·sa आबाधोā·bā·dho वाvā अभिवड्ढिस्सति,a·bhi·vaḍ·ḍhis·sa·ti कालङ्किरियाkā·laṅ·ki·ri·yā वाvā भविस्सति।bha·vis·sa·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, bhante, gilānassa bhikkhuno sappāyāni bhojanāni alabhantassa ābādho vā abhivaḍḍhissati, kālaṅkiriyā vā bhavissati.

     Also, if sick monks don’t get suitable food, their illness might get worse, or they might die.

846. 846

     तस्सtas·sa मेme गिलानभत्तंgi·lā·na·bhat·taṃ भुत्तस्सbhut·tas·sa आबाधोā·bā·dho नna अभिवड्ढिस्सति,a·bhi·vaḍ·ḍhis·sa·ti कालङ्किरियाkā·laṅ·ki·ri·yā नna भविस्सति।bha·vis·sa·ti

     Tassa me gilānabhattaṁ bhuttassa ābādho na abhivaḍḍhissati, kālaṅkiriyā na bhavissati.

     But if they eat a meal from me, their illness won’t get worse, and they won’t die.

847. 847

     इमाहं,i·mā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā इच्छामिic·chā·mi सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ गिलानभत्तंgi·lā·na·bhat·taṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

     Imāhaṁ, bhante, atthavasaṁ sampassamānā icchāmi saṅghassa yāvajīvaṁ gilānabhattaṁ dātuṁ.

     This is why I wish to give meals to the sick monks for as long as I live.

848. 848

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ भन्ते,bhan·te गिलानुपट्ठाकोgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu अत्तनोat·ta·no भत्तंbhat·taṃ परियेसमानोpa·ri·ye·sa·mā·no गिलानस्सgi·lā·nas·sa उस्सूरेus·sū·re भत्तंbhat·taṃ नीहरिस्सति,nī·ha·ris·sa·ti भत्तच्छेदंbhat·tac·che·daṃ करिस्सति।ka·ris·sa·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, bhante, gilānupaṭṭhāko bhikkhu attano bhattaṁ pariyesamāno gilānassa ussūre bhattaṁ nīharissati, bhattacchedaṁ karissati.

     Also, if the monks who nurse the sick have to get their own meals, they won’t be able to bring back meals for the sick until after midday, and then the sick won’t be able to eat.

849. 849

     सोso मेme गिलानुपट्ठाकभत्तंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ka·bhat·taṃ भुञ्जित्वाbhuñ·jit·vā गिलानस्सgi·lā·nas·sa कालेनkā·le·na भत्तंbhat·taṃ नीहरिस्सति,nī·ha·ris·sa·ti भत्तच्छेदंbhat·tac·che·daṃ नna करिस्सति।ka·ris·sa·ti

     So me gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṁ bhuñjitvā gilānassa kālena bhattaṁ nīharissati, bhattacchedaṁ na karissati.

     But if they eat a meal from me, they’ll be able to bring back meals for the sick in good time, and the sick will be able to eat.

850. 850

     इमाहं,i·mā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā इच्छामिic·chā·mi सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ गिलानुपट्ठाकभत्तंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ka·bhat·taṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

     Imāhaṁ, bhante, atthavasaṁ sampassamānā icchāmi saṅghassa yāvajīvaṁ gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṁ dātuṁ.

     This is why I wish to give meals to those monks who nurse the sick for as long as I live.

851. 851

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ भन्ते,bhan·te गिलानस्सgi·lā·nas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सप्पायानिsap·pā·yā·ni भेसज्जानिbhe·saj·jā·ni अलभन्तस्सa·la·bhan·tas·sa आबाधोā·bā·dho वाvā अभिवड्ढिस्सति,a·bhi·vaḍ·ḍhis·sa·ti कालङ्किरियाkā·laṅ·ki·ri·yā वाvā भविस्सति।bha·vis·sa·ti

     Puna caparaṁ, bhante, gilānassa bhikkhuno sappāyāni bhesajjāni alabhantassa ābādho vā abhivaḍḍhissati, kālaṅkiriyā vā bhavissati.

     Also, if the sick monks don’t get suitable medicines, their illness might get worse or they might die.

852. 852

     तस्सtas·sa मेme गिलानभेसज्जंgi·lā·na·bhe·saj·jaṃ परिभुत्तस्सpa·ri·bhut·tas·sa आबाधोā·bā·dho नna अभिवड्ढिस्सति,a·bhi·vaḍ·ḍhis·sa·ti कालङ्किरियाkā·laṅ·ki·ri·yā नna भविस्सति।bha·vis·sa·ti

     Tassa me gilānabhesajjaṁ paribhuttassa ābādho na abhivaḍḍhissati, kālaṅkiriyā na bhavissati.

     But if they get medicine from me, their illness won’t get worse, and they won’t die.

853. 853

     इमाहं,i·mā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā इच्छामिic·chā·mi सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ गिलानभेसज्जंgi·lā·na·bhe·saj·jaṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

     Imāhaṁ, bhante, atthavasaṁ sampassamānā icchāmi saṅghassa yāvajīvaṁ gilānabhesajjaṁ dātuṁ.

     This is why I wish to give medicine to the Sangha for as long as I live.

854. 854

     पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अन्धकविन्देan·dha·ka·vin·de दसानिसंसेda·sā·ni·saṃ·se सम्पस्समानेनsam·pas·sa·mā·ne·na यागुyā·gu अनुञ्ञाता।a·nuñ·ñā·tā

     Puna caparaṁ, bhante, bhagavatā andhakavinde dasānisaṁse sampassamānena yāgu anuññātā.

     Also, while staying at Andhakavinda, the Buddha allowed congee, seeing ten benefits in it.

855. 855

     त्याहं,tyā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te आनिसंसेā·ni·saṃ·se सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā इच्छामिic·chā·mi सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ धुवयागुंdhu·va·yā·guṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

     Tyāhaṁ, bhante, ānisaṁse sampassamānā icchāmi saṅghassa yāvajīvaṁ dhuvayāguṁ dātuṁ.

     This is why I wish to give a regular supply of congee to the Sangha for as long as I live.

856. 856

     इध,i·dha भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खुनियोbhik·khu·ni·yo अचिरवतियाa·ci·ra·va·ti·yā नदियाna·di·yā वेसियाहिve·si·yā·hi सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ नग्गाnag·gā एकतित्थेe·ka·tit·the नहायन्ति।na·hā·yan·ti

     Idha, bhante, bhikkhuniyo aciravatiyā nadiyā vesiyāhi saddhiṁ naggā ekatitthe nahāyanti.

     Also, sir, on one occasion the nuns were bathing naked at a ford in the river Aciravatī together with sex workers.

857. 857

     ता,tā भन्ते,bhan·te वेसियाve·si·yā भिक्खुनियोbhik·khu·ni·yo उप्पण्डेसुं—up·paṇ·ḍe·suṃ

     Tā, bhante, vesiyā bhikkhuniyo uppaṇḍesuṁ—

     The sex workers teased them,

858. 858

     ‘किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho नामnā·ma तुम्हाकं,tum·hā·kaṃ अय्ये,ay·ye दहरानंda·ha·rā·naṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चिण्णेन,ciṇ·ṇe·na ननुna·nu नामnā·ma कामाkā·mā परिभुञ्जितब्बा;pa·ri·bhuñ·ji·tab·bā

     ‘kiṁ nu kho nāma tumhākaṁ, ayye, daharānaṁ brahmacariyaṁ ciṇṇena, nanu nāma kāmā paribhuñjitabbā;

     ‘Venerables, why practice the spiritual life when you’re still young? Why not enjoy worldly pleasures?

859. 859

     यदाya·dā जिण्णाjiṇ·ṇā भविस्सथbha·vis·sa·tha तदाta·dā ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ चरिस्सथ।ca·ris·sa·tha

     yadā jiṇṇā bhavissatha tadā brahmacariyaṁ carissatha.

     You can practice the spiritual life when you’re old.

860. 860

     एवंe·vaṃ तुम्हाकंtum·hā·kaṃ उभोu·bho अत्थाat·thā परिग्गहिताpa·rig·ga·hi·tā भविस्सन्ती’ति।bha·vis·san·tī

     Evaṁ tumhākaṁ ubho atthā pariggahitā bhavissantī’ti.

     In this way you’ll get the benefits of both.’

861. 861

     ता,tā भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खुनियोbhik·khu·ni·yo वेसियाहिve·si·yā·hi उप्पण्डियमानाup·paṇ·ḍi·ya·mā·nā मङ्कूmaṅ·kū अहेसुं।a·he·suṃ

     Tā, bhante, bhikkhuniyo vesiyāhi uppaṇḍiyamānā maṅkū ahesuṁ.

     The nuns felt humiliated.

862. 862

     असुचि,a·su·ci भन्ते,bhan·te मातुगामस्सmā·tu·gā·mas·sa नग्गियंnag·gi·yaṃ जेगुच्छंje·guc·chaṃ पटिकूलं।pa·ṭi·kū·laṃ

     Asuci, bhante, mātugāmassa naggiyaṁ jegucchaṁ paṭikūlaṁ.

     Nakedness in women is gross, disgusting, and repulsive.

863. 863

     इमाहं,i·mā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अत्थवसंat·tha·va·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā इच्छामिic·chā·mi भिक्खुनिसङ्घस्सbhik·khu·ni·saṅ·ghas·sa यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ उदकसाटिकंu·da·ka·sā·ṭi·kaṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

     Imāhaṁ, bhante, atthavasaṁ sampassamānā icchāmi bhikkhunisaṅghassa yāvajīvaṁ udakasāṭikaṁ dātun”ti.

     This is why I wish to give bathing robes to the Sangha of nuns for as long as I live.”

864. 864

     “किंkiṃ पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ विसाखे,vi·sā·khe आनिसंसंā·ni·saṃ·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā तथागतंta·thā·ga·taṃ अट्ठaṭ·ṭha वरानिva·rā·ni याचसी”ति?yā·ca·sī

     “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, visākhe, ānisaṁsaṁ sampassamānā tathāgataṁ aṭṭha varāni yācasī”ti?

     “But, Visākhā, what benefit do you see that you ask me for these eight favors?”

865. 865

     “इध,i·dha भन्ते,bhan·te दिसासुdi·sā·su वस्संवुट्ठाvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā भिक्खूbhik·khū सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ आगच्छिस्सन्तिā·gac·chis·san·ti भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ दस्सनाय।das·sa·nā·ya

     “Idha, bhante, disāsu vassaṁvuṭṭhā bhikkhū sāvatthiṁ āgacchissanti bhagavantaṁ dassanāya.

     “Well, it will happen that monks who have completed the rainy-season residence in the various regions will come to Sāvatthī to visit the Buddha.

866. 866

     तेte भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पुच्छिस्सन्ति—puc·chis·san·ti

     Te bhagavantaṁ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissanti—

     If a monk has died,

867. 867

     ‘इत्थन्नामो,it·than·nā·mo भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खुbhik·khu कालङ्कतो,kā·laṅ·ka·to तस्सtas·sa काkā गतिga·ti कोko अभिसम्परायो’ति?a·bhi·sam·pa·rā·yo

     ‘itthannāmo, bhante, bhikkhu kālaṅkato, tassa kā gati ko abhisamparāyo’ti?

     they’ll ask you about his destination,

868. 868

     तंtaṃ भगवाbha·ga·vā ब्याकरिस्सतिbyā·ka·ris·sa·ti सोतापत्तिफलेso·tā·pat·ti·pha·le वाvā सकदागामिफलेsa·ka·dā·gā·mi·pha·le वाvā अनागामिफलेa·nā·gā·mi·pha·le वाvā अरहत्तेa·ra·hat·te वा।vā

     Taṁ bhagavā byākarissati sotāpattiphale vā sakadāgāmiphale vā anāgāmiphale vā arahatte vā.

     and you’ll tell them whether he’s reached the fruit of streamentry, the fruit of once-returning, the fruit of non-returning, or perfection.

869. 869

     त्याहंtyā·haṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā पुच्छिस्सामि—puc·chis·sā·mi

     Tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāmi—

     I’ll then ask those monks

870. 870

     ‘आगतपुब्बाā·ga·ta·pub·bā नुnu खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te तेनte·na अय्येनay·ye·na सावत्थी’ति?sā·vat·thī

     ‘āgatapubbā nu kho, bhante, tena ayyena sāvatthī’ti?

     whether that dead monk had previously visited Sāvatthī.

871. 871

     सचेsa·ce मेme वक्खन्ति—vak·khan·ti

     Sace me vakkhanti—

     If they say he had,

872. 872

     ‘आगतपुब्बाā·ga·ta·pub·bā तेनte·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सावत्थी’तिsā·vat·thī निट्ठमेत्थniṭ·ṭha·met·tha गच्छिस्सामि—gac·chis·sā·mi

     ‘āgatapubbā tena bhikkhunā sāvatthī’ti niṭṭhamettha gacchissāmi—

     I may conclude,

873. 873

     ‘निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ मेme परिभुत्तंpa·ri·bhut·taṃ तेनte·na अय्येनay·ye·na वस्सिकसाटिकाvas·si·ka·sā·ṭi·kā वाvā आगन्तुकभत्तंā·gan·tu·ka·bhat·taṃ वाvā गमिकभत्तंga·mi·ka·bhat·taṃ वाvā गिलानभत्तंgi·lā·na·bhat·taṃ वाvā गिलानुपट्ठाकभत्तंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ka·bhat·taṃ वाvā गिलानभेसज्जंgi·lā·na·bhe·saj·jaṃ वाvā धुवयागुdhu·va·yā·gu वा’ति।vā

     ‘nissaṁsayaṁ me paribhuttaṁ tena ayyena vassikasāṭikā vā āgantukabhattaṁ vā gamikabhattaṁ vā gilānabhattaṁ vā gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṁ vā gilānabhesajjaṁ vā dhuvayāgu vā’ti.

     ‘No doubt that venerable will have enjoyed a rainy-season robe supplied by me. Or he will have enjoyed a meal for newly-arrived monks, a meal for departing monks, a meal for sick monks, a meal for those nursing the sick, medicines, or a regular supply of congee—all given by me.’

874. 874

     तस्साtas·sā मेme तदनुस्सरन्तियाta·da·nus·sa·ran·ti·yā पामुज्जंpā·muj·jaṃ जायिस्सति,jā·yis·sa·ti पमुदितायpa·mu·di·tā·ya पीतिpī·ti जायिस्सति,jā·yis·sa·ti पीतिमनायpī·ti·ma·nā·ya कायोkā·yo पस्सम्भिस्सति,pas·sam·bhis·sa·ti पस्सद्धकायाpas·sad·dha·kā·yā सुखंsu·khaṃ वेदियिस्सामि,ve·di·yis·sā·mi सुखिनियाsu·khi·ni·yā चित्तंcit·taṃ समाधियिस्सति।sa·mā·dhi·yis·sa·ti

     Tassā me tadanussarantiyā pāmujjaṁ jāyissati, pamuditāya pīti jāyissati, pītimanāya kāyo passambhissati, passaddhakāyā sukhaṁ vediyissāmi, sukhiniyā cittaṁ samādhiyissati.

     When I recall that, I’ll be glad. The gladness will give rise to joy, and the mental joy will make me tranquil. When I’m tranquil, I’ll feel bliss. And when I’m blissful, my mind will be stilled.

875. 875

     साsā मेme भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti इन्द्रियभावनाin·dri·ya·bhā·va·nā बलभावनाba·la·bhā·va·nā बोज्झङ्गभावना।boj·jhaṅ·ga·bhā·va·nā

     Sā me bhavissati indriyabhāvanā balabhāvanā bojjhaṅgabhāvanā.

     In this way I’ll develop the spiritual faculties, the spiritual powers, and the factors of awakening.

876. 876

     इमाहं,i·mā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te आनिसंसंā·ni·saṃ·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā तथागतंta·thā·ga·taṃ अट्ठaṭ·ṭha वरानिva·rā·ni याचामी”ति।yā·cā·mī

     Imāhaṁ, bhante, ānisaṁsaṁ sampassamānā tathāgataṁ aṭṭha varāni yācāmī”ti.

     It’s because of this benefit that I ask for these eight favors.”

877. 877

     “साधुsā·dhu साधु,sā·dhu विसाखे;vi·sā·khe

     “Sādhu sādhu, visākhe;

     “Well said, Visākhā.

878. 878

     साधुsā·dhu खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ विसाखे,vi·sā·khe इमंi·maṃ आनिसंसंā·ni·saṃ·saṃ सम्पस्समानाsam·pas·sa·mā·nā तथागतंta·thā·ga·taṃ अट्ठaṭ·ṭha वरानिva·rā·ni याचसि।yā·ca·si

     sādhu kho tvaṁ, visākhe, imaṁ ānisaṁsaṁ sampassamānā tathāgataṁ aṭṭha varāni yācasi.

     It’s good that you ask me for these eight favors for the sake of this benefit.

879. 879

     अनुजानामिa·nu·jā·nā·mi ते,te विसाखे,vi·sā·khe अट्ठaṭ·ṭha वरानी”ति।va·rā·nī

     Anujānāmi te, visākhe, aṭṭha varānī”ti.

     I grant you these eight favors.”

880. 880

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā विसाखंvi·sā·khaṃ मिगारमातरंmi·gā·ra·mā·ta·raṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi गाथाहिgā·thā·hi अनुमोदि—a·nu·mo·di

     Atha kho bhagavā visākhaṁ migāramātaraṁ imāhi gāthāhi anumodi—

     The Buddha then expressed his appreciation to Visākhā with these verses:

881. 881

     “याyā अन्नपानंan·na·pā·naṃ ददतिप्पमोदिता,da·da·tip·pa·mo·di·tā

     “Yā annapānaṁ dadatippamoditā,

     “Rejoicing in giving food and drink,

882. 882

     सीलूपपन्नाsī·lū·pa·pan·nā सुगतस्सsu·ga·tas·sa साविका;sā·vi·kā

     Sīlūpapannā sugatassa sāvikā;

     A virtuous disciple of the Accomplished One,

883. 883

     ददातिda·dā·ti दानंdā·naṃ अभिभुय्यa·bhi·bhuy·ya मच्छरं,mac·cha·raṃ

     Dadāti dānaṁ abhibhuyya maccharaṁ,

     Overcoming stinginess, gives a gift.

884. 884

     सोवग्गिकंso·vag·gi·kaṃ सोकनुदंso·ka·nu·daṃ सुखावहं।su·khā·va·haṃ

     Sovaggikaṁ sokanudaṁ sukhāvahaṁ.

     It leads to heaven, eliminates sadness, <j>and brings bliss.

885. 885

     दिब्बंdib·baṃ साsā लभतेla·bha·te आयुं,ā·yuṃ

     Dibbaṁ sā labhate āyuṁ,

     By means of the stainless path,

886. 886

     आगम्मā·gam·ma मग्गंmag·gaṃ विरजंvi·ra·jaṃ अनङ्गणं;a·naṅ·ga·ṇaṃ

     Āgamma maggaṁ virajaṁ anaṅgaṇaṁ;

     She obtains heaven and long life.

887. 887

     साsā पुञ्ञकामाpuñ·ña·kā·mā सुखिनीsu·khi·nī अनामया,a·nā·ma·yā

     Sā puññakāmā sukhinī anāmayā,

     Desiring merit, happy and healthy,

888. 888

     सग्गम्हिsag·gam·hi कायम्हिkā·yam·hi चिरंci·raṃ पमोदती”ति।pa·mo·da·tī

     Saggamhi kāyamhi ciraṁ pamodatī”ti.

     She rejoices in heaven for a long time.”

889. 889

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā विसाखंvi·sā·khaṃ मिगारमातरंmi·gā·ra·mā·ta·raṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi गाथाहिgā·thā·hi अनुमोदित्वाa·nu·mo·dit·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho bhagavā visākhaṁ migāramātaraṁ imāhi gāthāhi anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.

     When the Buddha had expressed his appreciation, he got up from his seat and left.

890. 890

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

891. 891

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्सिकसाटिकं,vas·si·ka·sā·ṭi·kaṃ आगन्तुकभत्तं,ā·gan·tu·ka·bhat·taṃ गमिकभत्तं,ga·mi·ka·bhat·taṃ गिलानभत्तं,gi·lā·na·bhat·taṃ गिलानुपट्ठाकभत्तं,gi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ka·bhat·taṃ गिलानभेसज्जं,gi·lā·na·bhe·saj·jaṃ धुवयागुं,dhu·va·yā·guṃ भिक्खुनिसङ्घस्सbhik·khu·ni·saṅ·ghas·sa उदकसाटिकन्”ति।u·da·ka·sā·ṭi·kan

     “anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassikasāṭikaṁ, āgantukabhattaṁ, gamikabhattaṁ, gilānabhattaṁ, gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṁ, gilānabhesajjaṁ, dhuvayāguṁ, bhikkhunisaṅghassa udakasāṭikan”ti.

     “I allow a rainy-season robe, meals for newly-arrived monastics, meals for departing monastics, meals for the sick, meals for those nursing the sick, medicine for the sick, a regular supply of congee, and bathing robes for the Sangha of nuns.”

892. 892

     विसाखाभाणवारोvi·sā·khā·bhā·ṇa·vā·ro निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Visākhābhāṇavāro niṭṭhito.

     The section for recitation on Visākhā is finished.

893. 893

     19। निसीदनादिअनुजाननni·sī·da·nā·di·a·nu·jā·na·na

     19. Nisīdanādianujānana

     19. The allowance of a sitting mat

894. 894

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū पणीतानिpa·ṇī·tā·ni भोजनानिbho·ja·nā·ni भुञ्जित्वाbhuñ·jit·vā मुट्ठस्सतीmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tī असम्पजानाa·sam·pa·jā·nā निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमन्ति।ok·ka·man·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū paṇītāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā muṭṭhassatī asampajānā niddaṁ okkamanti.

     At one time the monks ate fine food, and then went to sleep absentminded and heedless.

895. 895

     तेसंte·saṃ मुट्ठस्सतीनंmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tī·naṃ असम्पजानानंa·sam·pa·jā·nā·naṃ निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमन्तानंok·ka·man·tā·naṃ सुपिनन्तेनsu·pi·nan·te·na असुचिa·su·ci मुच्चति,muc·ca·ti सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ असुचिनाa·su·ci·nā मक्खियति।mak·khi·ya·ti

     Tesaṁ muṭṭhassatīnaṁ asampajānānaṁ niddaṁ okkamantānaṁ supinantena asuci muccati, senāsanaṁ asucinā makkhiyati.

     They emitted semen while dreaming, soiling the furniture.

896. 896

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā आनन्देनā·nan·de·na पच्छासमणेनpac·chā·sa·ma·ṇe·na सेनासनचारिकंse·nā·sa·na·cā·ri·kaṃ आहिण्डन्तोā·hiṇ·ḍan·to अद्दसad·da·sa सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ असुचिनाa·su·ci·nā मक्खितं,mak·khi·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā āyasmatā ānandena pacchāsamaṇena senāsanacārikaṁ āhiṇḍanto addasa senāsanaṁ asucinā makkhitaṁ, disvāna āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha was walking about the dwellings with Venerable Ānanda as his attendant. Noticing that soiled furniture, he asked Ānanda what had happened.

897. 897

     “किंkiṃ एतं,e·taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ मक्खितन्”ति?mak·khi·tan

     “kiṁ etaṁ, ānanda, senāsanaṁ makkhitan”ti?

     (Pāli only)

898. 898

     “एतरहि,e·ta·ra·hi भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū पणीतानिpa·ṇī·tā·ni भोजनानिbho·ja·nā·ni भुञ्जित्वाbhuñ·jit·vā मुट्ठस्सतीmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tī असम्पजानाa·sam·pa·jā·nā निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमन्ति।ok·ka·man·ti

     “Etarahi, bhante, bhikkhū paṇītāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā muṭṭhassatī asampajānā niddaṁ okkamanti.

     Ānanda told him,

899. 899

     तेसंte·saṃ मुट्ठस्सतीनंmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tī·naṃ असम्पजानानंa·sam·pa·jā·nā·naṃ निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमन्तानंok·ka·man·tā·naṃ सुपिनन्तेनsu·pi·nan·te·na असुचिa·su·ci मुच्चति;muc·ca·ti

     Tesaṁ muṭṭhassatīnaṁ asampajānānaṁ niddaṁ okkamantānaṁ supinantena asuci muccati;

     (Pāli only)

900. 900

     तयिदं,ta·yi·daṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ असुचिनाa·su·ci·nā मक्खितन्”ति।mak·khi·tan

     tayidaṁ, bhagavā, senāsanaṁ asucinā makkhitan”ti.

     (Pāli only)

901. 901

     “एवमेतं,e·va·me·taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da एवमेतं,e·va·me·taṃ आनन्द।ā·nan·da

     “Evametaṁ, ānanda, evametaṁ, ānanda.

     and the Buddha said, “That’s how it is, Ānanda.

902. 902

     मुच्चतिmuc·ca·ti हि,hi आनन्द,ā·nan·da मुट्ठस्सतीनंmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tī·naṃ असम्पजानानंa·sam·pa·jā·nā·naṃ निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमन्तानंok·ka·man·tā·naṃ सुपिनन्तेनsu·pi·nan·te·na असुचि।a·su·ci

     Muccati hi, ānanda, muṭṭhassatīnaṁ asampajānānaṁ niddaṁ okkamantānaṁ supinantena asuci.

     For those who go to sleep absentminded and heedless, semen is emitted while dreaming.

903. 903

     येye ते,te आनन्द,ā·nan·da भिक्खूbhik·khū उपट्ठितस्सतीu·paṭ·ṭhi·tas·sa·tī सम्पजानाsam·pa·jā·nā निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमन्ति,ok·ka·man·ti तेसंte·saṃ असुचिa·su·ci नna मुच्चति।muc·ca·ti

     Ye te, ānanda, bhikkhū upaṭṭhitassatī sampajānā niddaṁ okkamanti, tesaṁ asuci na muccati.

     But for those who fall asleep mindful and heedful, this doesn’t happen,

904. 904

     येपिye·pi ते,te आनन्द,ā·nan·da पुथुज्जनाpu·thuj·ja·nā कामेसुkā·me·su वीतरागा,vī·ta·rā·gā तेसम्पिte·sam·pi असुचिa·su·ci नna मुच्चति।muc·ca·ti

     Yepi te, ānanda, puthujjanā kāmesu vītarāgā, tesampi asuci na muccati.

     nor does it for ordinary people who are free from sensual desire.

905. 905

     अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da अनवकासोa·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ अरहतोa·ra·ha·to असुचिa·su·ci मुच्चेय्या”ति।muc·cey·yā

     Aṭṭhānametaṁ, ānanda, anavakāso yaṁ arahato asuci mucceyyā”ti.

     And, Ānanda, it’s impossible for a perfected one to emit semen.”

906. 906

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks,

907. 907

     “इधाहं,i·dhā·haṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आनन्देनā·nan·de·na पच्छासमणेनpac·chā·sa·ma·ṇe·na सेनासनचारिकंse·nā·sa·na·cā·ri·kaṃ आहिण्डन्तोā·hiṇ·ḍan·to अद्दसंad·da·saṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ असुचिनाa·su·ci·nā मक्खितं,mak·khi·taṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसिं—ā·man·te·siṃ

     “idhāhaṁ, bhikkhave, ānandena pacchāsamaṇena senāsanacārikaṁ āhiṇḍanto addasaṁ senāsanaṁ asucinā makkhitaṁ, disvāna ānandaṁ āmantesiṁ—

     telling them what had happened.

908. 908

     ‘किंkiṃ एतं,e·taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ मक्खितन्’ति?mak·khi·tan

     ‘kiṁ etaṁ, ānanda, senāsanaṁ makkhitan’ti?

     (Pāli only)

909. 909

     ‘एतरहि,e·ta·ra·hi भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū पणीतानिpa·ṇī·tā·ni भोजनानिbho·ja·nā·ni भुञ्जित्वाbhuñ·jit·vā मुट्ठस्सतीmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tī असम्पजानाa·sam·pa·jā·nā निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमन्ति।ok·ka·man·ti

     ‘Etarahi, bhante, bhikkhū paṇītāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā muṭṭhassatī asampajānā niddaṁ okkamanti.

     (Pāli only)

910. 910

     तेसंte·saṃ मुट्ठस्सतीनंmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tī·naṃ असम्पजानानंa·sam·pa·jā·nā·naṃ निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमन्तानंok·ka·man·tā·naṃ सुपिनन्तेनsu·pi·nan·te·na असुचिa·su·ci मुच्चति;muc·ca·ti

     Tesaṁ muṭṭhassatīnaṁ asampajānānaṁ niddaṁ okkamantānaṁ supinantena asuci muccati;

     (Pāli only)

911. 911

     तयिदं,ta·yi·daṃ भगवा,bha·ga·vā सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ असुचिनाa·su·ci·nā मक्खितन्’ति।mak·khi·tan

     tayidaṁ, bhagavā, senāsanaṁ asucinā makkhitan’ti.

     (Pāli only)

912. 912

     ‘एवमेतं,e·va·me·taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da एवमेतं,e·va·me·taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da मुच्चतिmuc·ca·ti हि,hi आनन्द,ā·nan·da मुट्ठस्सतीनंmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tī·naṃ असम्पजानानंa·sam·pa·jā·nā·naṃ निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमन्तानंok·ka·man·tā·naṃ सुपिनन्तेनsu·pi·nan·te·na असुचि।a·su·ci

     ‘Evametaṁ, ānanda, evametaṁ, ānanda, muccati hi, ānanda, muṭṭhassatīnaṁ asampajānānaṁ niddaṁ okkamantānaṁ supinantena asuci.

     (Pāli only)

913. 913

     येye ते,te आनन्द,ā·nan·da भिक्खूbhik·khū उपट्ठितस्सतीu·paṭ·ṭhi·tas·sa·tī सम्पजानाsam·pa·jā·nā निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमन्ति,ok·ka·man·ti तेसंte·saṃ असुचिa·su·ci नna मुच्चति।muc·ca·ti

     Ye te, ānanda, bhikkhū upaṭṭhitassatī sampajānā niddaṁ okkamanti, tesaṁ asuci na muccati.

     He then said:

914. 914

     येपिye·pi ते,te आनन्द,ā·nan·da पुथुज्जनाpu·thuj·ja·nā कामेसुkā·me·su वीतरागाvī·ta·rā·gā तेसम्पिte·sam·pi असुचिa·su·ci नna मुच्चति।muc·ca·ti

     Yepi te, ānanda, puthujjanā kāmesu vītarāgā tesampi asuci na muccati.

     (Pāli only)

915. 915

     अट्ठानमेतं,aṭ·ṭhā·na·me·taṃ आनन्द,ā·nan·da अनवकासोa·na·va·kā·so यंyaṃ अरहतोa·ra·ha·to असुचिa·su·ci मुच्चेय्या’ति।muc·cey·yā

     Aṭṭhānametaṁ, ānanda, anavakāso yaṁ arahato asuci mucceyyā’ti.

     (Pāli only)

916. 916

     पञ्चिमे,pañ·ci·me भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आदीनवाā·dī·na·vā मुट्ठस्सतिस्सmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tis·sa असम्पजानस्सa·sam·pa·jā·nas·sa निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमतो—ok·ka·ma·to

     Pañcime, bhikkhave, ādīnavā muṭṭhassatissa asampajānassa niddaṁ okkamato—

     “There are these five drawbacks to going to sleep absentminded and heedless:

917. 917

     दुक्खंduk·khaṃ सुपति,su·pa·ti दुक्खंduk·khaṃ पटिबुज्झति,pa·ṭi·buj·jha·ti पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ सुपिनंsu·pi·naṃ पस्सति,pas·sa·ti देवताde·va·tā नna रक्खन्ति,rak·khan·ti असुचिa·su·ci मुच्चति।muc·ca·ti

     dukkhaṁ supati, dukkhaṁ paṭibujjhati, pāpakaṁ supinaṁ passati, devatā na rakkhanti, asuci muccati.

     you don’t sleep well; you wake up feeling miserable; you have nightmares; the gods don’t guard you; and you emit semen.

918. 918

     इमेi·me खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चpañ·ca आदीनवाā·dī·na·vā मुट्ठस्सतिस्सmuṭ·ṭhas·sa·tis·sa असम्पजानस्सa·sam·pa·jā·nas·sa निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमतो।ok·ka·ma·to

     Ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca ādīnavā muṭṭhassatissa asampajānassa niddaṁ okkamato.

     (Pāli only)

919. 919

     पञ्चिमे,pañ·ci·me भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आनिसंसाā·ni·saṃ·sā उपट्ठितस्सतिस्सu·paṭ·ṭhi·tas·sa·tis·sa सम्पजानस्सsam·pa·jā·nas·sa निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमतो—ok·ka·ma·to

     Pañcime, bhikkhave, ānisaṁsā upaṭṭhitassatissa sampajānassa niddaṁ okkamato—

     And there are these five benefits in going to sleep mindful and heedful:

920. 920

     सुखंsu·khaṃ सुपति,su·pa·ti सुखंsu·khaṃ पटिबुज्झति,pa·ṭi·buj·jha·ti नna पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ सुपिनंsu·pi·naṃ पस्सति,pas·sa·ti देवताde·va·tā रक्खन्ति,rak·khan·ti असुचिa·su·ci नna मुच्चति।muc·ca·ti

     sukhaṁ supati, sukhaṁ paṭibujjhati, na pāpakaṁ supinaṁ passati, devatā rakkhanti, asuci na muccati.

     you sleep well; you wake up feeling good; you don’t have nightmares; the gods guard you; and you don’t emit semen.

921. 921

     इमेi·me खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चpañ·ca आनिसंसाā·ni·saṃ·sā उपट्ठितस्सतिस्सu·paṭ·ṭhi·tas·sa·tis·sa सम्पजानस्सsam·pa·jā·nas·sa निद्दंnid·daṃ ओक्कमतो।ok·ka·ma·to

     Ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca ānisaṁsā upaṭṭhitassatissa sampajānassa niddaṁ okkamato.

     (Pāli only)

922. 922

     अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कायगुत्तियाkā·ya·gut·ti·yā चीवरगुत्तियाcī·va·ra·gut·ti·yā सेनासनगुत्तियाse·nā·sa·na·gut·ti·yā निसीदनन्”ति।ni·sī·da·nan

     Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kāyaguttiyā cīvaraguttiyā senāsanaguttiyā nisīdanan”ti.

     And, monks, I allow a sitting mat to protect the body, the robes, and the furniture.”

923. 923

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अतिखुद्दकंa·ti·khud·da·kaṃ निसीदनंni·sī·da·naṃ नna सब्बंsab·baṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ सङ्गोपेति।saṅ·go·pe·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena atikhuddakaṁ nisīdanaṁ na sabbaṁ senāsanaṁ saṅgopeti.

     But the sitting mat was too small. It did not protect the entire piece of furniture.

924. 924

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

925. 925

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यावमहन्तंyā·va·ma·han·taṃ पच्चत्थरणंpac·cat·tha·ra·ṇaṃ आकङ्खतिā·kaṅ·kha·ti तावमहन्तंtā·va·ma·han·taṃ पच्चत्थरणंpac·cat·tha·ra·ṇaṃ कातुन्”ति।kā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yāvamahantaṁ paccattharaṇaṁ ākaṅkhati tāvamahantaṁ paccattharaṇaṁ kātun”ti.

     “I allow you to make a sheet as large as you like.”

926. 926

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to आनन्दस्सā·nan·das·sa उपज्झायस्सu·paj·jhā·yas·sa आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to बेलट्ठसीसस्सbe·laṭ·ṭha·sī·sas·sa थुल्लकच्छाबाधोthul·la·kac·chā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato ānandassa upajjhāyassa āyasmato belaṭṭhasīsassa thullakacchābādho hoti.

     On one occasion Venerable Ānanda’s preceptor, Venerable Belaṭṭhasīsa, had carbuncles,

927. 927

     तस्सtas·sa लसिकायla·si·kā·ya चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni कायेkā·ye लग्गन्ति।lag·gan·ti

     Tassa lasikāya cīvarāni kāye lagganti.

     with pus causing his robes to stick to his body.

928. 928

     तानिtā·ni भिक्खूbhik·khū उदकेनu·da·ke·na तेमेत्वाte·met·vā तेमेत्वाte·met·vā अपकड्ढन्ति।a·pa·kaḍ·ḍhan·ti

     Tāni bhikkhū udakena temetvā temetvā apakaḍḍhanti.

     To detach them, the monks kept on moistening his robes with water.

929. 929

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā सेनासनचारिकंse·nā·sa·na·cā·ri·kaṃ आहिण्डन्तोā·hiṇ·ḍan·to तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तानिtā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni उदकेनu·da·ke·na तेमेत्वाte·met·vā तेमेत्वाte·met·vā अपकड्ढन्ते,a·pa·kaḍ·ḍhan·te दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनye·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Addasā kho bhagavā senāsanacārikaṁ āhiṇḍanto te bhikkhū tāni cīvarāni udakena temetvā temetvā apakaḍḍhante, disvāna yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā te bhikkhū etadavoca—

     As the Buddha was walking about the dwellings, he noticed the monks doing this. He went up to them and said,

930. 930

     “किंkiṃ इमस्स,i·mas·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आबाधो”ति?ā·bā·dho

     “kiṁ imassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ābādho”ti?

     “What illness does this monk have?”

931. 931

     “इमस्स,i·mas·sa भन्ते,bhan·te आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to थुल्लकच्छाबाधो।thul·la·kac·chā·bā·dho

     “Imassa, bhante, āyasmato thullakacchābādho.

     “He has carbuncles, sir.

932. 932

     लसिकायla·si·kā·ya चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni कायेkā·ye लग्गन्ति।lag·gan·ti

     Lasikāya cīvarāni kāye lagganti.

     (Pāli only)

933. 933

     तानिtā·ni मयंma·yaṃ उदकेनu·da·ke·na तेमेत्वाte·met·vā तेमेत्वाte·met·vā अपकड्ढामा”ति।a·pa·kaḍ·ḍhā·mā

     Tāni mayaṁ udakena temetvā temetvā apakaḍḍhāmā”ti.

     That’s why we’re doing this.”

934. 934

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

935. 935

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve यस्सyas·sa कण्डुkaṇ·ḍu वाvā पिळकाpi·ḷa·kā वाvā अस्सावोas·sā·vo वाvā थुल्लकच्छुthul·la·kac·chu वाvā आबाधोā·bā·dho कण्डुप्पटिच्छादिन्”ति।kaṇ·ḍup·pa·ṭic·chā·din

     “anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yassa kaṇḍu vā piḷakā vā assāvo vā thullakacchu vā ābādho kaṇḍuppaṭicchādin”ti.

     “For anyone who has an itch, a boil, a running sore, or a carbuncle, I allow an itch-covering cloth.”

936. 936

     अथa·tha खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā मुखपुञ्छनचोळंmu·kha·puñ·cha·na·co·ḷaṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     Atha kho visākhā migāramātā mukhapuñchanacoḷaṁ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     On one occasion Visākhā took a washcloth and went to the Buddha. She bowed, sat down,

937. 937

     एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नाni·sin·nā खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Ekamantaṁ nisinnā kho visākhā migāramātā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

     and said,

938. 938

     “पटिग्गण्हातुpa·ṭig·gaṇ·hā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā मुखपुञ्छनचोळं,mu·kha·puñ·cha·na·co·ḷaṃ यंyaṃ ममस्सma·mas·sa दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ हितायhi·tā·ya सुखाया”ति।su·khā·yā

     “paṭiggaṇhātu me, bhante, bhagavā mukhapuñchanacoḷaṁ, yaṁ mamassa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.

     “Sir, please accept this washcloth for my long-lasting benefit and happiness.”

939. 939

     पटिग्गहेसिpa·ṭig·ga·he·si भगवाbha·ga·vā मुखपुञ्छनचोळं।mu·kha·puñ·cha·na·co·ḷaṃ

     Paṭiggahesi bhagavā mukhapuñchanacoḷaṁ.

     The Buddha accepted it

940. 940

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā विसाखंvi·sā·khaṃ मिगारमातरंmi·gā·ra·mā·ta·raṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसिsan·das·se·si समादपेसिsa·mā·da·pe·si समुत्तेजेसिsa·mut·te·je·si सम्पहंसेसि।sam·pa·haṃ·se·si

     Atha kho bhagavā visākhaṁ migāramātaraṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

     and then instructed, inspired, and gladdened her with a teaching.

941. 941

     अथa·tha खोkho विसाखाvi·sā·khā मिगारमाताmi·gā·ra·mā·tā भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सिताsan·das·si·tā समादपिताsa·mā·da·pi·tā समुत्तेजिताsa·mut·te·ji·tā सम्पहंसिताsam·pa·haṃ·si·tā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā पदक्खिणंpa·dak·khi·ṇaṃ कत्वाkat·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho visākhā migāramātā bhagavatā dhammiyā kathāya sandassitā samādapitā samuttejitā sampahaṁsitā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṁ katvā pakkāmi.

     She got up from her seat, bowed down, circumambulated him with her right side toward him, and left.

942. 942

     अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

     Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

943. 943

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मुखपुञ्छनचोळकन्”ति।mu·kha·puñ·cha·na·co·ḷa·kan

     “anujānāmi, bhikkhave, mukhapuñchanacoḷakan”ti.

     “I allow washcloths.”

944. 944

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na रोजोro·jo मल्लोmal·lo आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to आनन्दस्सā·nan·das·sa सहायोsa·hā·yo होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena rojo mallo āyasmato ānandassa sahāyo hoti.

     At that time Venerable Ānanda had a friend called Roja the Mallian.

945. 945

     रोजस्सro·jas·sa मल्लस्सmal·las·sa खोमपिलोतिकाkho·ma·pi·lo·ti·kā आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to आनन्दस्सā·nan·das·sa हत्थेhat·the निक्खित्ताnik·khit·tā होति।ho·ti

     Rojassa mallassa khomapilotikā āyasmato ānandassa hatthe nikkhittā hoti.

     Roja had left an old linen cloth with Ānanda,

946. 946

     आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to चca आनन्दस्सā·nan·das·sa खोमपिलोतिकायkho·ma·pi·lo·ti·kā·ya अत्थोat·tho होति।ho·ti

     Āyasmato ca ānandassa khomapilotikāya attho hoti.

     and it so happened that Ānanda needed such a cloth.

947. 947

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     They told the Buddha.

948. 948

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतस्सsa·man·nā·ga·tas·sa विस्सासंvis·sā·saṃ गहेतुं—ga·he·tuṃ

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgatassa vissāsaṁ gahetuṁ—

     “I allow you to take things on trust from someone who has five qualities:

949. 949

     सन्दिट्ठोsan·diṭ·ṭho चca होति,ho·ti सम्भत्तोsam·bhat·to च,ca आलपितोā·la·pi·to च,ca जीवतिjī·va·ti च,ca जानातिjā·nā·ti च—गहितेca मेme अत्तमनोat·ta·ma·no भविस्सतीति।bha·vis·sa·tī·ti

     sandiṭṭho ca hoti, sambhatto ca, ālapito ca, jīvati ca, jānāti ca—gahite me attamano bhavissatīti.

     they’re a friend, they’re a close companion, they’ve spoken about it, they’re alive, and you know they’ll be pleased if you take it.”

950. 950

     अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve इमेहिi·me·hi पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतस्सsa·man·nā·ga·tas·sa विस्सासंvis·sā·saṃ गहेतुन्”ति।ga·he·tun

     Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, imehi pañcahaṅgehi samannāgatassa vissāsaṁ gahetun”ti.

     (Pāli only)

951. 951

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ परिपुण्णंpa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ होतिho·ti तिचीवरं।ti·cī·va·raṃ

     Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ hoti ticīvaraṁ.

     At that time the monks had enough robes,

952. 952

     अत्थोat·tho चca होतिho·ti परिस्सावनेहिपिpa·ris·sā·va·ne·hi·pi थविकाहिपि।tha·vi·kā·hi·pi

     Attho ca hoti parissāvanehipi thavikāhipi.

     but they needed water filters and bags.

953. 953

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

954. 954

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve परिक्खारचोळकन्”ति।pa·rik·khā·ra·co·ḷa·kan

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, parikkhāracoḷakan”ti.

     “I allow cloth for requisites.”

955. 955

     20। पच्छिमविकप्पनुपगचीवरादिकथाpac·chi·ma·vi·kap·pa·nu·pa·ga·cī·va·rā·di·ka·thā

     20. Pacchimavikappanupagacīvarādikathā

     20. Discussion of the smallest robe-cloth that can be assigned to another, etc.

956. 956

     अथa·tha खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

     Soon afterwards the monks thought,

957. 957

     “यानिyā·ni तानिtā·ni भगवताbha·ga·va·tā अनुञ्ञातानिa·nuñ·ñā·tā·ni तिचीवरन्तिti·cī·va·ran·ti वाvā वस्सिकसाटिकातिvas·si·ka·sā·ṭi·kā·ti वाvā निसीदनन्तिni·sī·da·nan·ti वाvā पच्चत्थरणन्तिpac·cat·tha·ra·ṇan·ti वाvā कण्डुप्पटिच्छादीतिkaṇ·ḍup·pa·ṭic·chā·dī·ti वाvā मुखपुञ्छनचोळन्तिmu·kha·puñ·cha·na·co·ḷan·ti वाvā परिक्खारचोळन्तिpa·rik·khā·ra·co·ḷan·ti वा,vā सब्बानिsab·bā·ni तानिtā·ni अधिट्ठातब्बानिa·dhiṭ·ṭhā·tab·bā·ni नुnu खो,kho उदाहुu·dā·hu विकप्पेतब्बानी”ति?vi·kap·pe·tab·bā·nī

     “yāni tāni bhagavatā anuññātāni ticīvaranti vā vassikasāṭikāti vā nisīdananti vā paccattharaṇanti vā kaṇḍuppaṭicchādīti vā mukhapuñchanacoḷanti vā parikkhāracoḷanti vā, sabbāni tāni adhiṭṭhātabbāni nu kho, udāhu vikappetabbānī”ti?

     “These things that have been allowed by the Buddha—the three robes, the rainy-season robe, the sitting mat, the sheet, the itch-covering cloth, the washcloth, and the cloth for requisites—are they all to be determined or to be assigned to another?”

958. 958

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     They told the Buddha.

959. 959

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तिचीवरंti·cī·va·raṃ अधिट्ठातुंa·dhiṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ नna विकप्पेतुं;vi·kap·pe·tuṃ

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ticīvaraṁ adhiṭṭhātuṁ na vikappetuṁ;

     “You should determine the three robes, not assign them to another;

960. 960

     वस्सिकसाटिकंvas·si·ka·sā·ṭi·kaṃ वस्सानंvas·sā·naṃ चातुमासंcā·tu·mā·saṃ अधिट्ठातुं,a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ ततोta·to परंpa·raṃ विकप्पेतुं;vi·kap·pe·tuṃ

     vassikasāṭikaṁ vassānaṁ cātumāsaṁ adhiṭṭhātuṁ, tato paraṁ vikappetuṁ;

     you should determine the rainy-season robe for the four months of the rainy season, and apart from that assign it to another;

961. 961

     निसीदनंni·sī·da·naṃ अधिट्ठातुंa·dhiṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ नna विकप्पेतुं;vi·kap·pe·tuṃ

     nisīdanaṁ adhiṭṭhātuṁ na vikappetuṁ;

     you should determine the sitting mat, not assign it to another;

962. 962

     पच्चत्थरणंpac·cat·tha·ra·ṇaṃ अधिट्ठातुंa·dhiṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ नna विकप्पेतुं;vi·kap·pe·tuṃ

     paccattharaṇaṁ adhiṭṭhātuṁ na vikappetuṁ;

     you should determine a sheet, not assign it to another;

963. 963

     कण्डुप्पटिच्छादिंkaṇ·ḍup·pa·ṭic·chā·diṃ यावyā·va आबाधाā·bā·dhā अधिट्ठातुंa·dhiṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ ततोta·to परंpa·raṃ विकप्पेतुं;vi·kap·pe·tuṃ

     kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṁ yāva ābādhā adhiṭṭhātuṁ tato paraṁ vikappetuṁ;

     you should determine an itch-covering cloth for as long as you’re sick, and apart from that assign it to another;

964. 964

     मुखपुञ्छनचोळंmu·kha·puñ·cha·na·co·ḷaṃ अधिट्ठातुंa·dhiṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ नna विकप्पेतुं;vi·kap·pe·tuṃ

     mukhapuñchanacoḷaṁ adhiṭṭhātuṁ na vikappetuṁ;

     you should determine a washcloth, not assign it to another;

965. 965

     परिक्खारचोळंpa·rik·khā·ra·co·ḷaṃ अधिट्ठातुंa·dhiṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ नna विकप्पेतुन्”ति।vi·kap·pe·tun

     parikkhāracoḷaṁ adhiṭṭhātuṁ na vikappetun”ti.

     you should determine a cloth for requisites, not assign it to another.”

966. 966

     अथa·tha खोkho भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

     The monks thought,

967. 967

     “कित्तकंkit·ta·kaṃ पच्छिमंpac·chi·maṃ नुnu खोkho चीवरंcī·va·raṃ विकप्पेतब्बन्”ति?vi·kap·pe·tab·ban

     “kittakaṁ pacchimaṁ nu kho cīvaraṁ vikappetabban”ti?

     “What’s the size of the smallest robe-cloth that can be assigned to another?”

968. 968

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

969. 969

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आयामेनā·yā·me·na अट्ठङ्गुलंaṭ·ṭhaṅ·gu·laṃ सुगतङ्गुलेनsu·ga·taṅ·gu·le·na चतुरङ्गुलवित्थतंca·tu·raṅ·gu·la·vit·tha·taṃ पच्छिमंpac·chi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ विकप्पेतुन्”ति।vi·kap·pe·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āyāmena aṭṭhaṅgulaṁ sugataṅgulena caturaṅgulavitthataṁ pacchimaṁ cīvaraṁ vikappetun”ti.

     “The smallest robe-cloth you should assign to another is one that’s eight standard fingerbreadths long and four wide.”

970. 970

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to महाकस्सपस्सma·hā·kas·sa·pas·sa पंसुकूलकतोpaṃ·su·kū·la·ka·to गरुकोga·ru·ko होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena āyasmato mahākassapassa paṁsukūlakato garuko hoti.

     At that time Venerable Mahākassapa’s rag robes were heavy.

971. 971

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

972. 972

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सुत्तलूखंsut·ta·lū·khaṃ कातुन्”ति।kā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, suttalūkhaṁ kātun”ti.

     “I allow you to mend roughly with thread.”

973. 973

     विकण्णोvi·kaṇ·ṇo होति।ho·ti

     Vikaṇṇo hoti.

     The corners became deformed.

974. 974

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

975. 975

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve विकण्णंvi·kaṇ·ṇaṃ उद्धरितुन्”ति।ud·dha·ri·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vikaṇṇaṁ uddharitun”ti.

     “I allow you to remove the deformity.”

976. 976

     सुत्ताsut·tā ओकिरियन्ति।o·ki·ri·yan·ti

     Suttā okiriyanti.

     The cloth frayed.

977. 977

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

978. 978

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनुवातंa·nu·vā·taṃ परिभण्डंpa·ri·bhaṇ·ḍaṃ आरोपेतुन्”ति।ā·ro·pe·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, anuvātaṁ paribhaṇḍaṁ āropetun”ti.

     “I allow you to add a lengthwise border and a crosswise border.”

979. 979

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सङ्घाटियाsaṅ·ghā·ṭi·yā पत्ताpat·tā लुज्जन्ति।luj·jan·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena saṅghāṭiyā pattā lujjanti.

     On one occasion the panels of an outer robe were breaking up.

980. 980

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

981. 981

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अट्ठपदकंaṭ·ṭha·pa·da·kaṃ कातुन्”ति।kā·tun

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, aṭṭhapadakaṁ kātun”ti.

     “I allow you to darn.”

982. 982

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तिचीवरेti·cī·va·re कयिरमानेka·yi·ra·mā·ne सब्बंsab·baṃ छिन्नकंchin·na·kaṃ नप्पहोति।nap·pa·ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno ticīvare kayiramāne sabbaṁ chinnakaṁ nappahoti.

     At one time, while making a set of three robes for a monk, there was not enough cloth to make all three out of pieces.

983. 983

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

984. 984

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve द्वेdve छिन्नकानिchin·na·kā·ni एकंe·kaṃ अच्छिन्नकन्”ति।ac·chin·na·kan

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve chinnakāni ekaṁ acchinnakan”ti.

     “I allow two robes made of pieces and one that isn’t.”

985. 985

     द्वेdve छिन्नकानिchin·na·kā·ni एकंe·kaṃ अच्छिन्नकंac·chin·na·kaṃ नप्पहोति।nap·pa·ho·ti

     Dve chinnakāni ekaṁ acchinnakaṁ nappahoti.

     There was not enough cloth to make two out of pieces.

986. 986

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

987. 987

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve द्वेdve अच्छिन्नकानिac·chin·na·kā·ni एकंe·kaṃ छिन्नकन्”ति।chin·na·kan

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve acchinnakāni ekaṁ chinnakan”ti.

     “I allow one robe made of pieces and two that are not.”

988. 988

     द्वेdve अच्छिन्नकानिac·chin·na·kā·ni एकंe·kaṃ छिन्नकंchin·na·kaṃ नप्पहोति।nap·pa·ho·ti

     Dve acchinnakāni ekaṁ chinnakaṁ nappahoti.

     There was not enough cloth to make one out of pieces.

989. 989

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

990. 990

     “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अन्वाधिकम्पिan·vā·dhi·kam·pi आरोपेतुं।ā·ro·pe·tuṃ

     “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, anvādhikampi āropetuṁ.

     “I allow you to add a further supply.

991. 991

     नna च,ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सब्बंsab·baṃ अच्छिन्नकंac·chin·na·kaṃ धारेतब्बं।dhā·re·tab·baṃ

     Na ca, bhikkhave, sabbaṁ acchinnakaṁ dhāretabbaṁ.

     But you shouldn’t wear robes none of which are cut into pieces.

992. 992

     योyo धारेय्य,dhā·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

     Yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

     If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”

993. 993

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no बहुंba·huṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ होति।ho·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno bahuṁ cīvaraṁ uppannaṁ hoti.

     On one occasion a monk who had been given much robe-cloth

994. 994

     सोso चca तंtaṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ मातापितूनंmā·tā·pi·tū·naṃ दातुकामोdā·tu·kā·mo होति।ho·ti

     So ca taṁ cīvaraṁ mātāpitūnaṁ dātukāmo hoti.

     wanted to give it to his mother and father.

995. 995

     भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

     Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

     (Pāli only)

996. 996

     “मातापितरोतिmā·tā·pi·ta·ro·ti खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve ददमानेda·da·mā·ne किंkiṃ वदेय्याम?va·dey·yā·ma

     “Mātāpitaroti kho, bhikkhave, dadamāne kiṁ vadeyyāma?

     “If you’re giving to your mother and father, what can I say?

997. 997

     अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मातापितूनंmā·tā·pi·tū·naṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

     Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, mātāpitūnaṁ dātuṁ.

     I allow you to give to your mother and father.

998. 998

     नna च,ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सद्धादेय्यंsad·dhā·dey·yaṃ विनिपातेतब्बं।vi·ni·pā·te·tab·baṃ

     Na ca, bhikkhave, saddhādeyyaṁ vinipātetabbaṁ.

     But, monks, a gift of faith shouldn’t be ruined.

999. 999

     योyo विनिपातेय्य,vi·ni·pā·tey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

     Yo vinipāteyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

     If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”

1000. 1000

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu अन्धवनेan·dha·va·ne चीवरंcī·va·raṃ निक्खिपित्वाnik·khi·pit·vā सन्तरुत्तरेनsan·ta·rut·ta·re·na गामंgā·maṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसि।pā·vi·si

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu andhavane cīvaraṁ nikkhipitvā santaruttarena gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

      On one occasion a monk left one of his robes in the Blind Men’s Grove and then entered the village for alms in just his sarong and upper robe.

1001. 1001

      चोराco·rā तंtaṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ अवहरिंसु।a·va·ha·riṃ·su

      Corā taṁ cīvaraṁ avahariṁsu.

      Thieves stole that robe,

1002. 1002

      सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu दुच्चोळोduc·co·ḷo होतिho·ti लूखचीवरो।lū·kha·cī·va·ro

      So bhikkhu duccoḷo hoti lūkhacīvaro.

      and as a result he became poorly dressed.

1003. 1003

      भिक्खूbhik·khū एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

      Bhikkhū evamāhaṁsu—

      When other monks asked him why,

1004. 1004

      “किस्सkis·sa त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so दुच्चोळोduc·co·ḷo लूखचीवरोसी”ति?lū·kha·cī·va·ro·sī

      “kissa tvaṁ, āvuso, duccoḷo lūkhacīvarosī”ti?

      (Pāli only)

1005. 1005

      “इधाहं,i·dhā·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अन्धवनेan·dha·va·ne चीवरंcī·va·raṃ निक्खिपित्वाnik·khi·pit·vā सन्तरुत्तरेनsan·ta·rut·ta·re·na गामंgā·maṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसिं।pā·vi·siṃ

      “Idhāhaṁ, āvuso, andhavane cīvaraṁ nikkhipitvā santaruttarena gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisiṁ.

      he told them what had happened.

1006. 1006

      चोराco·rā तंtaṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ अवहरिंसु।a·va·ha·riṃ·su

      Corā taṁ cīvaraṁ avahariṁsu.

      (Pāli only)

1007. 1007

      तेनाहंte·nā·haṃ दुच्चोळोduc·co·ḷo लूखचीवरो”ति।lū·kha·cī·va·ro

      Tenāhaṁ duccoḷo lūkhacīvaro”ti.

      (Pāli only)

1008. 1008

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1009. 1009

      “न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सन्तरुत्तरेनsan·ta·rut·ta·re·na गामोgā·mo पविसितब्बो।pa·vi·si·tab·bo

      “Na, bhikkhave, santaruttarena gāmo pavisitabbo.

      “You shouldn’t enter a village in just your sarong and upper robe.

1010. 1010

      योyo पविसेय्य,pa·vi·sey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

      Yo paviseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

      If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”

1011. 1011

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do अस्सतियाas·sa·ti·yā सन्तरुत्तरेनsan·ta·rut·ta·re·na गामंgā·maṃ पिण्डायpiṇ·ḍā·ya पाविसि।pā·vi·si

      Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā ānando assatiyā santaruttarena gāmaṁ piṇḍāya pāvisi.

      Soon afterwards Venerable Ānanda, being absentminded, entered a village in just his sarong and upper robe.

1012. 1012

      भिक्खूbhik·khū आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

      Bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ etadavocuṁ—

      The monks said to him,

1013. 1013

      “ननु,na·nu आवुसोā·vu·so आनन्द,ā·nan·da भगवताbha·ga·va·tā पञ्ञत्तं—pañ·ñat·taṃ

      “nanu, āvuso ānanda, bhagavatā paññattaṁ—

      “Hasn’t the Buddha laid down a rule against entering the village in just a sarong and an upper robe?”

1014. 1014

      ‘नna सन्तरुत्तरेनsan·ta·rut·ta·re·na गामोgā·mo पविसितब्बो’ति?pa·vi·si·tab·bo

      ‘na santaruttarena gāmo pavisitabbo’ti?

      (Pāli only)

1015. 1015

      किस्सkis·sa त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसोā·vu·so आनन्द,ā·nan·da सन्तरुत्तरेनsan·ta·rut·ta·re·na गामंgā·maṃ पविट्ठो”ति?pa·viṭ·ṭho

      Kissa tvaṁ, āvuso ānanda, santaruttarena gāmaṁ paviṭṭho”ti?

      (Pāli only)

1016. 1016

      “सच्चं,sac·caṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भगवताbha·ga·va·tā पञ्ञत्तं—pañ·ñat·taṃ

      “Saccaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā paññattaṁ—

      Ānanda told them what had happened.

1017. 1017

      ‘नna सन्तरुत्तरेनsan·ta·rut·ta·re·na गामोgā·mo पविसितब्बो’ति।pa·vi·si·tab·bo

      ‘na santaruttarena gāmo pavisitabbo’ti.

      (Pāli only)

1018. 1018

      अपिa·pi चाहंcā·haṃ अस्सतियाas·sa·ti·yā पविट्ठो”ति।pa·viṭ·ṭho

      Api cāhaṁ assatiyā paviṭṭho”ti.

      (Pāli only)

1019. 1019

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      They told the Buddha.

1020. 1020

      “पञ्चिमे,pañ·ci·me भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पच्चयाpac·ca·yā सङ्घाटियाsaṅ·ghā·ṭi·yā निक्खेपाय—nik·khe·pā·ya

      “Pañcime, bhikkhave, paccayā saṅghāṭiyā nikkhepāya—

      “There are five reasons for leaving behind the outer robe, the upper robe, or the sarong:

1021. 1021

      गिलानोgi·lā·no वाvā होति,ho·ti वस्सिकसङ्केतंvas·si·ka·saṅ·ke·taṃ वाvā होति,ho·ti नदीपारंna·dī·pā·raṃ गन्तुंgan·tuṃ वाvā होति,ho·ti अग्गळगुत्तिविहारोag·ga·ḷa·gut·ti·vi·hā·ro वाvā होति,ho·ti अत्थतकथिनंat·tha·ta·ka·thi·naṃ वाvā होति।ho·ti

      gilāno vā hoti, vassikasaṅketaṁ vā hoti, nadīpāraṁ gantuṁ vā hoti, aggaḷaguttivihāro vā hoti, atthatakathinaṁ vā hoti.

      you’re sick; it’s the rainy season; you’re going to cross a river; the dwelling is protected by a door; you have participated in the robe-making ceremony.

1022. 1022

      इमेi·me खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चpañ·ca पच्चयाpac·ca·yā सङ्घाटियाsaṅ·ghā·ṭi·yā निक्खेपाय।nik·khe·pā·ya

      Ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca paccayā saṅghāṭiyā nikkhepāya.

      (Pāli only)

1023. 1023

      पञ्चिमे,pañ·ci·me भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पच्चयाpac·ca·yā उत्तरासङ्गस्सut·ta·rā·saṅ·gas·sa निक्खेपायnik·khe·pā·ya …पे…pe

      Pañcime, bhikkhave, paccayā uttarāsaṅgassa nikkhepāya …pe…

      (Pāli only)

1024. 1024

      अन्तरवासकस्सan·ta·ra·vā·sa·kas·sa निक्खेपाय—nik·khe·pā·ya

      antaravāsakassa nikkhepāya—

      (Pāli only)

1025. 1025

      गिलानोgi·lā·no वाvā होति,ho·ti वस्सिकसङ्केतंvas·si·ka·saṅ·ke·taṃ वाvā होति,ho·ti नदीपारंna·dī·pā·raṃ गन्तुंgan·tuṃ वाvā होति,ho·ti अग्गळगुत्तिविहारोag·ga·ḷa·gut·ti·vi·hā·ro वाvā होति,ho·ti अत्थतकथिनंat·tha·ta·ka·thi·naṃ वाvā होति।ho·ti

      gilāno vā hoti, vassikasaṅketaṁ vā hoti, nadīpāraṁ gantuṁ vā hoti, aggaḷaguttivihāro vā hoti, atthatakathinaṁ vā hoti.

      (Pāli only)

1026. 1026

      इमेi·me खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चpañ·ca पच्चयाpac·ca·yā उत्तरासङ्गस्सut·ta·rā·saṅ·gas·sa अन्तरवासकस्सan·ta·ra·vā·sa·kas·sa निक्खेपाय।nik·khe·pā·ya

      Ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca paccayā uttarāsaṅgassa antaravāsakassa nikkhepāya.

      (Pāli only)

1027. 1027

      पञ्चिमे,pañ·ci·me भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पच्चयाpac·ca·yā वस्सिकसाटिकायvas·si·ka·sā·ṭi·kā·ya निक्खेपाय—nik·khe·pā·ya

      Pañcime, bhikkhave, paccayā vassikasāṭikāya nikkhepāya—

      There are five reasons for leaving behind the rainy-season robe:

1028. 1028

      गिलानोgi·lā·no वाvā होति,ho·ti निस्सीमंnis·sī·maṃ गन्तुंgan·tuṃ वाvā होति,ho·ti नदीपारंna·dī·pā·raṃ गन्तुंgan·tuṃ वाvā होति,ho·ti अग्गळगुत्तिविहारोag·ga·ḷa·gut·ti·vi·hā·ro वाvā होति,ho·ti वस्सिकसाटिकाvas·si·ka·sā·ṭi·kā अकताa·ka·tā वाvā होतिho·ti विप्पकताvip·pa·ka·tā वा।vā

      gilāno vā hoti, nissīmaṁ gantuṁ vā hoti, nadīpāraṁ gantuṁ vā hoti, aggaḷaguttivihāro vā hoti, vassikasāṭikā akatā vā hoti vippakatā vā.

      you’re sick; you’re going outside the monastery zone; you’re going to cross a river; the dwelling is protected by a door; the rainy-season robe hasn’t been sewn or is unfinished.”

1029. 1029

      इमेi·me खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चpañ·ca पच्चयाpac·ca·yā वस्सिकसाटिकायvas·si·ka·sā·ṭi·kā·ya निक्खेपाया”ति।nik·khe·pā·yā

      Ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca paccayā vassikasāṭikāya nikkhepāyā”ti.

      (Pāli only)

1030. 1030

      21। सङ्घिकचीवरुप्पादकथाsaṅ·ghi·ka·cī·va·rup·pā·da·ka·thā

      21. Saṅghikacīvaruppādakathā

      21. Discussion of robe-cloth given to the Sangha

1031. 1031

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu एकोe·ko वस्संvas·saṃ वसि।va·si

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu eko vassaṁ vasi.

      At that time a certain monk had spent the rainy season by himself.

1032. 1032

      तत्थtat·tha मनुस्साma·nus·sā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देमातिde·mā·ti चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni अदंसु।a·daṃ·su

      Tattha manussā saṅghassa demāti cīvarāni adaṁsu.

      People gave him robe-cloth, intending it for the Sangha.

1033. 1033

      अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

      Atha kho tassa bhikkhuno etadahosi—

      He thought,

1034. 1034

      “भगवताbha·ga·va·tā पञ्ञत्तं—pañ·ñat·taṃ

      “bhagavatā paññattaṁ—

      “The Buddha has laid down

1035. 1035

      ‘चतुवग्गोca·tu·vag·go पच्छिमोpac·chi·mo सङ्घो’ति।saṅ·gho

      ‘catuvaggo pacchimo saṅgho’ti.

      that a sangha consists of a group of at least four,

1036. 1036

      अहञ्चम्हिa·hañ·cam·hi एकको।e·ka·ko

      Ahañcamhi ekako.

      but I’m here by myself.

1037. 1037

      इमेi·me चca मनुस्साma·nus·sā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देमातिde·mā·ti चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni अदंसु।a·daṃ·su

      Ime ca manussā saṅghassa demāti cīvarāni adaṁsu.

      Now these people have given robe-cloth, intending it for the Sangha.

1038. 1038

      यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ इमानिi·mā·ni सङ्घिकानिsaṅ·ghi·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ हरेय्यन्”ति।ha·rey·yan

      Yannūnāhaṁ imāni saṅghikāni cīvarāni sāvatthiṁ hareyyan”ti.

      Let me take it to Sāvatthī.”

1039. 1039

      अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तानिtā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni आदायā·dā·ya सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

      Atha kho so bhikkhu tāni cīvarāni ādāya sāvatthiṁ gantvā bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

      He then took that robe-cloth to Sāvatthī and told the Buddha what had happened.

1040. 1040

      “तुय्हेव,tuy·he·va भिक्खु,bhik·khu तानिtā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni यावyā·va कथिनस्सka·thi·nas·sa उब्भाराया”ति।ub·bhā·rā·yā

      “Tuyheva, bhikkhu, tāni cīvarāni yāva kathinassa ubbhārāyā”ti.

      The Buddha said, “This robe-cloth is yours until the end of the robe season.

1041. 1041

      “इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu एकोe·ko वस्संvas·saṃ वसति।va·sa·ti

      “Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu eko vassaṁ vasati.

      It may be that a monk spends the rainy season by himself,

1042. 1042

      तत्थtat·tha मनुस्सा—ma·nus·sā

      Tattha manussā—

      yet people give him robe-cloth,

1043. 1043

      ‘सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देमा’तिde·mā चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni देन्ति।den·ti

      ‘saṅghassa demā’ti cīvarāni denti.

      intending it for the Sangha.

1044. 1044

      अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सेवtas·se·va तानिtā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni यावyā·va कथिनस्सka·thi·nas·sa उब्भाराया”ति।ub·bhā·rā·yā

      Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tasseva tāni cīvarāni yāva kathinassa ubbhārāyā”ti.

      That robe-cloth is his until the end of the robe season.”

1045. 1045

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu उतुकालंu·tu·kā·laṃ एकोe·ko वसि।va·si

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu utukālaṁ eko vasi.

      At one time a certain monk was living by himself outside the rainy season.

1046. 1046

      तत्थtat·tha मनुस्साma·nus·sā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देमातिde·mā·ti चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni अदंसु।a·daṃ·su

      Tattha manussā saṅghassa demāti cīvarāni adaṁsu.

      People gave him robe-cloth, intending it for the Sangha.

1047. 1047

      अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

      Atha kho tassa bhikkhuno etadahosi—

      He thought,

1048. 1048

      “भगवताbha·ga·va·tā पञ्ञत्तं—pañ·ñat·taṃ

      “bhagavatā paññattaṁ—

      “The Buddha has laid down

1049. 1049

      ‘चतुवग्गोca·tu·vag·go पच्छिमोpac·chi·mo सङ्घो’ति।saṅ·gho

      ‘catuvaggo pacchimo saṅgho’ti.

      that a sangha consists of a group of at least four,

1050. 1050

      अहञ्चम्हिa·hañ·cam·hi एकको।e·ka·ko

      Ahañcamhi ekako.

      but I’m here by myself.

1051. 1051

      इमेi·me चca मनुस्सा—ma·nus·sā

      Ime ca manussā—

      Now these people have given robe-cloth,

1052. 1052

      ‘सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देमा’तिde·mā चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni अदंसु।a·daṃ·su

      ‘saṅghassa demā’ti cīvarāni adaṁsu.

      intending it for the Sangha.

1053. 1053

      यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ इमानिi·mā·ni सङ्घिकानिsaṅ·ghi·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ हरेय्यन्”ति।ha·rey·yan

      Yannūnāhaṁ imāni saṅghikāni cīvarāni sāvatthiṁ hareyyan”ti.

      Let me take it to Sāvatthī.”

1054. 1054

      अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तानिtā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni आदायā·dā·ya सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसि।ā·ro·ce·si

      Atha kho so bhikkhu tāni cīvarāni ādāya sāvatthiṁ gantvā bhikkhūnaṁ etamatthaṁ ārocesi.

      He then took that robe-cloth to Sāvatthī and told the monks,

1055. 1055

      भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      who in turn told the Buddha.

1056. 1056

      “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मुखीभूतेनsam·mu·khī·bhū·te·na सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na भाजेतुं।bhā·je·tuṃ

      “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sammukhībhūtena saṅghena bhājetuṁ.

      He said, “The present Sangha should distribute it.

1057. 1057

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu उतुकालंu·tu·kā·laṃ एकोe·ko वसति।va·sa·ti तत्थtat·tha मनुस्सा—‘सङ्घस्सma·nus·sā देमा’तिde·mā चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni देन्ति।den·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu utukālaṁ eko vasati. Tattha manussā—‘saṅghassa demā’ti cīvarāni denti.

      It may be that a monk is living by himself outside the rainy season, yet people give him robe-cloth, intending it for the Sangha.

1058. 1058

      अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेनte·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā तानिtā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni अधिट्ठातुं—‘मय्हिमानिa·dhiṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ चीवरानी’ति।cī·va·rā·nī

      Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tena bhikkhunā tāni cīvarāni adhiṭṭhātuṁ—‘mayhimāni cīvarānī’ti.

      I allow that monk to determine that robe-cloth as his.

1059. 1059

      तस्सtas·sa चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तंtaṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ अनधिट्ठितेa·na·dhiṭ·ṭhi·te अञ्ञोañ·ño भिक्खुbhik·khu आगच्छति,ā·gac·cha·ti समकोsa·ma·ko दातब्बोdā·tab·bo भागो।bhā·go

      Tassa ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno taṁ cīvaraṁ anadhiṭṭhite añño bhikkhu āgacchati, samako dātabbo bhāgo.

      But if another monk arrives before he has determined that robe-cloth, then he should be given an equal share.

1060. 1060

      तेहिte·hi चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi तंtaṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ भाजियमाने,bhā·ji·ya·mā·ne अपातितेa·pā·ti·te कुसे,ku·se अञ्ञोañ·ño भिक्खुbhik·khu आगच्छति,ā·gac·cha·ti समकोsa·ma·ko दातब्बोdā·tab·bo भागो।bhā·go

      Tehi ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi taṁ cīvaraṁ bhājiyamāne, apātite kuse, añño bhikkhu āgacchati, samako dātabbo bhāgo.

      If yet another monk arrives before they’ve distributed that robe-cloth by drawing lots, he too should be given an equal share.

1061. 1061

      तेहिte·hi चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi तंtaṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ भाजियमाने,bhā·ji·ya·mā·ne पातितेpā·ti·te कुसे,ku·se अञ्ञोañ·ño भिक्खुbhik·khu आगच्छति,ā·gac·cha·ti नाकामाnā·kā·mā दातब्बोdā·tab·bo भागो”ति।bhā·go

      Tehi ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi taṁ cīvaraṁ bhājiyamāne, pātite kuse, añño bhikkhu āgacchati, nākāmā dātabbo bhāgo”ti.

      If still another monk arrives, but after they’ve distributed that robe-cloth by drawing lots, they don’t need to give him a share if they’re unwilling.”

1062. 1062

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na द्वेdve भातिकाbhā·ti·kā थेरा,the·rā आयस्माā·yas·mā चca इसिदासोi·si·dā·so आयस्माā·yas·mā चca इसिभटो,i·si·bha·ṭo सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ वस्संवुट्ठाvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ गामकावासंgā·ma·kā·vā·saṃ अगमंसु।a·ga·maṃ·su

      Tena kho pana samayena dve bhātikā therā, āyasmā ca isidāso āyasmā ca isibhaṭo, sāvatthiyaṁ vassaṁvuṭṭhā aññataraṁ gāmakāvāsaṁ agamaṁsu.

      On one occasion, after completing the rainy-season residence at Sāvatthī, two senior monks who were brothers, Venerable Isidāsa and Venerable Isibhaṭa, went to a certain village monastery.

1063. 1063

      मनुस्सा—“चिरस्सापिma·nus·sā थेराthe·rā आगता”ति—सचीवरानिā·ga·tā भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni अदंसु।a·daṃ·su

      Manussā—“cirassāpi therā āgatā”ti—sacīvarāni bhattāni adaṁsu.

      Because it was a long time since they had been there, people gave meals together with robe-cloth.

1064. 1064

      आवासिकाā·vā·si·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū थेरेthe·re पुच्छिंसु—“इमानि,puc·chiṃ·su भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घिकानिsaṅ·ghi·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni थेरेthe·re आगम्मā·gam·ma उप्पन्नानि,up·pan·nā·ni सादियिस्सन्तिsā·di·yis·san·ti थेराthe·rā भागन्”ति।bhā·gan

      Āvāsikā bhikkhū there pucchiṁsu—“imāni, bhante, saṅghikāni cīvarāni there āgamma uppannāni, sādiyissanti therā bhāgan”ti.

      The resident monks asked them, “Venerables, this robe-cloth belonging to the Sangha was given because of you. Will you accept a share?”

1065. 1065

      थेराthe·rā एवमाहंसु—“यथाe·va·mā·haṃ·su खोkho मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मंdham·maṃ देसितंde·si·taṃ आजानाम,ā·jā·nā·ma तुम्हाकंयेवtum·hā·kaṃ·ye·va तानिtā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni यावyā·va कथिनस्सka·thi·nas·sa उब्भाराया”ति।ub·bhā·rā·yā

      Therā evamāhaṁsu—“yathā kho mayaṁ, āvuso, bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāma, tumhākaṁyeva tāni cīvarāni yāva kathinassa ubbhārāyā”ti.

      They replied, “As we understand the Teaching of the Buddha, this robe-cloth is just for you until the end of the robe season.”

1066. 1066

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na तयोta·yo भिक्खूbhik·khū राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he वस्संvas·saṃ वसन्ति।va·san·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena tayo bhikkhū rājagahe vassaṁ vasanti.

      At that time there were three monks who were spending the rains residence at Rājagaha.

1067. 1067

      तत्थtat·tha मनुस्साma·nus·sā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देमातिde·mā·ti चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni देन्ति।den·ti

      Tattha manussā saṅghassa demāti cīvarāni denti.

      People gave them robe-cloth, intending it for the Sangha.

1068. 1068

      अथa·tha खोkho तेसंte·saṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—“भगवताe·ta·da·ho·si पञ्ञत्तं—‘चतुवग्गोpañ·ñat·taṃ पच्छिमोpac·chi·mo सङ्घो’ति।saṅ·gho मयञ्चम्हाma·yañ·cam·hā तयोta·yo जना।ja·nā

      Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—“bhagavatā paññattaṁ—‘catuvaggo pacchimo saṅgho’ti. Mayañcamhā tayo janā.

      The monks considered, “The Buddha has laid down that a sangha consists of a group of at least four, but we’re just three.

1069. 1069

      इमेi·me चca मनुस्साma·nus·sā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देमातिde·mā·ti चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni देन्ति।den·ti

      Ime ca manussā saṅghassa demāti cīvarāni denti.

      Now these people have given robe-cloth, intending it for the Sangha.

1070. 1070

      कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खोkho अम्हेहिam·he·hi पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

      Kathaṁ nu kho amhehi paṭipajjitabban”ti?

      What should we do?”

1071. 1071

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā थेरा,the·rā आयस्माā·yas·mā चca निलवासीni·la·vā·sī आयस्माā·yas·mā चca साणवासीsā·ṇa·vā·sī आयस्माā·yas·mā चca गोतकोgo·ta·ko आयस्माā·yas·mā चca भगुbha·gu आयस्माā·yas·mā चca फळिकसन्तानो,pha·ḷi·ka·san·tā·no पाटलिपुत्तेpā·ṭa·li·put·te विहरन्तिvi·ha·ran·ti कुक्कुटारामे।kuk·ku·ṭā·rā·me

      Tena kho pana samayena sambahulā therā, āyasmā ca nilavāsī āyasmā ca sāṇavāsī āyasmā ca gotako āyasmā ca bhagu āyasmā ca phaḷikasantāno, pāṭaliputte viharanti kukkuṭārāme.

      On that occasion there were a number of senior monks—Venerable Nilavāsī, Venerable Sāṇavāsī, Venerable Gotaka, Venerable Bhagu, and Venerable Phaḷikasantāna—staying at Pāṭaliputta in the Kukkuṭa Monastery.

1072. 1072

      अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū पाटलिपुत्तंpā·ṭa·li·put·taṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā थेरेthe·re पुच्छिंसु।puc·chiṃ·su

      Atha kho te bhikkhū pāṭaliputtaṁ gantvā there pucchiṁsu.

      The monks from Rājagaha went to Pāṭaliputta to ask them.

1073. 1073

      थेराthe·rā एवमाहंसु—e·va·mā·haṃ·su

      Therā evamāhaṁsu—

      They replied,

1074. 1074

      “यथाya·thā खोkho मयंma·yaṃ आवुसोā·vu·so भगवताbha·ga·va·tā धम्मंdham·maṃ देसितंde·si·taṃ आजानाम,ā·jā·nā·ma तुम्हाकंयेवtum·hā·kaṃ·ye·va तानिtā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni यावyā·va कथिनस्सka·thi·nas·sa उब्भाराया”ति।ub·bhā·rā·yā

      “yathā kho mayaṁ āvuso bhagavatā dhammaṁ desitaṁ ājānāma, tumhākaṁyeva tāni cīvarāni yāva kathinassa ubbhārāyā”ti.

      “As we understand the Teaching of the Buddha, that robe-cloth is just for you until the end of the robe season.”

1075. 1075

      22। उपनन्दसक्यपुत्तवत्थुu·pa·nan·da·sak·ya·put·ta·vat·thu

      22. Upanandasakyaputtavatthu

      22. Upananda the Sakyan

1076. 1076

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā उपनन्दोu·pa·nan·do सक्यपुत्तोsak·ya·put·to सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ गामकावासंgā·ma·kā·vā·saṃ अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

      Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā upanando sakyaputto sāvatthiyaṁ vassaṁvuṭṭho aññataraṁ gāmakāvāsaṁ agamāsi.

      At one time, after completing the rainy-season residence at Sāvatthī, Venerable Upananda the Sakyan went to a certain village monastery.

1077. 1077

      तत्थtat·tha चca भिक्खूbhik·khū चीवरंcī·va·raṃ भाजेतुकामाbhā·je·tu·kā·mā सन्निपतिंसु।san·ni·pa·tiṃ·su

      Tattha ca bhikkhū cīvaraṁ bhājetukāmā sannipatiṁsu.

      Just then the monks there had gathered to distribute the robe-cloth.

1078. 1078

      तेte एवमाहंसु—“इमानिe·va·mā·haṃ·su खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so सङ्घिकानिsaṅ·ghi·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni भाजियिस्सन्ति,bhā·ji·yis·san·ti सादियिस्ससिsā·di·yis·sa·si भागन्”ति?bhā·gan

      Te evamāhaṁsu—“imāni kho, āvuso, saṅghikāni cīvarāni bhājiyissanti, sādiyissasi bhāgan”ti?

      They said to Upananda, “We’re distributing the Sangha’s robe-cloth. Would you like a share?”

1079. 1079

      “आमावुसो,ā·mā·vu·so सादियिस्सामी”ति।sā·di·yis·sā·mī

      “Āmāvuso, sādiyissāmī”ti.

      “Yes, I would.”

1080. 1080

      ततोta·to चीवरभागंcī·va·ra·bhā·gaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ आवासंā·vā·saṃ अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

      Tato cīvarabhāgaṁ gahetvā aññaṁ āvāsaṁ agamāsi.

      He then took that share of robe-cloth and went to another monastery.

1081. 1081

      तत्थपिtat·tha·pi भिक्खूbhik·khū चीवरंcī·va·raṃ भाजेतुकामाbhā·je·tu·kā·mā सन्निपतिंसु।san·ni·pa·tiṃ·su

      Tatthapi bhikkhū cīvaraṁ bhājetukāmā sannipatiṁsu.

      There, too, the monks had gathered to distribute the robe-cloth.

1082. 1082

      तेपिte·pi एवमाहंसु—“इमानिe·va·mā·haṃ·su खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so सङ्घिकानिsaṅ·ghi·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni भाजियिस्सन्ति,bhā·ji·yis·san·ti सादियिस्ससिsā·di·yis·sa·si भागन्”ति?bhā·gan

      Tepi evamāhaṁsu—“imāni kho, āvuso, saṅghikāni cīvarāni bhājiyissanti, sādiyissasi bhāgan”ti?

      They said to Upananda, “We’re distributing the Sangha’s robe-cloth. Would you like a share?”

1083. 1083

      “आमावुसो,ā·mā·vu·so सादियिस्सामी”ति।sā·di·yis·sā·mī

      “Āmāvuso, sādiyissāmī”ti.

      “Yes, I would.”

1084. 1084

      ततोपिta·to·pi चीवरभागंcī·va·ra·bhā·gaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ आवासंā·vā·saṃ अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

      Tatopi cīvarabhāgaṁ gahetvā aññaṁ āvāsaṁ agamāsi.

      He then took that share, too, and went to yet another monastery.

1085. 1085

      तत्थपिtat·tha·pi भिक्खूbhik·khū चीवरंcī·va·raṃ भाजेतुकामाbhā·je·tu·kā·mā सन्निपतिंसु।san·ni·pa·tiṃ·su

      Tatthapi bhikkhū cīvaraṁ bhājetukāmā sannipatiṁsu.

      There, too, the monks had gathered to distribute the robe-cloth.

1086. 1086

      तेपिte·pi एवमाहंसु—“इमानिe·va·mā·haṃ·su खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so सङ्घिकानिsaṅ·ghi·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni भाजियिस्सन्ति,bhā·ji·yis·san·ti सादियिस्ससिsā·di·yis·sa·si भागन्”ति?bhā·gan

      Tepi evamāhaṁsu—“imāni kho, āvuso, saṅghikāni cīvarāni bhājiyissanti, sādiyissasi bhāgan”ti?

      They said to Upananda, “We’re distributing the Sangha’s robe-cloth. Would you like a share?”

1087. 1087

      “आमावुसो,ā·mā·vu·so सादियिस्सामी”ति।sā·di·yis·sā·mī

      “Āmāvuso, sādiyissāmī”ti.

      “Yes, I would.”

1088. 1088

      ततोपिta·to·pi चीवरभागंcī·va·ra·bhā·gaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā महन्तंma·han·taṃ चीवरभण्डिकंcī·va·ra·bhaṇ·ḍi·kaṃ आदायā·dā·ya पुनदेवpu·na·de·va सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ पच्चागञ्छि।pac·cā·gañ·chi

      Tatopi cīvarabhāgaṁ gahetvā mahantaṁ cīvarabhaṇḍikaṁ ādāya punadeva sāvatthiṁ paccāgañchi.

      He then took that share too, made a large bundle of robe-cloth, and returned to Sāvatthī.

1089. 1089

      भिक्खूbhik·khū एवमाहंसु—“महापुञ्ञोसिe·va·mā·haṃ·su त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसोā·vu·so उपनन्द,u·pa·nan·da बहुंba·huṃ तेte चीवरंcī·va·raṃ उप्पन्नन्”ति।up·pan·nan

      Bhikkhū evamāhaṁsu—“mahāpuññosi tvaṁ, āvuso upananda, bahuṁ te cīvaraṁ uppannan”ti.

      The monks said to him, “You have much merit, Upananda, as you’ve been given so much robe-cloth.”

1090. 1090

      “कुतोku·to मे,me आवुसो,ā·vu·so पुञ्ञं?puñ·ñaṃ

      “Kuto me, āvuso, puññaṁ?

      “This has nothing to do with merit.”

1091. 1091

      इधाहं,i·dhā·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ गामकावासंgā·ma·kā·vā·saṃ अगमासिं।a·ga·mā·siṃ

      Idhāhaṁ, āvuso, sāvatthiyaṁ vassaṁvuṭṭho aññataraṁ gāmakāvāsaṁ agamāsiṁ.

      And he told them how he had obtained so much robe-cloth.

1092. 1092

      तत्थtat·tha भिक्खूbhik·khū चीवरंcī·va·raṃ भाजेतुकामाbhā·je·tu·kā·mā सन्निपतिंसु।san·ni·pa·tiṃ·su

      Tattha bhikkhū cīvaraṁ bhājetukāmā sannipatiṁsu.

      (Pāli only)

1093. 1093

      तेte मंmaṃ एवमाहंसु—‘इमानिe·va·mā·haṃ·su खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so सङ्घिकानिsaṅ·ghi·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni भाजियिस्सन्ति,bhā·ji·yis·san·ti सादियिस्ससिsā·di·yis·sa·si भागन्’ति?bhā·gan

      Te maṁ evamāhaṁsu—‘imāni kho, āvuso, saṅghikāni cīvarāni bhājiyissanti, sādiyissasi bhāgan’ti?

      (Pāli only)

1094. 1094

      ‘आमावुसो,ā·mā·vu·so सादियिस्सामी’ति।sā·di·yis·sā·mī

      ‘Āmāvuso, sādiyissāmī’ti.

      (Pāli only)

1095. 1095

      ततोta·to चीवरभागंcī·va·ra·bhā·gaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ आवासंā·vā·saṃ अगमासिं।a·ga·mā·siṃ

      Tato cīvarabhāgaṁ gahetvā aññaṁ āvāsaṁ agamāsiṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1096. 1096

      तत्थपिtat·tha·pi भिक्खूbhik·khū चीवरंcī·va·raṃ भाजेतुकामाbhā·je·tu·kā·mā सन्निपतिंसु।san·ni·pa·tiṃ·su

      Tatthapi bhikkhū cīvaraṁ bhājetukāmā sannipatiṁsu.

      (Pāli only)

1097. 1097

      तेपिte·pi मंmaṃ एवमाहंसु—‘इमानिe·va·mā·haṃ·su खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so सङ्घिकानिsaṅ·ghi·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni भाजियिस्सन्ति,bhā·ji·yis·san·ti सादियिस्ससिsā·di·yis·sa·si भागन्’ति?bhā·gan

      Tepi maṁ evamāhaṁsu—‘imāni kho, āvuso, saṅghikāni cīvarāni bhājiyissanti, sādiyissasi bhāgan’ti?

      (Pāli only)

1098. 1098

      ‘आमावुसो,ā·mā·vu·so सादियिस्सामी’ति।sā·di·yis·sā·mī

      ‘Āmāvuso, sādiyissāmī’ti.

      (Pāli only)

1099. 1099

      ततोपिta·to·pi चीवरभागंcī·va·ra·bhā·gaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ आवासंā·vā·saṃ अगमासिं।a·ga·mā·siṃ

      Tatopi cīvarabhāgaṁ gahetvā aññaṁ āvāsaṁ agamāsiṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1100. 1100

      तत्थपिtat·tha·pi भिक्खूbhik·khū चीवरंcī·va·raṃ भाजेतुकामाbhā·je·tu·kā·mā सन्निपतिंसु।san·ni·pa·tiṃ·su

      Tatthapi bhikkhū cīvaraṁ bhājetukāmā sannipatiṁsu.

      (Pāli only)

1101. 1101

      तेपिte·pi मंmaṃ एवमाहंसु—‘इमानिe·va·mā·haṃ·su खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so सङ्घिकानिsaṅ·ghi·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni भाजियिस्सन्ति,bhā·ji·yis·san·ti सादियिस्ससिsā·di·yis·sa·si भागन्’ति?bhā·gan

      Tepi maṁ evamāhaṁsu—‘imāni kho, āvuso, saṅghikāni cīvarāni bhājiyissanti, sādiyissasi bhāgan’ti?

      (Pāli only)

1102. 1102

      ‘आमावुसो,ā·mā·vu·so सादियिस्सामी’ति।sā·di·yis·sā·mī

      ‘Āmāvuso, sādiyissāmī’ti.

      (Pāli only)

1103. 1103

      ततोपिta·to·pi चीवरभागंcī·va·ra·bhā·gaṃ अग्गहेसिं।ag·ga·he·siṃ

      Tatopi cīvarabhāgaṁ aggahesiṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1104. 1104

      एवंe·vaṃ मेme बहुंba·huṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ उप्पन्नन्”ति।up·pan·nan

      Evaṁ me bahuṁ cīvaraṁ uppannan”ti.

      (Pāli only)

1105. 1105

      “किंkiṃ पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसोā·vu·so उपनन्द,u·pa·nan·da अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra चीवरभागंcī·va·ra·bhā·gaṃ सादियी”ति?sā·di·yī

      “Kiṁ pana tvaṁ, āvuso upananda, aññatra vassaṁvuṭṭho aññatra cīvarabhāgaṁ sādiyī”ti?

      “So you spent the rains residence in one place and accepted a share of the robe-cloth from somewhere else?”

1106. 1106

      “एवमावुसो”ति।e·va·mā·vu·so

      “Evamāvuso”ti.

      “Yes.”

1107. 1107

      येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā …पे…pe तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

      Ye te bhikkhū appicchā …pe… te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

      The monks of few desires complained and criticized Upananda,

1108. 1108

      “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma आयस्माā·yas·mā उपनन्दोu·pa·nan·do सक्यपुत्तोsak·ya·put·to अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra चीवरभागंcī·va·ra·bhā·gaṃ सादियिस्सती”ति।sā·di·yis·sa·tī

      “kathañhi nāma āyasmā upanando sakyaputto aññatra vassaṁvuṭṭho aññatra cīvarabhāgaṁ sādiyissatī”ti.

      “How could Venerable Upananda spend the rains residence in one place and then accept a share of the robe-cloth from somewhere else?”

1109. 1109

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

      They told the Buddha. …

1110. 1110

      “सच्चंsac·caṃ किरki·ra त्वं,tvaṃ उपनन्द,u·pa·nan·da अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra चीवरभागंcī·va·ra·bhā·gaṃ सादियी”ति?sā·di·yī

      “saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, upananda, aññatra vassaṁvuṭṭho aññatra cīvarabhāgaṁ sādiyī”ti?

      “Is it true, Upananda, that you did this?”

1111. 1111

      “सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

      “Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti.

      “It’s true, sir.”

1112. 1112

      विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

      Vigarahi buddho bhagavā …pe…

      The Buddha rebuked him …

1113. 1113

      कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra चीवरभागंcī·va·ra·bhā·gaṃ सादियिस्ससि।sā·di·yis·sa·si

      kathañhi nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, aññatra vassaṁvuṭṭho aññatra cīvarabhāgaṁ sādiyissasi.

      “Foolish man, how could you spend the rains residence in one place and then accept a share of the robe-cloth from somewhere else?

1114. 1114

      नेतं,ne·taṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

      Netaṁ, moghapurisa, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

      This will affect people’s confidence …”

1115. 1115

      विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

      vigarahitvā …pe…

      After rebuking him …

1116. 1116

      धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

      dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

      he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

1117. 1117

      “न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra वस्संवुट्ठेनvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhe·na अञ्ञत्रañ·ñat·ra चीवरभागोcī·va·ra·bhā·go सादितब्बो।sā·di·tab·bo

      “na, bhikkhave, aññatra vassaṁvuṭṭhena aññatra cīvarabhāgo sāditabbo.

      “You shouldn’t spend the rainy-season residence in one place and then accept a share of the robe-cloth from somewhere else.

1118. 1118

      योyo सादियेय्य,sā·di·yey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

      Yo sādiyeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

      If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”

1119. 1119

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā उपनन्दोu·pa·nan·do सक्यपुत्तोsak·ya·put·to एकोe·ko द्वीसुdvī·su आवासेसुā·vā·se·su वस्संvas·saṃ वसि—“एवंva·si मेme बहुंba·huṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ उप्पज्जिस्सती”ति।up·paj·jis·sa·tī

      Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā upanando sakyaputto eko dvīsu āvāsesu vassaṁ vasi—“evaṁ me bahuṁ cīvaraṁ uppajjissatī”ti.

      At one time Venerable Upananda spent the rains residence in two separate monasteries, thinking, “In this way I’ll get much robe-cloth.”

1120. 1120

      अथa·tha खोkho तेसंte·saṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—“कथंe·ta·da·ho·si नुnu खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to उपनन्दस्सu·pa·nan·das·sa सक्यपुत्तस्सsak·ya·put·tas·sa चीवरपटिवीसोcī·va·ra·pa·ṭi·vī·so दातब्बो”ति?dā·tab·bo

      Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—“kathaṁ nu kho āyasmato upanandassa sakyaputtassa cīvarapaṭivīso dātabbo”ti?

      The monks thought, “What share of the robe-cloth should be given to Venerable Upananda?”

1121. 1121

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      They told the Buddha.

1122. 1122

      “देथ,de·tha भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मोघपुरिसस्सmo·gha·pu·ri·sas·sa एकाधिप्पायं।e·kā·dhip·pā·yaṃ

      “Detha, bhikkhave, moghapurisassa ekādhippāyaṁ.

      “Give the foolish man one person’s share.

1123. 1123

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu एकोe·ko द्वीसुdvī·su आवासेसुā·vā·se·su वस्संvas·saṃ वसति—‘एवंva·sa·ti मेme बहुंba·huṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ उप्पज्जिस्सती’ति।up·paj·jis·sa·tī

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu eko dvīsu āvāsesu vassaṁ vasati—‘evaṁ me bahuṁ cīvaraṁ uppajjissatī’ti.

      It may be that a monk spends the rains residence in two monasteries with the intention of getting much robe-cloth.

1124. 1124

      सचेsa·ce अमुत्रa·mut·ra उपड्ढंu·paḍ·ḍhaṃ अमुत्रa·mut·ra उपड्ढंu·paḍ·ḍhaṃ वसति,va·sa·ti अमुत्रa·mut·ra उपड्ढोu·paḍ·ḍho अमुत्रa·mut·ra उपड्ढोu·paḍ·ḍho चीवरपटिवीसोcī·va·ra·pa·ṭi·vī·so दातब्बो।dā·tab·bo

      Sace amutra upaḍḍhaṁ amutra upaḍḍhaṁ vasati, amutra upaḍḍho amutra upaḍḍho cīvarapaṭivīso dātabbo.

      If he spends half the time in each monastery, he should be given half a share of the robe-cloth in each.

1125. 1125

      यत्थyat·tha वाvā पनpa·na बहुतरंba·hu·ta·raṃ वसति,va·sa·ti ततोta·to चीवरपटिवीसोcī·va·ra·pa·ṭi·vī·so दातब्बो”ति।dā·tab·bo

      Yattha vā pana bahutaraṁ vasati, tato cīvarapaṭivīso dātabbo”ti.

      Otherwise he should be given his share of the robe-cloth in the monastery where he spends the most time.”

1126. 1126

      23। गिलानवत्थुकथाgi·lā·na·vat·thu·ka·thā

      23. Gilānavatthukathā

      23. The account of the one who was sick

1127. 1127

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no कुच्छिविकाराबाधोkuc·chi·vi·kā·rā·bā·dho होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno kucchivikārābādho hoti.

      On one occasion there was a monk who had dysentery

1128. 1128

      सोso सकेsa·ke मुत्तकरीसेmut·ta·ka·rī·se पलिपन्नोpa·li·pan·no सेति।se·ti

      So sake muttakarīse palipanno seti.

      and was lying in his own feces and urine.

1129. 1129

      अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā आनन्देनā·nan·de·na पच्छासमणेनpac·chā·sa·ma·ṇe·na सेनासनचारिकंse·nā·sa·na·cā·ri·kaṃ आहिण्डन्तोā·hiṇ·ḍan·to येनye·na तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no विहारोvi·hā·ro तेनुपसङ्कमि।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi

      Atha kho bhagavā āyasmatā ānandena pacchāsamaṇena senāsanacārikaṁ āhiṇḍanto yena tassa bhikkhuno vihāro tenupasaṅkami.

      Just then, as the Buddha was walking about the dwellings with Venerable Ānanda as his attendant, he came to the dwelling of this monk.

1130. 1130

      अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ सकेsa·ke मुत्तकरीसेmut·ta·ka·rī·se पलिपन्नंpa·li·pan·naṃ सयमानं,sa·ya·mā·naṃ दिस्वानdis·vā·na येनye·na सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      Addasā kho bhagavā taṁ bhikkhuṁ sake muttakarīse palipannaṁ sayamānaṁ, disvāna yena so bhikkhu tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavoca—

      When he saw his condition, he went up to him and said,

1131. 1131

      “किंkiṃ ते,te भिक्खु,bhik·khu आबाधो”ति?ā·bā·dho

      “kiṁ te, bhikkhu, ābādho”ti?

      “What’s your illness, monk?”

1132. 1132

      “कुच्छिविकारोkuc·chi·vi·kā·ro मे,me भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

      “Kucchivikāro me, bhagavā”ti.

      “I have dysentery, sir.”

1133. 1133

      “अत्थिat·thi पनpa·na ते,te भिक्खु,bhik·khu उपट्ठाको”ति?u·paṭ·ṭhā·ko

      “Atthi pana te, bhikkhu, upaṭṭhāko”ti?

      “But don’t you have a nurse?”

1134. 1134

      “नत्थि,nat·thi भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

      “Natthi, bhagavā”ti.

      “No.”

1135. 1135

      “किस्सkis·sa तंtaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū नna उपट्ठेन्ती”ति?u·paṭ·ṭhen·tī

      “Kissa taṁ bhikkhū na upaṭṭhentī”ti?

      “Why don’t the monks nurse you?”

1136. 1136

      “अहंa·haṃ खो,kho भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अकारको;a·kā·ra·ko

      “Ahaṁ kho, bhante, bhikkhūnaṁ akārako;

      “Because I don’t do anything for them.”

1137. 1137

      तेनte·na मंmaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū नna उपट्ठेन्ती”ति।u·paṭ·ṭhen·tī

      tena maṁ bhikkhū na upaṭṭhentī”ti.

      (Pāli only)

1138. 1138

      अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ आनन्दंā·nan·daṃ आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

      Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ ānandaṁ āmantesi—

      The Buddha said to Ānanda,

1139. 1139

      “गच्छानन्द,gac·chā·nan·da उदकंu·da·kaṃ आहर,ā·ha·ra इमंi·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ नहापेस्सामा”ति।na·hā·pes·sā·mā

      “gacchānanda, udakaṁ āhara, imaṁ bhikkhuṁ nahāpessāmā”ti.

      “Go and get some water, Ānanda. Let’s give him a wash.”

1140. 1140

      “एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पटिस्सुणित्वाpa·ṭis·su·ṇit·vā उदकंu·da·kaṃ आहरि।ā·ha·ri

      “Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā udakaṁ āhari.

      Saying, “Yes, sir,” he did just that.

1141. 1141

      भगवाbha·ga·vā उदकंu·da·kaṃ आसिञ्चि।ā·siñ·ci

      Bhagavā udakaṁ āsiñci.

      And so the Buddha poured the water,

1142. 1142

      आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do परिधोवि।pa·ri·dho·vi

      Āyasmā ānando paridhovi.

      while Ānanda cleaned him up.

1143. 1143

      भगवाbha·ga·vā सीसतोsī·sa·to अग्गहेसि।ag·ga·he·si

      Bhagavā sīsato aggahesi.

      Then, the Buddha lifting him by the head

1144. 1144

      आयस्माā·yas·mā आनन्दोā·nan·do पादतोpā·da·to उच्चारेत्वाuc·cā·ret·vā मञ्चकेmañ·ca·ke निपातेसुं।ni·pā·te·suṃ

      Āyasmā ānando pādato uccāretvā mañcake nipātesuṁ.

      and Ānanda by the feet, they lay him on a bed.

1145. 1145

      अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ सन्निपातापेत्वाsan·ni·pā·tā·pet·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū पटिपुच्छि—pa·ṭi·puc·chi

      Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe bhikkhusaṅghaṁ sannipātāpetvā bhikkhū paṭipucchi—

      Soon afterwards the Buddha had the Sangha gathered and questioned the monks:

1146. 1146

      “अत्थि,at·thi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अमुकस्मिंa·mu·kas·miṃ विहारेvi·hā·re भिक्खुbhik·khu गिलानो”ति?gi·lā·no

      “atthi, bhikkhave, amukasmiṁ vihāre bhikkhu gilāno”ti?

      “Is there a sick monk in that dwelling?”

1147. 1147

      “अत्थि,at·thi भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

      “Atthi, bhagavā”ti.

      “Yes, sir.”

1148. 1148

      “किंkiṃ तस्स,tas·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आबाधो”ति?ā·bā·dho

      “Kiṁ tassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno ābādho”ti?

      “What’s his illness?”

1149. 1149

      “तस्स,tas·sa भन्ते,bhan·te आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to कुच्छिविकाराबाधो”ति।kuc·chi·vi·kā·rā·bā·dho

      “Tassa, bhante, āyasmato kucchivikārābādho”ti.

      “He has dysentery.”

1150. 1150

      “अत्थिat·thi पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no उपट्ठाको”ति?u·paṭ·ṭhā·ko

      “Atthi pana, bhikkhave, tassa bhikkhuno upaṭṭhāko”ti?

      “Does he have a nurse?”

1151. 1151

      “नत्थि,nat·thi भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

      “Natthi, bhagavā”ti.

      “No.”

1152. 1152

      “किस्सkis·sa तंtaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū नna उपट्ठेन्ती”ति?u·paṭ·ṭhen·tī

      “Kissa taṁ bhikkhū na upaṭṭhentī”ti?

      “But why don’t you nurse him?”

1153. 1153

      “एसो,e·so भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अकारको;a·kā·ra·ko

      “Eso, bhante, bhikkhu bhikkhūnaṁ akārako;

      “Because he doesn’t do anything for us.”

1154. 1154

      तेनte·na तंtaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū नna उपट्ठेन्ती”ति।u·paṭ·ṭhen·tī

      tena taṁ bhikkhū na upaṭṭhentī”ti.

      (Pāli only)

1155. 1155

      “नत्थिnat·thi वो,vo भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve माता,mā·tā नत्थिnat·thi पिता,pi·tā येye वोvo उपट्ठहेय्युं।u·paṭ·ṭha·hey·yuṃ

      “Natthi vo, bhikkhave, mātā, natthi pitā, ye vo upaṭṭhaheyyuṁ.

      “Monks, you have no mother or father to nurse you.

1156. 1156

      तुम्हेtum·he चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ नna उपट्ठहिस्सथ,u·paṭ·ṭha·his·sa·tha अथa·tha कोko चरहिca·ra·hi उपट्ठहिस्सति?u·paṭ·ṭha·his·sa·ti

      Tumhe ce, bhikkhave, aññamaññaṁ na upaṭṭhahissatha, atha ko carahi upaṭṭhahissati?

      If you don’t nurse one another, who will?

1157. 1157

      यो,yo भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मंmaṃ उपट्ठहेय्यu·paṭ·ṭha·hey·ya सोso गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ उपट्ठहेय्य।u·paṭ·ṭha·hey·ya

      Yo, bhikkhave, maṁ upaṭṭhaheyya so gilānaṁ upaṭṭhaheyya.

      Whoever would nurse me should nurse one who is sick.

1158. 1158

      सचेsa·ce उपज्झायोu·paj·jhā·yo होति,ho·ti उपज्झायेनu·paj·jhā·ye·na यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ उपट्ठातब्बो;u·paṭ·ṭhā·tab·bo

      Sace upajjhāyo hoti, upajjhāyena yāvajīvaṁ upaṭṭhātabbo;

      If you have a preceptor, he should nurse you for life;

1159. 1159

      वुट्ठानमस्सvuṭ·ṭhā·na·mas·sa आगमेतब्बं।ā·ga·me·tab·baṃ

      vuṭṭhānamassa āgametabbaṁ.

      he shouldn’t go anywhere until you’ve recovered.

1160. 1160

      सचेsa·ce आचरियोā·ca·ri·yo होति,ho·ti आचरियेनā·ca·ri·ye·na यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ उपट्ठातब्बो;u·paṭ·ṭhā·tab·bo

      Sace ācariyo hoti, ācariyena yāvajīvaṁ upaṭṭhātabbo;

      If you have a teacher, he should nurse you for life;

1161. 1161

      वुट्ठानमस्सvuṭ·ṭhā·na·mas·sa आगमेतब्बं।ā·ga·me·tab·baṃ

      vuṭṭhānamassa āgametabbaṁ.

      he shouldn’t go anywhere until you’ve recovered.

1162. 1162

      सचेsa·ce सद्धिविहारिकोsad·dhi·vi·hā·ri·ko होति,ho·ti सद्धिविहारिकेनsad·dhi·vi·hā·ri·ke·na यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ उपट्ठातब्बो;u·paṭ·ṭhā·tab·bo

      Sace saddhivihāriko hoti, saddhivihārikena yāvajīvaṁ upaṭṭhātabbo;

      If you have a student, he should nurse you for life;

1163. 1163

      वुट्ठानमस्सvuṭ·ṭhā·na·mas·sa आगमेतब्बं।ā·ga·me·tab·baṃ

      vuṭṭhānamassa āgametabbaṁ.

      he shouldn’t go anywhere until you’ve recovered.

1164. 1164

      सचेsa·ce अन्तेवासिकोan·te·vā·si·ko होति,ho·ti अन्तेवासिकेनan·te·vā·si·ke·na यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ उपट्ठातब्बो;u·paṭ·ṭhā·tab·bo

      Sace antevāsiko hoti, antevāsikena yāvajīvaṁ upaṭṭhātabbo;

      If you have a pupil, he should nurse you for life;

1165. 1165

      वुट्ठानमस्सvuṭ·ṭhā·na·mas·sa आगमेतब्बं।ā·ga·me·tab·baṃ

      vuṭṭhānamassa āgametabbaṁ.

      he shouldn’t go anywhere until you’ve recovered.

1166. 1166

      सचेsa·ce समानुपज्झायकोsa·mā·nu·paj·jhā·ya·ko होति,ho·ti समानुपज्झायकेनsa·mā·nu·paj·jhā·ya·ke·na यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ उपट्ठातब्बो;u·paṭ·ṭhā·tab·bo

      Sace samānupajjhāyako hoti, samānupajjhāyakena yāvajīvaṁ upaṭṭhātabbo;

      If you have a co-student, he should nurse you for life;

1167. 1167

      वुट्ठानमस्सvuṭ·ṭhā·na·mas·sa आगमेतब्बं।ā·ga·me·tab·baṃ

      vuṭṭhānamassa āgametabbaṁ.

      he shouldn’t go anywhere until you’ve recovered.

1168. 1168

      सचेsa·ce समानाचरियकोsa·mā·nā·ca·ri·ya·ko होति,ho·ti समानाचरियकेनsa·mā·nā·ca·ri·ya·ke·na यावजीवंyā·va·jī·vaṃ उपट्ठातब्बो;u·paṭ·ṭhā·tab·bo

      Sace samānācariyako hoti, samānācariyakena yāvajīvaṁ upaṭṭhātabbo;

      If you have a co-pupil, he should nurse you for life;

1169. 1169

      वुट्ठानमस्सvuṭ·ṭhā·na·mas·sa आगमेतब्बं।ā·ga·me·tab·baṃ

      vuṭṭhānamassa āgametabbaṁ.

      he shouldn’t go anywhere until you’ve recovered.

1170. 1170

      सचेsa·ce नna होतिho·ti उपज्झायोu·paj·jhā·yo वाvā आचरियोā·ca·ri·yo वाvā सद्धिविहारिकोsad·dhi·vi·hā·ri·ko वाvā अन्तेवासिकोan·te·vā·si·ko वाvā समानुपज्झायकोsa·mā·nu·paj·jhā·ya·ko वाvā समानाचरियकोsa·mā·nā·ca·ri·ya·ko वाvā सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na उपट्ठातब्बो।u·paṭ·ṭhā·tab·bo

      Sace na hoti upajjhāyo vā ācariyo vā saddhivihāriko vā antevāsiko vā samānupajjhāyako vā samānācariyako vā saṅghena upaṭṭhātabbo.

      If you have none of these, the Sangha should nurse you.

1171. 1171

      नोno चेce उपट्ठहेय्य,u·paṭ·ṭha·hey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

      No ce upaṭṭhaheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

      If you don’t nurse one who is sick, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.

1172. 1172

      पञ्चहि,pañ·ca·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अङ्गेहिaṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to गिलानोgi·lā·no दूपट्ठोdū·paṭ·ṭho होति—ho·ti

      Pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato gilāno dūpaṭṭho hoti—

      “A sick person who has five qualities is hard to nurse:

1173. 1173

      असप्पायकारीa·sap·pā·ya·kā·rī होति,ho·ti सप्पायेsap·pā·ye मत्तंmat·taṃ नna जानाति,jā·nā·ti भेसज्जंbhe·saj·jaṃ नna पटिसेविताpa·ṭi·se·vi·tā होति,ho·ti अत्थकामस्सat·tha·kā·mas·sa गिलानुपट्ठाकस्सgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kas·sa यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ आबाधंā·bā·dhaṃ नाविकत्ताnā·vi·kat·tā होतिho·ti ‘अभिक्कमन्तंa·bhik·ka·man·taṃ वाvā अभिक्कमतीति,a·bhik·ka·ma·tī·ti पटिक्कमन्तंpa·ṭik·ka·man·taṃ वाvā पटिक्कमतीति,pa·ṭik·ka·ma·tī·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ वाvā ठितो’ति,ṭhi·to उप्पन्नानंup·pan·nā·naṃ सारीरिकानंsā·rī·ri·kā·naṃ वेदनानंve·da·nā·naṃ दुक्खानंduk·khā·naṃ तिब्बानंtib·bā·naṃ खरानंkha·rā·naṃ कटुकानंka·ṭu·kā·naṃ असातानंa·sā·tā·naṃ अमनापानंa·ma·nā·pā·naṃ पाणहरानंpā·ṇa·ha·rā·naṃ अनधिवासकजातिकोa·na·dhi·vā·sa·ka·jā·ti·ko होति।ho·ti

      asappāyakārī hoti, sappāye mattaṁ na jānāti, bhesajjaṁ na paṭisevitā hoti, atthakāmassa gilānupaṭṭhākassa yathābhūtaṁ ābādhaṁ nāvikattā hoti ‘abhikkamantaṁ vā abhikkamatīti, paṭikkamantaṁ vā paṭikkamatīti, ṭhitaṁ vā ṭhito’ti, uppannānaṁ sārīrikānaṁ vedanānaṁ dukkhānaṁ tibbānaṁ kharānaṁ kaṭukānaṁ asātānaṁ amanāpānaṁ pāṇaharānaṁ anadhivāsakajātiko hoti.

      they do what’s detrimental for curing the sickness; they don’t know the right amount in what’s beneficial; they don’t take their medicine; they don’t accurately describe the state of their illness—whether it’s getting worse, better, or remaining the same—to the one who’s nursing them and wishing them well; they’re unable to bear up with bodily feelings that are painful, severe, sharp, and life-threatening.

1174. 1174

      इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to गिलानोgi·lā·no दूपट्ठोdū·paṭ·ṭho होति।ho·ti

      Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgato gilāno dūpaṭṭho hoti.

      (Pāli only)

1175. 1175

      पञ्चहि,pañ·ca·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अङ्गेहिaṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to गिलानोgi·lā·no सूपट्ठोsū·paṭ·ṭho होति—ho·ti

      Pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato gilāno sūpaṭṭho hoti—

      A sick person who has five qualities is easy to nurse:

1176. 1176

      सप्पायकारीsap·pā·ya·kā·rī होति,ho·ti सप्पायेsap·pā·ye मत्तंmat·taṃ जानाति,jā·nā·ti भेसज्जंbhe·saj·jaṃ पटिसेविताpa·ṭi·se·vi·tā होति,ho·ti अत्थकामस्सat·tha·kā·mas·sa गिलानुपट्ठाकस्सgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kas·sa यथाभूतंya·thā·bhū·taṃ आबाधंā·bā·dhaṃ आविकत्ताā·vi·kat·tā होतिho·ti ‘अभिक्कमन्तंa·bhik·ka·man·taṃ वाvā अभिक्कमतीति,a·bhik·ka·ma·tī·ti पटिक्कमन्तंpa·ṭik·ka·man·taṃ वाvā पटिक्कमतीति,pa·ṭik·ka·ma·tī·ti ठितंṭhi·taṃ वाvā ठितो’ति,ṭhi·to उप्पन्नानंup·pan·nā·naṃ सारीरिकानंsā·rī·ri·kā·naṃ वेदनानंve·da·nā·naṃ दुक्खानंduk·khā·naṃ तिब्बानंtib·bā·naṃ खरानंkha·rā·naṃ कटुकानंka·ṭu·kā·naṃ असातानंa·sā·tā·naṃ अमनापानंa·ma·nā·pā·naṃ पाणहरानंpā·ṇa·ha·rā·naṃ अधिवासकजातिकोa·dhi·vā·sa·ka·jā·ti·ko होति।ho·ti

      sappāyakārī hoti, sappāye mattaṁ jānāti, bhesajjaṁ paṭisevitā hoti, atthakāmassa gilānupaṭṭhākassa yathābhūtaṁ ābādhaṁ āvikattā hoti ‘abhikkamantaṁ vā abhikkamatīti, paṭikkamantaṁ vā paṭikkamatīti, ṭhitaṁ vā ṭhito’ti, uppannānaṁ sārīrikānaṁ vedanānaṁ dukkhānaṁ tibbānaṁ kharānaṁ kaṭukānaṁ asātānaṁ amanāpānaṁ pāṇaharānaṁ adhivāsakajātiko hoti.

      they do what’s beneficial for curing the sickness; they know the right amount in what’s beneficial; they take their medicine; they accurately describe the state of their illness—whether it’s getting worse, better, or remaining the same—to the one who’s nursing them and wishing them well; they’re able to bear up with bodily feelings that are painful, severe, sharp, and life-threatening.

1177. 1177

      इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to गिलानोgi·lā·no सूपट्ठोsū·paṭ·ṭho होति।ho·ti

      Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgato gilāno sūpaṭṭho hoti.

      (Pāli only)

1178. 1178

      पञ्चहि,pañ·ca·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अङ्गेहिaṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to गिलानुपट्ठाकोgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ko नालंnā·laṃ गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ उपट्ठातुं—u·paṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ

      Pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato gilānupaṭṭhāko nālaṁ gilānaṁ upaṭṭhātuṁ—

      An attendant who has five qualities is unsuited to nurse the sick:

1179. 1179

      नna पटिबलोpa·ṭi·ba·lo होतिho·ti भेसज्जंbhe·saj·jaṃ संविधातुं,saṃ·vi·dhā·tuṃ सप्पायासप्पायंsap·pā·yā·sap·pā·yaṃ नna जानाति,jā·nā·ti असप्पायंa·sap·pā·yaṃ उपनामेतिu·pa·nā·me·ti सप्पायंsap·pā·yaṃ अपनामेति,a·pa·nā·me·ti आमिसन्तरोā·mi·san·ta·ro गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ उपट्ठातिu·paṭ·ṭhā·ti नोno मेत्तचित्तो,met·ta·cit·to जेगुच्छीje·guc·chī होतिho·ti उच्चारंuc·cā·raṃ वाvā पस्सावंpas·sā·vaṃ वाvā खेळंkhe·ḷaṃ वाvā वन्तंvan·taṃ वाvā नीहातुं,nī·hā·tuṃ नna पटिबलोpa·ṭi·ba·lo होतिho·ti गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ कालेनkā·le·na कालंkā·laṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेतुंsan·das·se·tuṃ समादपेतुंsa·mā·da·pe·tuṃ समुत्तेजेतुंsa·mut·te·je·tuṃ सम्पहंसेतुं।sam·pa·haṃ·se·tuṃ

      na paṭibalo hoti bhesajjaṁ saṁvidhātuṁ, sappāyāsappāyaṁ na jānāti, asappāyaṁ upanāmeti sappāyaṁ apanāmeti, āmisantaro gilānaṁ upaṭṭhāti no mettacitto, jegucchī hoti uccāraṁ vā passāvaṁ vā kheḷaṁ vā vantaṁ vā nīhātuṁ, na paṭibalo hoti gilānaṁ kālena kālaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetuṁ samādapetuṁ samuttejetuṁ sampahaṁsetuṁ.

      they’re incapable of preparing medicine; not knowing what’s beneficial and what’s harmful, they bring what’s harmful and remove what’s beneficial; they nurse the sick for the sake of worldly gain, not with a mind of good will; they’re disgusted at having to clean up feces, urine, spit, or vomit; they’re incapable of instructing, inspiring, and gladdening the sick person with a teaching from time to time.

1180. 1180

      इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to गिलानुपट्ठाकोgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ko नालंnā·laṃ गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ उपट्ठातुं।u·paṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ

      Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgato gilānupaṭṭhāko nālaṁ gilānaṁ upaṭṭhātuṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1181. 1181

      पञ्चहि,pañ·ca·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अङ्गेहिaṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to गिलानुपट्ठाकोgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ko अलंa·laṃ गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ उपट्ठातुं—u·paṭ·ṭhā·tuṃ

      Pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato gilānupaṭṭhāko alaṁ gilānaṁ upaṭṭhātuṁ—

      An attendant who has five qualities is suited to nurse the sick:

1182. 1182

      पटिबलोpa·ṭi·ba·lo होतिho·ti भेसज्जंbhe·saj·jaṃ संविधातुं,saṃ·vi·dhā·tuṃ सप्पायासप्पायंsap·pā·yā·sap·pā·yaṃ जानाति,jā·nā·ti असप्पायंa·sap·pā·yaṃ अपनामेतिa·pa·nā·me·ti सप्पायंsap·pā·yaṃ उपनामेति,u·pa·nā·me·ti मेत्तचित्तोmet·ta·cit·to गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ उपट्ठातिu·paṭ·ṭhā·ti नोno आमिसन्तरो,ā·mi·san·ta·ro अजेगुच्छीa·je·guc·chī होतिho·ti उच्चारंuc·cā·raṃ वाvā पस्सावंpas·sā·vaṃ वाvā खेळंkhe·ḷaṃ वाvā वन्तंvan·taṃ वाvā नीहातुं,nī·hā·tuṃ पटिबलोpa·ṭi·ba·lo होतिho·ti गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ कालेनkā·le·na कालंkā·laṃ धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेतुंsan·das·se·tuṃ समादपेतुंsa·mā·da·pe·tuṃ समुत्तेजेतुंsa·mut·te·je·tuṃ सम्पहंसेतुं।sam·pa·haṃ·se·tuṃ

      paṭibalo hoti bhesajjaṁ saṁvidhātuṁ, sappāyāsappāyaṁ jānāti, asappāyaṁ apanāmeti sappāyaṁ upanāmeti, mettacitto gilānaṁ upaṭṭhāti no āmisantaro, ajegucchī hoti uccāraṁ vā passāvaṁ vā kheḷaṁ vā vantaṁ vā nīhātuṁ, paṭibalo hoti gilānaṁ kālena kālaṁ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetuṁ samādapetuṁ samuttejetuṁ sampahaṁsetuṁ.

      they’re capable of preparing medicine; knowing what’s beneficial and what’s harmful, they remove what’s harmful and bring what’s beneficial; they nurse the sick with a mind of good will, not for the sake of worldly gain; they’re not disgusted at having to clean up feces, urine, spit, or vomit; they’re capable of instructing, inspiring, and gladdening the sick person with a teaching from time to time.”

1183. 1183

      इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to गिलानुपट्ठाकोgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ko अलंa·laṃ गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ उपट्ठातुन्”ति।u·paṭ·ṭhā·tun

      Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgato gilānupaṭṭhāko alaṁ gilānaṁ upaṭṭhātun”ti.

      (Pāli only)

1184. 1184

      24। मतसन्तककथाma·ta·san·ta·ka·ka·thā

      24. Matasantakakathā

      24. Discussion of inheritance

1185. 1185

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na द्वेdve भिक्खूbhik·khū कोसलेसुko·sa·le·su जनपदेja·na·pa·de अद्धानमग्गप्पटिपन्नाad·dhā·na·mag·gap·pa·ṭi·pan·nā होन्ति।hon·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena dve bhikkhū kosalesu janapade addhānamaggappaṭipannā honti.

      On one occasion two monks were traveling through the Kosalan country,

1186. 1186

      तेte अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ आवासंā·vā·saṃ उपगच्छिंसु।u·pa·gac·chiṃ·su

      Te aññataraṁ āvāsaṁ upagacchiṁsu.

      when they arrived at a monastery

1187. 1187

      तत्थtat·tha अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu गिलानोgi·lā·no होति।ho·ti

      Tattha aññataro bhikkhu gilāno hoti.

      with a sick monk.

1188. 1188

      अथa·tha खोkho तेसंte·saṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

      Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

      They thought,

1189. 1189

      “भगवताbha·ga·va·tā खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so गिलानुपट्ठानंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·naṃ वण्णितं।vaṇ·ṇi·taṃ

      “bhagavatā kho, āvuso, gilānupaṭṭhānaṁ vaṇṇitaṁ.

      “The Buddha has praised nursing the sick,

1190. 1190

      हन्दhan·da मयं,ma·yaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so इमंi·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ उपट्ठहेमा”ति।u·paṭ·ṭha·he·mā

      Handa mayaṁ, āvuso, imaṁ bhikkhuṁ upaṭṭhahemā”ti.

      so let’s nurse this monk.”

1191. 1191

      तेte तंtaṃ उपट्ठहिंसु।u·paṭ·ṭha·hiṃ·su

      Te taṁ upaṭṭhahiṁsu.

      (Pāli only)

1192. 1192

      सोso तेहिte·hi उपट्ठहियमानोu·paṭ·ṭha·hi·ya·mā·no कालमकासि।kā·la·ma·kā·si

      So tehi upaṭṭhahiyamāno kālamakāsi.

      But while they were nursing him, he died.

1193. 1193

      अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तस्सtas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya सावत्थिंsā·vat·thiṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Atha kho te bhikkhū tassa bhikkhuno pattacīvaramādāya sāvatthiṁ gantvā bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      They then took his bowl and robes and went to Sāvatthī, where they told the Buddha what had happened.

1194. 1194

      “भिक्खुस्स,bhik·khus·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कालङ्कतेkā·laṅ·ka·te सङ्घोsaṅ·gho सामीsā·mī पत्तचीवरे,pat·ta·cī·va·re

      “Bhikkhussa, bhikkhave, kālaṅkate saṅgho sāmī pattacīvare,

      “When a monk dies, the Sangha becomes the owner of his bowl and robes.

1195. 1195

      अपिa·pi चca गिलानुपट्ठाकाgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā बहूपकारा।ba·hū·pa·kā·rā

      api ca gilānupaṭṭhākā bahūpakārā.

      Still, the nurses have been very helpful.

1196. 1196

      अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na तिचीवरञ्चti·cī·va·rañ·ca पत्तञ्चpat·tañ·ca गिलानुपट्ठाकानंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

      Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, saṅghena ticīvarañca pattañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ dātuṁ.

      I allow the Sangha to give the three robes and the bowl to the nurses.

1197. 1197

      एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दातब्बं।dā·tab·baṃ

      Evañca pana, bhikkhave, dātabbaṁ.

      And they should be given like this.

1198. 1198

      तेनte·na गिलानुपट्ठाकेनgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ke·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एवमस्सe·va·mas·sa वचनीयो—va·ca·nī·yo

      Tena gilānupaṭṭhākena bhikkhunā saṅghaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo—

      The monk nurse should approach the Sangha and say,

1199. 1199

      ‘इत्थन्नामो,it·than·nā·mo भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खुbhik·khu कालङ्कतो।kā·laṅ·ka·to

      ‘itthannāmo, bhante, bhikkhu kālaṅkato.

      ‘Venerables, monk so-and-so has died.

1200. 1200

      इदंi·daṃ तस्सtas·sa तिचीवरञ्चti·cī·va·rañ·ca पत्तोpat·to चा’ति।cā

      Idaṁ tassa ticīvarañca patto cā’ti.

      Here are his three robes and bowl.’

1201. 1201

      ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

      Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

      A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:

1202. 1202

      ‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

      ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

      ‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

1203. 1203

      इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu कालङ्कतो।kā·laṅ·ka·to

      Itthannāmo bhikkhu kālaṅkato.

      Monk so-and-so has died.

1204. 1204

      इदंi·daṃ तस्सtas·sa तिचीवरञ्चti·cī·va·rañ·ca पत्तोpat·to च।ca

      Idaṁ tassa ticīvarañca patto ca.

      Here are his three robes and bowl.

1205. 1205

      यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इमंi·maṃ तिचीवरञ्चti·cī·va·rañ·ca पत्तञ्चpat·tañ·ca गिलानुपट्ठाकानंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ ददेय्य।da·dey·ya

      Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho imaṁ ticīvarañca pattañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ dadeyya.

      If the Sangha is ready, it should give the three robes and the bowl to the nurses.

1206. 1206

      एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

      Esā ñatti.

      This is the motion.

1207. 1207

      सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

      Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

      Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

1208. 1208

      इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu कालङ्कतो।kā·laṅ·ka·to

      Itthannāmo bhikkhu kālaṅkato.

      Monk so-and-so has died.

1209. 1209

      इदंi·daṃ तस्सtas·sa तिचीवरञ्चti·cī·va·rañ·ca पत्तोpat·to च।ca

      Idaṁ tassa ticīvarañca patto ca.

      Here are his three robes and bowl.

1210. 1210

      सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इमंi·maṃ तिचीवरञ्चti·cī·va·rañ·ca पत्तञ्चpat·tañ·ca गिलानुपट्ठाकानंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ देति।de·ti

      Saṅgho imaṁ ticīvarañca pattañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ deti.

      The Sangha gives the three robes and the bowl to the nurses.

1211. 1211

      यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इमस्सi·mas·sa तिचीवरस्सti·cī·va·ras·sa चca पत्तस्सpat·tas·sa चca गिलानुपट्ठाकानंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ दानं,dā·naṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

      Yassāyasmato khamati imassa ticīvarassa ca pattassa ca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ dānaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

      Any monk who approves of giving the three robes and the bowl to the nurses should remain silent.

1212. 1212

      यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

      yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

      Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.

1213. 1213

      दिन्नंdin·naṃ इदंi·daṃ सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na तिचीवरञ्चti·cī·va·rañ·ca पत्तोpat·to चca गिलानुपट्ठाकानं।gi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ

      Dinnaṁ idaṁ saṅghena ticīvarañca patto ca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ.

      The Sangha has given the three robes and the bowl to the nurses.

1214. 1214

      खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

      Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

      The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”

1215. 1215

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro कालङ्कतोkā·laṅ·ka·to होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro sāmaṇero kālaṅkato hoti.

      On one occasion a novice monk had died.

1216. 1216

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1217. 1217

      “सामणेरस्स,sā·ma·ṇe·ras·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कालङ्कतेkā·laṅ·ka·te सङ्घोsaṅ·gho सामीsā·mī पत्तचीवरे,pat·ta·cī·va·re

      “Sāmaṇerassa, bhikkhave, kālaṅkate saṅgho sāmī pattacīvare,

      “When a novice monk dies, the Sangha becomes the owner of his bowl and robes.

1218. 1218

      अपिa·pi चca गिलानुपट्ठाकाgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā बहूपकारा।ba·hū·pa·kā·rā

      api ca gilānupaṭṭhākā bahūpakārā.

      Still, the nurses have been very helpful.

1219. 1219

      अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na चीवरञ्चcī·va·rañ·ca पत्तञ्चpat·tañ·ca गिलानुपट्ठाकानंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

      Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, saṅghena cīvarañca pattañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ dātuṁ.

      I allow the Sangha to give the robes and the bowl to the nurses.

1220. 1220

      एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दातब्बं।dā·tab·baṃ

      Evañca pana, bhikkhave, dātabbaṁ.

      And they should be given like this.

1221. 1221

      तेनte·na गिलानुपट्ठाकेनgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·ke·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एवमस्सe·va·mas·sa वचनीयो—va·ca·nī·yo

      Tena gilānupaṭṭhākena bhikkhunā saṅghaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo—

      The monk nurse should approach the Sangha and say,

1222. 1222

      ‘इत्थन्नामो,it·than·nā·mo भन्ते,bhan·te सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro कालङ्कतो,kā·laṅ·ka·to इदंi·daṃ तस्सtas·sa चीवरञ्चcī·va·rañ·ca पत्तोpat·to चा’ति।cā

      ‘itthannāmo, bhante, sāmaṇero kālaṅkato, idaṁ tassa cīvarañca patto cā’ti.

      ‘Venerables, the novice monk so-and-so has died. Here are his robes and bowl.’

1223. 1223

      ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

      Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

      A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:

1224. 1224

      ‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

      ‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

      ‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

1225. 1225

      इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro कालङ्कतो।kā·laṅ·ka·to

      Itthannāmo sāmaṇero kālaṅkato.

      The novice monk so-and-so has died.

1226. 1226

      इदंi·daṃ तस्सtas·sa चीवरञ्चcī·va·rañ·ca पत्तोpat·to च।ca

      Idaṁ tassa cīvarañca patto ca.

      Here are his robes and bowl.

1227. 1227

      यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इमंi·maṃ चीवरञ्चcī·va·rañ·ca पत्तञ्चpat·tañ·ca गिलानुपट्ठाकानंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ ददेय्य।da·dey·ya

      Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho imaṁ cīvarañca pattañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ dadeyya.

      If the Sangha is ready, it should give the robes and the bowl to the nurses.

1228. 1228

      एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

      Esā ñatti.

      This is the motion.

1229. 1229

      सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

      Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

      Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.

1230. 1230

      इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro कालङ्कतो।kā·laṅ·ka·to

      Itthannāmo sāmaṇero kālaṅkato.

      The novice monk so-and-so has died.

1231. 1231

      इदंi·daṃ तस्सtas·sa चीवरञ्चcī·va·rañ·ca पत्तोpat·to च।ca

      Idaṁ tassa cīvarañca patto ca.

      Here are his robes and bowl.

1232. 1232

      सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इमंi·maṃ चीवरञ्चcī·va·rañ·ca पत्तञ्चpat·tañ·ca गिलानुपट्ठाकानंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ देति।de·ti

      Saṅgho imaṁ cīvarañca pattañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ deti.

      The Sangha gives the robes and the bowl to the nurses.

1233. 1233

      यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इमस्सi·mas·sa चीवरस्सcī·va·ras·sa चca पत्तस्सpat·tas·sa चca गिलानुपट्ठाकानंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ दानं,dā·naṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

      Yassāyasmato khamati imassa cīvarassa ca pattassa ca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ dānaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

      Any monk who approves of giving the robes and the bowl to the nurses should remain silent.

1234. 1234

      यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

      yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

      Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.

1235. 1235

      दिन्नंdin·naṃ इदंi·daṃ सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na चीवरञ्चcī·va·rañ·ca पत्तोpat·to चca गिलानुपट्ठाकानं।gi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ

      Dinnaṁ idaṁ saṅghena cīvarañca patto ca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ.

      The Sangha has given the robes and the bowl to the nurses.

1236. 1236

      खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

      Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

      The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”

1237. 1237

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu चca सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro चca गिलानंgi·lā·naṃ उपट्ठहिंसु।u·paṭ·ṭha·hiṃ·su

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu ca sāmaṇero ca gilānaṁ upaṭṭhahiṁsu.

      On one occasion a monk and a novice monk were nursing someone together.

1238. 1238

      सोso तेहिte·hi उपट्ठहियमानोu·paṭ·ṭha·hi·ya·mā·no कालमकासि।kā·la·ma·kā·si

      So tehi upaṭṭhahiyamāno kālamakāsi.

      While they were doing so, the patient died.

1239. 1239

      अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa गिलानुपट्ठाकस्सgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

      Atha kho tassa gilānupaṭṭhākassa bhikkhuno etadahosi—

      The monk nurse thought,

1240. 1240

      “कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खोkho गिलानुपट्ठाकस्सgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kas·sa सामणेरस्सsā·ma·ṇe·ras·sa चीवरपटिवीसोcī·va·ra·pa·ṭi·vī·so दातब्बो”ति?dā·tab·bo

      “kathaṁ nu kho gilānupaṭṭhākassa sāmaṇerassa cīvarapaṭivīso dātabbo”ti?

      “What share of the robes should be given to the novice-monk nurse?”

1241. 1241

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1242. 1242

      “अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गिलानुपट्ठाकस्सgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kas·sa सामणेरस्सsā·ma·ṇe·ras·sa समकंsa·ma·kaṃ पटिवीसंpa·ṭi·vī·saṃ दातुन्”ति।dā·tun

      “Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānupaṭṭhākassa sāmaṇerassa samakaṁ paṭivīsaṁ dātun”ti.

      “I allow you to give an equal share to the novice-monk nurse.”

1243. 1243

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu बहुभण्डोba·hu·bhaṇ·ḍo बहुपरिक्खारोba·hu·pa·rik·khā·ro कालङ्कतोkā·laṅ·ka·to होति।ho·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu bahubhaṇḍo bahuparikkhāro kālaṅkato hoti.

      On one occasion a monk with many possessions had died.

1244. 1244

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1245. 1245

      “भिक्खुस्स,bhik·khus·sa भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कालङ्कतेkā·laṅ·ka·te सङ्घोsaṅ·gho सामीsā·mī पत्तचीवरे,pat·ta·cī·va·re

      “Bhikkhussa, bhikkhave, kālaṅkate saṅgho sāmī pattacīvare,

      “When a monk dies, the Sangha becomes the owner of his bowl and robes.

1246. 1246

      अपिa·pi चca गिलानुपट्ठाकाgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā बहूपकारा।ba·hū·pa·kā·rā

      api ca gilānupaṭṭhākā bahūpakārā.

      Still, the nurses have been very helpful.

1247. 1247

      अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na तिचीवरञ्चti·cī·va·rañ·ca पत्तञ्चpat·tañ·ca गिलानुपट्ठाकानंgi·lā·nu·paṭ·ṭhā·kā·naṃ दातुं।dā·tuṃ

      Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, saṅghena ticīvarañca pattañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṁ dātuṁ.

      I allow the Sangha to give the three robes and the bowl to the nurses.

1248. 1248

      यंyaṃ तत्थtat·tha लहुभण्डंla·hu·bhaṇ·ḍaṃ लहुपरिक्खारंla·hu·pa·rik·khā·raṃ तंtaṃ सम्मुखीभूतेनsam·mu·khī·bhū·te·na सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na भाजेतुं।bhā·je·tuṃ

      Yaṁ tattha lahubhaṇḍaṁ lahuparikkhāraṁ taṁ sammukhībhūtena saṅghena bhājetuṁ.

      The present Sangha should distribute his ordinary possessions.

1249. 1249

      यंyaṃ तत्थtat·tha गरुभण्डंga·ru·bhaṇ·ḍaṃ गरुपरिक्खारंga·ru·pa·rik·khā·raṃ तंtaṃ आगतानागतस्सā·ga·tā·nā·ga·tas·sa चातुद्दिसस्सcā·tud·di·sas·sa सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa अविस्सज्जिकंa·vis·saj·ji·kaṃ अवेभङ्गिकन्”ति।a·ve·bhaṅ·gi·kan

      Yaṁ tattha garubhaṇḍaṁ garuparikkhāraṁ taṁ āgatānāgatassa cātuddisassa saṅghassa avissajjikaṁ avebhaṅgikan”ti.

      His valuable possessions are for the Sangha as a whole, both present and future. They’re not to be given out, not to be distributed.”

1250. 1250

      25। नग्गियपटिक्खेपकथाnag·gi·ya·pa·ṭik·khe·pa·ka·thā

      25. Naggiyapaṭikkhepakathā

      25. Discussion of the prohibition against nakedness

1251. 1251

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu नग्गोnag·go हुत्वाhut·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu naggo hutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

      On one occasion a naked monk went to the Buddha and said,

1252. 1252

      “भगवा,bha·ga·vā भन्ते,bhan·te अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छस्सap·pic·chas·sa सन्तुट्ठस्सsan·tuṭ·ṭhas·sa सल्लेखस्सsal·le·khas·sa धुतस्सdhu·tas·sa पासादिकस्सpā·sā·di·kas·sa अपचयस्सa·pa·ca·yas·sa वीरियारम्भस्सvī·ri·yā·ram·bhas·sa वण्णवादी।vaṇ·ṇa·vā·dī

      “bhagavā, bhante, anekapariyāyena appicchassa santuṭṭhassa sallekhassa dhutassa pāsādikassa apacayassa vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇavādī.

      “In many ways, sir, you praise fewness of wishes, contentment, self-effacement, ascetic practices, being inspiring, reduction in things, and being energetic.

1253. 1253

      इदं,i·daṃ भन्ते,bhan·te नग्गियंnag·gi·yaṃ अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छतायap·pic·cha·tā·ya सन्तुट्ठितायsan·tuṭ·ṭhi·tā·ya सल्लेखायsal·le·khā·ya धुततायdhu·ta·tā·ya पासादिकतायpā·sā·di·ka·tā·ya अपचयायa·pa·ca·yā·ya वीरियारम्भायvī·ri·yā·ram·bhā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

      Idaṁ, bhante, naggiyaṁ anekapariyāyena appicchatāya santuṭṭhitāya sallekhāya dhutatāya pāsādikatāya apacayāya vīriyārambhāya saṁvattati.

      Being naked leads to all those things.

1254. 1254

      साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ नग्गियंnag·gi·yaṃ अनुजानातू”ति।a·nu·jā·nā·tū

      Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṁ naggiyaṁ anujānātū”ti.

      Please allow nakedness for the monks.”

1255. 1255

      विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

      Vigarahi buddho bhagavā—

      The Buddha rebuked him,

1256. 1256

      “अननुच्छविकं,a·na·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ अप्पतिरूपंap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ अकरणीयं।a·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ

      “ananucchavikaṁ, moghapurisa, ananulomikaṁ appatirūpaṁ assāmaṇakaṁ akappiyaṁ akaraṇīyaṁ.

      “Foolish man, it’s not suitable, it’s not proper, it’s not worthy of a monastic, it’s not allowable, it’s not to be done.

1257. 1257

      कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa नग्गियंnag·gi·yaṃ तित्थियसमादानंtit·thi·ya·sa·mā·dā·naṃ समादियिस्ससि।sa·mā·di·yis·sa·si

      Kathañhi nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, naggiyaṁ titthiyasamādānaṁ samādiyissasi.

      How can you undertake the practice of nakedness, like the monastics of other religions?

1258. 1258

      नेतं,ne·taṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

      Netaṁ, moghapurisa, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

      This will affect people’s confidence …”

1259. 1259

      विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

      vigarahitvā …pe…

      After rebuking him …

1260. 1260

      धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

      dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

      he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

1261. 1261

      “न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve नग्गियंnag·gi·yaṃ तित्थियसमादानंtit·thi·ya·sa·mā·dā·naṃ समादियितब्बं।sa·mā·di·yi·tab·baṃ

      “na, bhikkhave, naggiyaṁ titthiyasamādānaṁ samādiyitabbaṁ.

      “You shouldn’t undertake the practice of nakedness, like the monastics of other religions.

1262. 1262

      योyo समादियेय्य,sa·mā·di·yey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सा”ति।thul·lac·ca·yas·sā

      Yo samādiyeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā”ti.

      If you do, you commit a serious offense.”

1263. 1263

      26। कुसचीरादिपटिक्खेपकथाku·sa·cī·rā·di·pa·ṭik·khe·pa·ka·thā

      26. Kusacīrādipaṭikkhepakathā

      26. Discussion of the prohibition against grass robes, etc.

1264. 1264

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu कुसचीरंku·sa·cī·raṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …पे…pe

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu kusacīraṁ nivāsetvā …pe…

      On one occasion a monk put on a sarong made of grass …

1265. 1265

      वाकचीरंvā·ka·cī·raṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …पे…pe

      vākacīraṁ nivāsetvā …pe…

      a sarong made of bark …

1266. 1266

      फलकचीरंpha·la·ka·cī·raṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …पे…pe

      phalakacīraṁ nivāsetvā …pe…

      a sarong made of bits of wood …

1267. 1267

      केसकम्बलंke·sa·kam·ba·laṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …पे…pe

      kesakambalaṁ nivāsetvā …pe…

      a sarong made of human hair …

1268. 1268

      वाळकम्बलंvā·ḷa·kam·ba·laṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …पे…pe

      vāḷakambalaṁ nivāsetvā …pe…

      a sarong made of horse-hair …

1269. 1269

      उलूकपक्खंu·lū·ka·pak·khaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …पे…pe

      ulūkapakkhaṁ nivāsetvā …pe…

      a sarong made of owls’ wings …

1270. 1270

      अजिनक्खिपंa·ji·nak·khi·paṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā

      ajinakkhipaṁ nivāsetvā

      a sarong made of antelope hide,

1271. 1271

      येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

      went to the Buddha, and said,

1272. 1272

      “भगवा,bha·ga·vā भन्ते,bhan·te अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छस्सap·pic·chas·sa सन्तुट्ठस्सsan·tuṭ·ṭhas·sa सल्लेखस्सsal·le·khas·sa धुतस्सdhu·tas·sa पासादिकस्सpā·sā·di·kas·sa अपचयस्सa·pa·ca·yas·sa वीरियारम्भस्सvī·ri·yā·ram·bhas·sa वण्णवादी।vaṇ·ṇa·vā·dī

      “bhagavā, bhante, anekapariyāyena appicchassa santuṭṭhassa sallekhassa dhutassa pāsādikassa apacayassa vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇavādī.

      “In many ways, sir, you praise fewness of wishes, contentment, self-effacement, ascetic practices, being inspiring, reduction in things, and being energetic.

1273. 1273

      इदं,i·daṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अजिनक्खिपंa·ji·nak·khi·paṃ अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छतायap·pic·cha·tā·ya सन्तुट्ठितायsan·tuṭ·ṭhi·tā·ya सल्लेखायsal·le·khā·ya धुततायdhu·ta·tā·ya पासादिकतायpā·sā·di·ka·tā·ya अपचयायa·pa·ca·yā·ya वीरियारम्भायvī·ri·yā·ram·bhā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

      Idaṁ, bhante, ajinakkhipaṁ anekapariyāyena appicchatāya santuṭṭhitāya sallekhāya dhutatāya pāsādikatāya apacayāya vīriyārambhāya saṁvattati.

      A robe made of antelope hide leads to all those things.

1274. 1274

      साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अजिनक्खिपंa·ji·nak·khi·paṃ अनुजानातू”ति।a·nu·jā·nā·tū

      Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṁ ajinakkhipaṁ anujānātū”ti.

      Please allow robes of antelope hide for the monks.”

1275. 1275

      विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

      Vigarahi buddho bhagavā—

      The Buddha rebuked him,

1276. 1276

      “अननुच्छविकं,a·na·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ अप्पतिरूपंap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ अकरणीयं।a·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ

      “ananucchavikaṁ, moghapurisa, ananulomikaṁ appatirūpaṁ assāmaṇakaṁ akappiyaṁ akaraṇīyaṁ.

      “Foolish man, it’s not suitable, it’s not proper, it’s not worthy of a monastic, it’s not allowable, it’s not to be done.

1277. 1277

      कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अजिनक्खिपंa·ji·nak·khi·paṃ तित्थियधजंtit·thi·ya·dha·jaṃ धारेस्ससि।dhā·res·sa·si

      Kathañhi nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, ajinakkhipaṁ titthiyadhajaṁ dhāressasi.

      How can you wear a robe made of antelope hide, that sign of monastics of other religions?

1278. 1278

      नेतं,ne·taṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

      Netaṁ, moghapurisa, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

      This will affect people’s confidence …”

1279. 1279

      विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

      vigarahitvā …pe…

      After rebuking him …

1280. 1280

      धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

      dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

      he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

1281. 1281

      “न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अजिनक्खिपंa·ji·nak·khi·paṃ तित्थियधजंtit·thi·ya·dha·jaṃ धारेतब्बं।dhā·re·tab·baṃ

      “na, bhikkhave, ajinakkhipaṁ titthiyadhajaṁ dhāretabbaṁ.

      “You shouldn’t wear a robe made of antelope hide, that sign of monastics of other religions.

1282. 1282

      योyo धारेय्य,dhā·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti थुल्लच्चयस्सा”ति।thul·lac·ca·yas·sā

      Yo dhāreyya, āpatti thullaccayassā”ti.

      If you do, you commit a serious offense.”

1283. 1283

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro भिक्खुbhik·khu अक्कनाळंak·ka·nā·ḷaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā …पे…pe

      Tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu akkanāḷaṁ nivāsetvā …pe…

      On one occasion a monk dressed in a sarong made of stalks of crown flower …

1284. 1284

      पोत्थकंpot·tha·kaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      potthakaṁ nivāsetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

      in a sarong made of jute, went to the Buddha, and said,

1285. 1285

      “भगवा,bha·ga·vā भन्ते,bhan·te अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छस्सap·pic·chas·sa सन्तुट्ठस्सsan·tuṭ·ṭhas·sa सल्लेखस्सsal·le·khas·sa धुतस्सdhu·tas·sa पासादिकस्सpā·sā·di·kas·sa अपचयस्सa·pa·ca·yas·sa वीरियारम्भस्स,vī·ri·yā·ram·bhas·sa वण्णवादी।vaṇ·ṇa·vā·dī

      “bhagavā, bhante, anekapariyāyena appicchassa santuṭṭhassa sallekhassa dhutassa pāsādikassa apacayassa vīriyārambhassa, vaṇṇavādī.

      “In many ways, sir, you praise fewness of wishes, contentment, self-effacement, ascetic practices, being inspiring, reduction in things, and being energetic.

1286. 1286

      अयं,a·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पोत्थकोpot·tha·ko अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na अप्पिच्छतायap·pic·cha·tā·ya सन्तुट्ठितायsan·tuṭ·ṭhi·tā·ya सल्लेखायsal·le·khā·ya धुततायdhu·ta·tā·ya पासादिकतायpā·sā·di·ka·tā·ya अपचयायa·pa·ca·yā·ya वीरियारम्भायvī·ri·yā·ram·bhā·ya संवत्तति।saṃ·vat·ta·ti

      Ayaṁ, bhante, potthako anekapariyāyena appicchatāya santuṭṭhitāya sallekhāya dhutatāya pāsādikatāya apacayāya vīriyārambhāya saṁvattati.

      A jute robe leads to all those things.

1287. 1287

      साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पोत्थकंpot·tha·kaṃ अनुजानातू”ति।a·nu·jā·nā·tū

      Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṁ potthakaṁ anujānātū”ti.

      Please allow jute robes for the monks.”

1288. 1288

      विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

      Vigarahi buddho bhagavā—

      The Buddha rebuked him,

1289. 1289

      “अननुच्छविकं,a·na·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ अप्पतिरूपंap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ अकरणीयं।a·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ

      “ananucchavikaṁ, moghapurisa, ananulomikaṁ appatirūpaṁ assāmaṇakaṁ akappiyaṁ akaraṇīyaṁ.

      “Foolish man, it’s not suitable, it’s not proper, it’s not worthy of a monastic, it’s not allowable, it’s not to be done.

1290. 1290

      कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa पोत्थकंpot·tha·kaṃ निवासेस्ससि।ni·vā·ses·sa·si

      Kathañhi nāma tvaṁ, moghapurisa, potthakaṁ nivāsessasi.

      How can you dress in a sarong made of jute?

1291. 1291

      नेतं,ne·taṃ मोघपुरिस,mo·gha·pu·ri·sa अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

      Netaṁ, moghapurisa, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

      This will affect people’s confidence …”

1292. 1292

      विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

      vigarahitvā …pe…

      After rebuking him …

1293. 1293

      धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

      dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

      he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:

1294. 1294

      “न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पोत्थकोpot·tha·ko निवासेतब्बो।ni·vā·se·tab·bo

      “na, bhikkhave, potthako nivāsetabbo.

      “You shouldn’t dress in a sarong made of jute.

1295. 1295

      योyo निवासेय्य,ni·vā·sey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

      Yo nivāseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

      If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”

1296. 1296

      27। सब्बनीलकादिपटिक्खेपकथाsab·ba·nī·la·kā·di·pa·ṭik·khe·pa·ka·thā

      27. Sabbanīlakādipaṭikkhepakathā

      27. Discussion of the prohibition against what is entirely blue, etc.

1297. 1297

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū सब्बनीलकानिsab·ba·nī·la·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū sabbanīlakāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      At that time the monks from the group of six wore entirely blue robes,

1298. 1298

      सब्बपीतकानिsab·ba·pī·ta·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      sabbapītakāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      entirely yellow robes,

1299. 1299

      सब्बलोहितकानिsab·ba·lo·hi·ta·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      sabbalohitakāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      entirely red robes,

1300. 1300

      सब्बमञ्जिट्ठकानिsab·ba·mañ·jiṭ·ṭha·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      sabbamañjiṭṭhakāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      entirely magenta robes,

1301. 1301

      सब्बकण्हानिsab·ba·kaṇ·hā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      sabbakaṇhāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      entirely black robes,

1302. 1302

      सब्बमहारङ्गरत्तानिsab·ba·ma·hā·raṅ·ga·rat·tā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      sabbamahāraṅgarattāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      entirely orange robes,

1303. 1303

      सब्बमहानामरत्तानिsab·ba·ma·hā·nā·ma·rat·tā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      sabbamahānāmarattāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      and entirely beige robes;

1304. 1304

      अच्छिन्नदसानिac·chin·na·da·sā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      acchinnadasāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      and robes with borders made from a single piece of cloth,

1305. 1305

      दीघदसानिdī·gha·da·sā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      dīghadasāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      robes with long borders,

1306. 1306

      पुप्फदसानिpup·pha·da·sā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      pupphadasāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      robes with floral borders,

1307. 1307

      फणदसानिpha·ṇa·da·sā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      phaṇadasāni cīvarāni dhārenti …pe…

      robes with borders decorated with snakes’ hoods,

1308. 1308

      कञ्चुकंkañ·cu·kaṃ धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      kañcukaṁ dhārenti …pe…

      close-fitting jackets,

1309. 1309

      तिरीटकंti·rī·ṭa·kaṃ धारेन्तिdhā·ren·ti …पे…pe

      tirīṭakaṁ dhārenti …pe…

      Lodh-tree robes,

1310. 1310

      वेठनंve·ṭha·naṃ धारेन्ति।dhā·ren·ti

      veṭhanaṁ dhārenti.

      and turbans.

1311. 1311

      मनुस्साma·nus·sā उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

      Manussā ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

      People complained and criticized them,

1312. 1312

      “कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma समणाsa·ma·ṇā सक्यपुत्तियाsak·ya·put·ti·yā वेठनंve·ṭha·naṃ धारेस्सन्ति,dhā·res·san·ti सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi गिहीgi·hī कामभोगिनो”ति।kā·ma·bho·gi·no

      “kathañhi nāma samaṇā sakyaputtiyā veṭhanaṁ dhāressanti, seyyathāpi gihī kāmabhogino”ti.

      “How can the Sakyan monastics wear turbans? They’re just like householders who indulge in worldly pleasures!”

1313. 1313

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      (Pāli only)

1314. 1314

      “न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सब्बनीलकानिsab·ba·nī·la·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna सब्बपीतकानिsab·ba·pī·ta·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna सब्बलोहितकानिsab·ba·lo·hi·ta·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna सब्बमञ्जिट्ठकानिsab·ba·mañ·jiṭ·ṭha·kā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna सब्बकण्हानिsab·ba·kaṇ·hā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna सब्बमहारङ्गरत्तानिsab·ba·ma·hā·raṅ·ga·rat·tā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna सब्बमहानामरत्तानिsab·ba·ma·hā·nā·ma·rat·tā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna अच्छिन्नदसानिac·chin·na·da·sā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna दीघदसानिdī·gha·da·sā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna पुप्फदसानिpup·pha·da·sā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna फणदसानिpha·ṇa·da·sā·ni चीवरानिcī·va·rā·ni धारेतब्बानि,dhā·re·tab·bā·ni नna कञ्चुकंkañ·cu·kaṃ धारेतब्बं,dhā·re·tab·baṃ नna तिरीटकंti·rī·ṭa·kaṃ धारेतब्बं,dhā·re·tab·baṃ नna वेठनंve·ṭha·naṃ धारेतब्बं।dhā·re·tab·baṃ

      “Na, bhikkhave, sabbanīlakāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na sabbapītakāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na sabbalohitakāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na sabbamañjiṭṭhakāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na sabbakaṇhāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na sabbamahāraṅgarattāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na sabbamahānāmarattāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na acchinnadasāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na dīghadasāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na pupphadasāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na phaṇadasāni cīvarāni dhāretabbāni, na kañcukaṁ dhāretabbaṁ, na tirīṭakaṁ dhāretabbaṁ, na veṭhanaṁ dhāretabbaṁ.

      “You shouldn’t wear entirely blue robes, entirely yellow robes, entirely red robes, entirely magenta robes, entirely black robes, entirely orange robes, entirely beige robes, robes with borders made from a single piece of cloth, robes with long borders, robes with floral borders, robes with borders decorated with snakes’ hoods, close-fitting jackets, Lodh-tree robes, or turbans.

1315. 1315

      योyo धारेय्य,dhā·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्सा”ति।duk·ka·ṭas·sā

      Yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā”ti.

      If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.”

1316. 1316

      28। वस्संवुट्ठानंअनुप्पन्नचीवरकथाvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ·a·nup·pan·na·cī·va·ra·ka·thā

      28. Vassaṁvuṭṭhānaṁanuppannacīvarakathā

      28. Discussion of robe-cloth that has not yet been offered to those who have completed the rainy-season residence

1317. 1317

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na वस्संवुट्ठाvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā भिक्खूbhik·khū अनुप्पन्नेa·nup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re पक्कमन्तिपि,pak·ka·man·ti·pi विब्भमन्तिपि,vib·bha·man·ti·pi कालम्पिkā·lam·pi करोन्ति,ka·ron·ti सामणेरापिsā·ma·ṇe·rā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खातकापिpac·cak·khā·ta·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti अन्तिमवत्थुंan·ti·ma·vat·thuṃ अज्झापन्नकापिaj·jhā·pan·na·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti उम्मत्तकापिum·mat·ta·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti खित्तचित्तापिkhit·ta·cit·tā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti वेदनाट्टापिve·da·nāṭ·ṭā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खित्तकापिuk·khit·ta·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अप्पटिकम्मेap·pa·ṭi·kam·me उक्खित्तकापिuk·khit·ta·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti पापिकायpā·pi·kā·ya दिट्ठियाdiṭ·ṭhi·yā अप्पटिनिस्सग्गेap·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·ge उक्खित्तकापिuk·khit·ta·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti पण्डकापिpaṇ·ḍa·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti थेय्यसंवासकापिthey·ya·saṃ·vā·sa·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti तित्थियपक्कन्तकापिtit·thi·ya·pak·kan·ta·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti तिरच्छानगतापिti·rac·chā·na·ga·tā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti मातुघातकापिmā·tu·ghā·ta·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti पितुघातकापिpi·tu·ghā·ta·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti अरहन्तघातकापिa·ra·han·ta·ghā·ta·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti भिक्खुनिदूसकापिbhik·khu·ni·dū·sa·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti सङ्घभेदकापिsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti लोहितुप्पादकापिlo·hi·tup·pā·da·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति,pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti उभतोब्यञ्जनकापिu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·kā·pi पटिजानन्ति।pa·ṭi·jā·nan·ti

      Tena kho pana samayena vassaṁvuṭṭhā bhikkhū anuppanne cīvare pakkamantipi, vibbhamantipi, kālampi karonti, sāmaṇerāpi paṭijānanti, sikkhaṁ paccakkhātakāpi paṭijānanti, antimavatthuṁ ajjhāpannakāpi paṭijānanti, ummattakāpi paṭijānanti, khittacittāpi paṭijānanti, vedanāṭṭāpi paṭijānanti, āpattiyā adassane ukkhittakāpi paṭijānanti, āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhittakāpi paṭijānanti, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittakāpi paṭijānanti, paṇḍakāpi paṭijānanti, theyyasaṁvāsakāpi paṭijānanti, titthiyapakkantakāpi paṭijānanti, tiracchānagatāpi paṭijānanti, mātughātakāpi paṭijānanti, pitughātakāpi paṭijānanti, arahantaghātakāpi paṭijānanti, bhikkhunidūsakāpi paṭijānanti, saṅghabhedakāpi paṭijānanti, lohituppādakāpi paṭijānanti, ubhatobyañjanakāpi paṭijānanti.

      At that time, the monks who had completed the rainy-season residence left before the robe-cloth was offered. They disrobed, died, admitted to being novice monks, admitted to having renounced the training, admitted to having committed the worst kind of offense, admitted to being insane, admitted to being deranged, admitted to being overwhelmed by pain, admitted to having been ejected for not recognizing an offense, admitted to having been ejected for not making amends for an offense, admitted to having been ejected for not giving up a bad view, admitted to being <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍakas</i>, admitted to being fake monks, admitted to having previously left to join the monastics of another religion, admitted to being animals, admitted to being matricides, admitted to being patricides, admitted to being murderers of a perfected one, admitted to having raped a nun, admitted to having caused a schism in the Sangha, admitted to having caused the Buddha to bleed, or admitted to being gynandromorphs before the robe-cloth was offered.

1318. 1318

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      They told the Buddha.

1319. 1319

      “इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho भिक्खुbhik·khu अनुप्पन्नेa·nup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re पक्कमति,pak·ka·ma·ti सन्तेsan·te पतिरूपेpa·ti·rū·pe गाहकेgā·ha·ke दातब्बं।dā·tab·baṃ

      “Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭho bhikkhu anuppanne cīvare pakkamati, sante patirūpe gāhake dātabbaṁ.

      “It may be that a monk who’s completed the rains residence leaves before the robe-cloth is offered. If there’s anyone suitable to receive it, it should be given.

1320. 1320

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho भिक्खुbhik·khu अनुप्पन्नेa·nup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re विब्भमति,vib·bha·ma·ti कालंkā·laṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खातकोpac·cak·khā·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti अन्तिमवत्थुंan·ti·ma·vat·thuṃ अज्झापन्नकोaj·jhā·pan·na·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho सामी।sā·mī

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭho bhikkhu anuppanne cīvare vibbhamati, kālaṁ karoti, sāmaṇero paṭijānāti, sikkhaṁ paccakkhātako paṭijānāti, antimavatthuṁ ajjhāpannako paṭijānāti, saṅgho sāmī.

      It may be that a monk who’s completed the rains residence disrobes, dies, admits to being a novice monk, admits to having renounced the training, or admits to having committed the worst kind of offense before the robe-cloth is offered. Then the Sangha becomes the owner of that robe-cloth.

1321. 1321

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho भिक्खुbhik·khu अनुप्पन्नेa·nup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti खित्तचित्तोkhit·ta·cit·to पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti वेदनाट्टोve·da·nāṭ·ṭo पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खित्तकोuk·khit·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अप्पटिकम्मेap·pa·ṭi·kam·me उक्खित्तकोuk·khit·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti पापिकायpā·pi·kā·ya दिट्ठियाdiṭ·ṭhi·yā अप्पटिनिस्सग्गेap·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·ge उक्खित्तकोuk·khit·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti सन्तेsan·te पतिरूपेpa·ti·rū·pe गाहकेgā·ha·ke दातब्बं।dā·tab·baṃ

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭho bhikkhu anuppanne cīvare ummattako paṭijānāti, khittacitto paṭijānāti, vedanāṭṭo paṭijānāti, āpattiyā adassane ukkhittako paṭijānāti, āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhittako paṭijānāti, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittako paṭijānāti, sante patirūpe gāhake dātabbaṁ.

      It may be that a monk who’s completed the rains residence admits to being insane, to being deranged, to being overwhelmed by pain, to having been ejected for not recognizing an offense, to having been ejected for not making amends for an offense, or to having been ejected for not giving up a bad view before the robe-cloth is offered. If there’s anyone suitable to receive it, it should be given.

1322. 1322

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho भिक्खुbhik·khu अनुप्पन्नेa·nup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re पण्डकोpaṇ·ḍa·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti थेय्यसंवासकोthey·ya·saṃ·vā·sa·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti तित्थियपक्कन्तकोtit·thi·ya·pak·kan·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti तिरच्छानगतोti·rac·chā·na·ga·to पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti मातुघातकोmā·tu·ghā·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti पितुघातकोpi·tu·ghā·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti अरहन्तघातकोa·ra·han·ta·ghā·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti भिक्खुनिदूसकोbhik·khu·ni·dū·sa·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti लोहितुप्पादकोlo·hi·tup·pā·da·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti उभतोब्यञ्जनकोu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho सामी।sā·mī

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭho bhikkhu anuppanne cīvare paṇḍako paṭijānāti, theyyasaṁvāsako paṭijānāti, titthiyapakkantako paṭijānāti, tiracchānagato paṭijānāti, mātughātako paṭijānāti, pitughātako paṭijānāti, arahantaghātako paṭijānāti, bhikkhunidūsako paṭijānāti, saṅghabhedako paṭijānāti, lohituppādako paṭijānāti, ubhatobyañjanako paṭijānāti, saṅgho sāmī.

      It may be that a monk who’s completed the rains residence admits to being a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i>, to being a fake monk, to having previously left to join the monastics of another religion, to being an animal, to being a matricide, to being a patricide, to being a murderer of a perfected one, to having raped a nun, to having caused a schism in the Sangha, to having caused the Buddha to bleed, or to being a gynandromorph before the robe-cloth is offered. Then the Sangha becomes the owner of that robe-cloth.

1323. 1323

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho भिक्खुbhik·khu उप्पन्नेup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re अभाजितेa·bhā·ji·te पक्कमति,pak·ka·ma·ti सन्तेsan·te पतिरूपेpa·ti·rū·pe गाहकेgā·ha·ke दातब्बं।dā·tab·baṃ

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭho bhikkhu uppanne cīvare abhājite pakkamati, sante patirūpe gāhake dātabbaṁ.

      It may be that, after robe-cloth has been offered but before it’s distributed, a monk who’s completed the rains residence leaves. If there’s anyone suitable to receive the robe-cloth, it should be given.

1324. 1324

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho भिक्खुbhik·khu उप्पन्नेup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re अभाजितेa·bhā·ji·te विब्भमति,vib·bha·ma·ti कालंkā·laṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti सिक्खंsik·khaṃ पच्चक्खातकोpac·cak·khā·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti अन्तिमवत्थुंan·ti·ma·vat·thuṃ अज्झापन्नकोaj·jhā·pan·na·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho सामी।sā·mī

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭho bhikkhu uppanne cīvare abhājite vibbhamati, kālaṁ karoti, sāmaṇero paṭijānāti, sikkhaṁ paccakkhātako paṭijānāti, antimavatthuṁ ajjhāpannako paṭijānāti, saṅgho sāmī.

      It may be that, after robe-cloth has been offered but before it’s distributed, a monk who’s completed the rains residence disrobes, dies, admits to being a novice monk, admits to having renounced the training, or admits to having committed the worst kind of offense. Then the Sangha becomes the owner of that robe-cloth.

1325. 1325

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho भिक्खुbhik·khu उप्पन्नेup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re अभाजितेa·bhā·ji·te उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko पटिजानाति।pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti खित्तचित्तोkhit·ta·cit·to पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti वेदनाट्टोve·da·nāṭ·ṭo पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अदस्सनेa·das·sa·ne उक्खित्तकोuk·khit·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अप्पटिकम्मेap·pa·ṭi·kam·me उक्खित्तकोuk·khit·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti पापिकायpā·pi·kā·ya दिट्ठियाdiṭ·ṭhi·yā अप्पटिनिस्सग्गेap·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·ge उक्खित्तकोuk·khit·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti सन्तेsan·te पतिरूपेpa·ti·rū·pe गाहकेgā·ha·ke दातब्बं।dā·tab·baṃ

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭho bhikkhu uppanne cīvare abhājite ummattako paṭijānāti. Khittacitto paṭijānāti, vedanāṭṭo paṭijānāti, āpattiyā adassane ukkhittako paṭijānāti, āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhittako paṭijānāti, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittako paṭijānāti, sante patirūpe gāhake dātabbaṁ.

      It may be that, after robe-cloth has been offered but before it’s distributed, a monk who’s completed the rains residence admits to being insane, to being deranged, to being overwhelmed by pain, to having been ejected for not recognizing an offense, to having been ejected for not making amends for an offense, or to having been ejected for not giving up a bad view. If there’s anyone suitable to receive the robe-cloth, it should be given.

1326. 1326

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठोvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭho भिक्खुbhik·khu उप्पन्नेup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re अभाजितेa·bhā·ji·te पण्डकोpaṇ·ḍa·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti थेय्यसंवासकोthey·ya·saṃ·vā·sa·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti तित्थियपक्कन्तकोtit·thi·ya·pak·kan·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti तिरच्छानगतोti·rac·chā·na·ga·to पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti मातुघातकोmā·tu·ghā·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti पितुघातकोpi·tu·ghā·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti अरहन्तघातकोa·ra·han·ta·ghā·ta·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti भिक्खुनिदूसकोbhik·khu·ni·dū·sa·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti सङ्घभेदकोsaṅ·gha·bhe·da·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti लोहितुप्पादकोlo·hi·tup·pā·da·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti उभतोब्यञ्जनकोu·bha·tob·yañ·ja·na·ko पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho सामी।sā·mī

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭho bhikkhu uppanne cīvare abhājite paṇḍako paṭijānāti, theyyasaṁvāsako paṭijānāti, titthiyapakkantako paṭijānāti, tiracchānagato paṭijānāti, mātughātako paṭijānāti, pitughātako paṭijānāti, arahantaghātako paṭijānāti, bhikkhunidūsako paṭijānāti, saṅghabhedako paṭijānāti, lohituppādako paṭijānāti, ubhatobyañjanako paṭijānāti, saṅgho sāmī.

      It may be that, after robe-cloth has been offered but before it’s distributed, a monk who’s completed the rains residence admits to being a <i lang='pi' translate='no'>paṇḍaka</i>, to being a fake monk, to having previously left to join the monastics of another religion, to being an animal, to being a matricide, to being a patricide, to being a murderer of a perfected one, to having raped a nun, to having caused a schism in the Sangha, to having caused the Buddha to bleed, or to being a gynandromorph. Then the Sangha becomes the owner of that robe-cloth.”

1327. 1327

      29। सङ्घेभिन्नेचीवरुप्पादकथाsaṅ·ghe·bhin·ne·cī·va·rup·pā·da·ka·thā

      29. Saṅghebhinnecīvaruppādakathā

      29. Discussion of robe-cloth that is offered when the Sangha is divided

1328. 1328

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठानंvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अनुप्पन्नेa·nup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re सङ्घोsaṅ·gho भिज्जति।bhij·ja·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭhānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ anuppanne cīvare saṅgho bhijjati.

      “It may be that the Sangha splits before robe-cloth is offered to those monks who have completed the rains residence.

1329. 1329

      तत्थtat·tha मनुस्साma·nus·sā एकस्मिंe·kas·miṃ पक्खेpak·khe उदकंu·da·kaṃ देन्ति,den·ti एकस्मिंe·kas·miṃ पक्खेpak·khe चीवरंcī·va·raṃ देन्ति—den·ti

      Tattha manussā ekasmiṁ pakkhe udakaṁ denti, ekasmiṁ pakkhe cīvaraṁ denti—

      If people then give water to one side and robe-cloth to the other, saying,

1330. 1330

      सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देमाति।de·mā·ti

      saṅghassa demāti.

      ‘We give to the Sangha,’

1331. 1331

      सङ्घस्सेवेतं।saṅ·ghas·se·ve·taṃ

      Saṅghassevetaṁ.

      it’s all for the Sangha.

1332. 1332

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठानंvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अनुप्पन्नेa·nup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re सङ्घोsaṅ·gho भिज्जति।bhij·ja·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭhānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ anuppanne cīvare saṅgho bhijjati.

      It may be that the Sangha splits before robe-cloth is offered to those monks who have completed the rains residence.

1333. 1333

      तत्थtat·tha मनुस्साma·nus·sā एकस्मिंe·kas·miṃ पक्खेpak·khe उदकंu·da·kaṃ देन्ति,den·ti तस्मिंयेवtas·miṃ·ye·va पक्खेpak·khe चीवरंcī·va·raṃ देन्ति—den·ti

      Tattha manussā ekasmiṁ pakkhe udakaṁ denti, tasmiṁyeva pakkhe cīvaraṁ denti—

      If people then give water and robe-cloth to the same side, saying,

1334. 1334

      सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देमाति।de·mā·ti

      saṅghassa demāti.

      ‘We give to the Sangha,’

1335. 1335

      सङ्घस्सेवेतं।saṅ·ghas·se·ve·taṃ

      Saṅghassevetaṁ.

      it’s all for the Sangha.

1336. 1336

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठानंvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अनुप्पन्नेa·nup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re सङ्घोsaṅ·gho भिज्जति।bhij·ja·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭhānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ anuppanne cīvare saṅgho bhijjati.

      It may be that the Sangha splits before robe-cloth is offered to those monks who have completed the rains residence.

1337. 1337

      तत्थtat·tha मनुस्साma·nus·sā एकस्मिंe·kas·miṃ पक्खेpak·khe उदकंu·da·kaṃ देन्ति,den·ti एकस्मिंe·kas·miṃ पक्खेpak·khe चीवरंcī·va·raṃ देन्ति—den·ti

      Tattha manussā ekasmiṁ pakkhe udakaṁ denti, ekasmiṁ pakkhe cīvaraṁ denti—

      If people then give water to one side and robe-cloth to the other, saying,

1338. 1338

      पक्खस्सpak·khas·sa देमाति।de·mā·ti

      pakkhassa demāti.

      ‘We give to this side,’

1339. 1339

      पक्खस्सेवेतं।pak·khas·se·ve·taṃ

      Pakkhassevetaṁ.

      it’s all for that side.

1340. 1340

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठानंvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अनुप्पन्नेa·nup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re सङ्घोsaṅ·gho भिज्जति।bhij·ja·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭhānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ anuppanne cīvare saṅgho bhijjati.

      It may be that the Sangha splits before robe-cloth is offered to those monks who have completed the rains residence.

1341. 1341

      तत्थtat·tha मनुस्साma·nus·sā एकस्मिंe·kas·miṃ पक्खेpak·khe उदकंu·da·kaṃ देन्ति,den·ti तस्मिंयेवtas·miṃ·ye·va पक्खेpak·khe चीवरंcī·va·raṃ देन्ति—den·ti

      Tattha manussā ekasmiṁ pakkhe udakaṁ denti, tasmiṁyeva pakkhe cīvaraṁ denti—

      If people then give water and robe-cloth to the same side, saying,

1342. 1342

      पक्खस्सpak·khas·sa देमाति।de·mā·ti

      pakkhassa demāti.

      ‘We give to this side,’

1343. 1343

      पक्खस्सेवेतं।pak·khas·se·ve·taṃ

      Pakkhassevetaṁ.

      it’s all for that side.

1344. 1344

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वस्संवुट्ठानंvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ उप्पन्नेup·pan·ne चीवरेcī·va·re अभाजितेa·bhā·ji·te सङ्घोsaṅ·gho भिज्जति।bhij·ja·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, vassaṁvuṭṭhānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ uppanne cīvare abhājite saṅgho bhijjati.

      It may be that the Sangha splits before the robe-cloth is distributed but after it was offered to those monks who have completed the rains residence.

1345. 1345

      सब्बेसंsab·be·saṃ समकंsa·ma·kaṃ भाजेतब्बन्”ति।bhā·je·tab·ban

      Sabbesaṁ samakaṁ bhājetabban”ti.

      The robe-cloth is then to be distributed equally to everyone.”

1346. 1346

      30। दुग्गहितसुग्गहितादिकथाdug·ga·hi·ta·sug·ga·hi·tā·di·ka·thā

      30. Duggahitasuggahitādikathā

      30. Discussion of what is properly and improperly taken

1347. 1347

      तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā रेवतोre·va·to अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no हत्थेhat·the आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to सारिपुत्तस्सsā·ri·put·tas·sa चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पाहेसि—pā·he·si

      Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā revato aññatarassa bhikkhuno hatthe āyasmato sāriputtassa cīvaraṁ pāhesi—

      On one occasion, Venerable Revata gave a robe to a monk to take to Venerable Sāriputta, saying,

1348. 1348

      “इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ थेरस्सthe·ras·sa देही”ति।de·hī

      “imaṁ cīvaraṁ therassa dehī”ti.

      “Please give this robe to the elder.”

1349. 1349

      अथa·tha खोkho सोso भिक्खुbhik·khu अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to रेवतस्सre·va·tas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā तंtaṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ अग्गहेसि।ag·ga·he·si

      Atha kho so bhikkhu antarāmagge āyasmato revatassa vissāsā taṁ cīvaraṁ aggahesi.

      While on his way, that monk took that robe on trust from Revata.

1350. 1350

      अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā रेवतोre·va·to आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā सारिपुत्तेनsā·ri·put·te·na समागन्त्वाsa·mā·gan·tvā पुच्छि—puc·chi

      Atha kho āyasmā revato āyasmatā sāriputtena samāgantvā pucchi—

      Later, when Revata met Sāriputta, Revata asked him

1351. 1351

      “अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te थेरस्सthe·ras·sa चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पाहेसिं।pā·he·siṃ

      “ahaṁ, bhante, therassa cīvaraṁ pāhesiṁ.

      whether he had received that robe.

1352. 1352

      सम्पत्तंsam·pat·taṃ तंtaṃ चीवरन्”ति?cī·va·ran

      Sampattaṁ taṁ cīvaran”ti?

      (Pāli only)

1353. 1353

      “नाहंnā·haṃ तं,taṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पस्सामी”ति।pas·sā·mī

      “Nāhaṁ taṁ, āvuso, cīvaraṁ passāmī”ti.

      He replied that he had not.

1354. 1354

      अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā रेवतोre·va·to तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

      Atha kho āyasmā revato taṁ bhikkhuṁ etadavoca—

      Revata then asked the other monk,

1355. 1355

      “अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to हत्थेhat·the थेरस्सthe·ras·sa चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पाहेसिं।pā·he·siṃ

      “ahaṁ, āvuso, āyasmato hatthe therassa cīvaraṁ pāhesiṁ.

      “I gave you a robe to take to the elder.

1356. 1356

      कहंka·haṃ तंtaṃ चीवरन्”ति?cī·va·ran

      Kahaṁ taṁ cīvaran”ti?

      Where’s that robe?”

1357. 1357

      “अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to विस्सासाvis·sā·sā तंtaṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ अग्गहेसिन्”ति।ag·ga·he·sin

      “Ahaṁ, bhante, āyasmato vissāsā taṁ cīvaraṁ aggahesin”ti.

      “I took it on trust from you.”

1358. 1358

      भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

      Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

      They told the Buddha.

1359. 1359

      “इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa हत्थेhat·the चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पहिणति—pa·hi·ṇa·ti

      “Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe cīvaraṁ pahiṇati—

      “It may be that a monk gives a robe to a monk to take to yet another monk, saying,

1360. 1360

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa देही’ति।de·hī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dehī’ti.

      ‘Give this robe to so-and-so.’

1361. 1361

      सोso अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge योyo पहिणतिpa·hi·ṇa·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      So antarāmagge yo pahiṇati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      If, while on his way, he takes it on trust from the sender,

1362. 1362

      सुग्गहितं।sug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Suggahitaṁ.

      it’s properly taken.

1363. 1363

      यस्सyas·sa पहिय्यतिpa·hiy·ya·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      Yassa pahiyyati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      But if he takes it on trust from the intended recipient,

1364. 1364

      दुग्गहितं।dug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Duggahitaṁ.

      it’s improperly taken.

1365. 1365

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa हत्थेhat·the चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पहिणति—pa·hi·ṇa·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe cīvaraṁ pahiṇati—

      It may be that a monk gives a robe to a monk to take to yet another monk, saying,

1366. 1366

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa देही’ति।de·hī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dehī’ti.

      ‘Give this robe to so-and-so.’

1367. 1367

      सोso अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge यस्सyas·sa पहिय्यतिpa·hiy·ya·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      So antarāmagge yassa pahiyyati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      If, while on his way, he takes it on trust from the intended recipient,

1368. 1368

      दुग्गहितं।dug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Duggahitaṁ.

      it’s improperly taken.

1369. 1369

      योyo पहिणतिpa·hi·ṇa·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      Yo pahiṇati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      But if he takes it on trust from the sender,

1370. 1370

      सुग्गहितं।sug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Suggahitaṁ.

      it’s properly taken.

1371. 1371

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa हत्थेhat·the चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पहिणति—pa·hi·ṇa·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe cīvaraṁ pahiṇati—

      It may be that a monk gives a robe to a monk to take to yet another monk, saying,

1372. 1372

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa देही’ति।de·hī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dehī’ti.

      ‘Give this robe to so-and-so.’

1373. 1373

      सोso अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge सुणाति—su·ṇā·ti

      So antarāmagge suṇāti—

      If, while on his way,

1374. 1374

      ‘योyo पहिणतिpa·hi·ṇa·ti सोso कालङ्कतो’ति।kā·laṅ·ka·to

      ‘yo pahiṇati so kālaṅkato’ti.

      he hears that the sender has died

1375. 1375

      तस्सtas·sa मतकचीवरंma·ta·ka·cī·va·raṃ अधिट्ठाति।a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti

      Tassa matakacīvaraṁ adhiṭṭhāti.

      and he determines it as a robe inherited from the sender,

1376. 1376

      स्वाधिट्ठितं।svā·dhiṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

      Svādhiṭṭhitaṁ.

      it’s properly determined.

1377. 1377

      यस्सyas·sa पहिय्यतिpa·hiy·ya·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      Yassa pahiyyati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      But if he takes it on trust from the intended recipient,

1378. 1378

      दुग्गहितं।dug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Duggahitaṁ.

      it’s improperly taken.

1379. 1379

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa हत्थेhat·the चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पहिणति—pa·hi·ṇa·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe cīvaraṁ pahiṇati—

      It may be that a monk gives a robe to a monk to take to yet another monk, saying,

1380. 1380

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa देही’ति।de·hī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dehī’ti.

      ‘Give this robe to so-and-so.’

1381. 1381

      सोso अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge सुणाति—su·ṇā·ti

      So antarāmagge suṇāti—

      If, while on his way,

1382. 1382

      ‘यस्सyas·sa पहिय्यतिpa·hiy·ya·ti सोso कालङ्कतो’ति।kā·laṅ·ka·to

      ‘yassa pahiyyati so kālaṅkato’ti.

      he hears that the intended recipient has died

1383. 1383

      तस्सtas·sa मतकचीवरंma·ta·ka·cī·va·raṃ अधिट्ठाति।a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti

      Tassa matakacīvaraṁ adhiṭṭhāti.

      and he determines it as a robe inherited from the intended recipient,

1384. 1384

      द्वाधिट्ठितं।dvā·dhiṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

      Dvādhiṭṭhitaṁ.

      it’s improperly determined.

1385. 1385

      योyo पहिणतिpa·hi·ṇa·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      Yo pahiṇati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      But if he takes it on trust from the sender,

1386. 1386

      सुग्गहितं।sug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Suggahitaṁ.

      it’s properly taken.

1387. 1387

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa हत्थेhat·the चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पहिणति—pa·hi·ṇa·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe cīvaraṁ pahiṇati—

      It may be that a monk gives a robe to a monk to take to yet another monk, saying,

1388. 1388

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa देही’ति।de·hī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dehī’ti.

      ‘Give this robe to so-and-so.’

1389. 1389

      सोso अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge सुणाति—su·ṇā·ti

      So antarāmagge suṇāti—

      If, while on his way,

1390. 1390

      ‘उभोu·bho कालङ्कता’ति।kā·laṅ·ka·tā

      ‘ubho kālaṅkatā’ti.

      he hears that both have died

1391. 1391

      योyo पहिणतिpa·hi·ṇa·ti तस्सtas·sa मतकचीवरंma·ta·ka·cī·va·raṃ अधिट्ठाति।a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti

      Yo pahiṇati tassa matakacīvaraṁ adhiṭṭhāti.

      and he determines it as a robe inherited from the sender,

1392. 1392

      स्वाधिट्ठितं।svā·dhiṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

      Svādhiṭṭhitaṁ.

      it’s properly determined.

1393. 1393

      यस्सyas·sa पहिय्यतिpa·hiy·ya·ti तस्सtas·sa मतकचीवरंma·ta·ka·cī·va·raṃ अधिट्ठाति।a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti

      Yassa pahiyyati tassa matakacīvaraṁ adhiṭṭhāti.

      But if he determines it as a robe inherited from the intended recipient,

1394. 1394

      द्वाधिट्ठितं।dvā·dhiṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

      Dvādhiṭṭhitaṁ.

      it’s improperly determined.

1395. 1395

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa हत्थेhat·the चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पहिणति—pa·hi·ṇa·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe cīvaraṁ pahiṇati—

      It may be that a monk gives a robe to a monk to take to yet another monk, saying,

1396. 1396

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa दम्मी’ति।dam·mī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dammī’ti.

      ‘I give this robe to so-and-so.’

1397. 1397

      सोso अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge योyo पहिणतिpa·hi·ṇa·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      So antarāmagge yo pahiṇati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      If, while on his way, he takes it on trust from the sender,

1398. 1398

      दुग्गहितं।dug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Duggahitaṁ.

      it’s improperly taken.

1399. 1399

      यस्सyas·sa पहिय्यतिpa·hiy·ya·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      Yassa pahiyyati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      But if he takes it on trust from the intended recipient,

1400. 1400

      सुग्गहितं।sug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Suggahitaṁ.

      it’s properly taken.

1401. 1401

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa हत्थेhat·the चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पहिणति—pa·hi·ṇa·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe cīvaraṁ pahiṇati—

      It may be that a monk gives a robe to a monk to take to yet another monk, saying,

1402. 1402

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa दम्मी’ति।dam·mī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dammī’ti.

      ‘I give this robe to so-and-so.’

1403. 1403

      सोso अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge यस्सyas·sa पहिय्यतिpa·hiy·ya·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      So antarāmagge yassa pahiyyati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      If, while on his way, he takes it on trust from the intended recipient,

1404. 1404

      सुग्गहितं।sug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Suggahitaṁ.

      it’s properly taken.

1405. 1405

      योyo पहिणतिpa·hi·ṇa·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      Yo pahiṇati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      But if he takes it on trust from the sender,

1406. 1406

      दुग्गहितं।dug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Duggahitaṁ.

      it’s improperly taken.

1407. 1407

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa हत्थेhat·the चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पहिणति—pa·hi·ṇa·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe cīvaraṁ pahiṇati—

      It may be that a monk gives a robe to a monk to take to yet another monk, saying,

1408. 1408

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa दम्मी’ति।dam·mī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dammī’ti.

      ‘I give this robe to so-and-so.’

1409. 1409

      सोso अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge सुणाति—su·ṇā·ti

      So antarāmagge suṇāti—

      If, while on his way,

1410. 1410

      ‘योyo पहिणतिpa·hi·ṇa·ti सोso कालङ्कतो’ति।kā·laṅ·ka·to

      ‘yo pahiṇati so kālaṅkato’ti.

      he hears that the sender has died

1411. 1411

      तस्सtas·sa मतकचीवरंma·ta·ka·cī·va·raṃ अधिट्ठाति।a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti

      Tassa matakacīvaraṁ adhiṭṭhāti.

      and he determines it as a robe inherited from the sender,

1412. 1412

      द्वाधिट्ठितं।dvā·dhiṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

      Dvādhiṭṭhitaṁ.

      it’s improperly determined.

1413. 1413

      यस्सyas·sa पहिय्यतिpa·hiy·ya·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      Yassa pahiyyati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      But if he takes it on trust from the intended recipient,

1414. 1414

      सुग्गहितं।sug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Suggahitaṁ.

      it’s properly taken.

1415. 1415

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa हत्थेhat·the चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पहिणति—pa·hi·ṇa·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe cīvaraṁ pahiṇati—

      It may be that a monk gives a robe to a monk to take to yet another monk, saying,

1416. 1416

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa दम्मी’ति।dam·mī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dammī’ti.

      ‘I give this robe to so-and-so.’

1417. 1417

      सोso अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge सुणाति—su·ṇā·ti

      So antarāmagge suṇāti—

      If, while on his way,

1418. 1418

      ‘यस्सyas·sa पहिय्यतिpa·hiy·ya·ti सोso कालङ्कतो’ति।kā·laṅ·ka·to

      ‘yassa pahiyyati so kālaṅkato’ti.

      he hears that the intended recipient has died

1419. 1419

      तस्सtas·sa मतकचीवरंma·ta·ka·cī·va·raṃ अधिट्ठाति।a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti

      Tassa matakacīvaraṁ adhiṭṭhāti.

      and he determines it as a robe inherited from the intended recipient,

1420. 1420

      स्वाधिट्ठितं।svā·dhiṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

      Svādhiṭṭhitaṁ.

      it’s properly determined.

1421. 1421

      योyo पहिणतिpa·hi·ṇa·ti तस्सtas·sa विस्सासाvis·sā·sā गण्हाति।gaṇ·hā·ti

      Yo pahiṇati tassa vissāsā gaṇhāti.

      But if he takes it on trust from the sender,

1422. 1422

      दुग्गहितं।dug·ga·hi·taṃ

      Duggahitaṁ.

      it’s improperly taken.

1423. 1423

      इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुस्सbhik·khus·sa हत्थेhat·the चीवरंcī·va·raṃ पहिणति—pa·hi·ṇa·ti

      Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhussa hatthe cīvaraṁ pahiṇati—

      It may be that a monk gives a robe to a monk to take to yet another monk, saying,

1424. 1424

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa दम्मी’ति।dam·mī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dammī’ti.

      ‘I give this robe to so-and-so.’

1425. 1425

      सोso अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge सुणातिsu·ṇā·ti ‘उभोu·bho कालङ्कता’ति।kā·laṅ·ka·tā

      So antarāmagge suṇāti ‘ubho kālaṅkatā’ti.

      If, while on his way, he hears that both have died

1426. 1426

      योyo पहिणतिpa·hi·ṇa·ti तस्सtas·sa मतकचीवरंma·ta·ka·cī·va·raṃ अधिट्ठाति।a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti

      Yo pahiṇati tassa matakacīvaraṁ adhiṭṭhāti.

      and he determines it as a robe inherited from the sender,

1427. 1427

      द्वाधिट्ठितं।dvā·dhiṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

      Dvādhiṭṭhitaṁ.

      it’s improperly determined.

1428. 1428

      यस्सyas·sa पहिय्यतिpa·hiy·ya·ti तस्सtas·sa मतकचीवरंma·ta·ka·cī·va·raṃ अधिट्ठाति।a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti

      Yassa pahiyyati tassa matakacīvaraṁ adhiṭṭhāti.

      But if he determines it as a robe inherited from the intended recipient,

1429. 1429

      स्वाधिट्ठितं।svā·dhiṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

      Svādhiṭṭhitaṁ.

      it’s properly determined.”

1430. 1430

      31। अट्ठचीवरमातिकाaṭ·ṭha·cī·va·ra·mā·ti·kā

      31. Aṭṭhacīvaramātikā

      31. Eight key phrases on robe-cloth

1431. 1431

      अट्ठिमा,aṭ·ṭhi·mā भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मातिकाmā·ti·kā चीवरस्सcī·va·ras·sa उप्पादाय—up·pā·dā·ya

      Aṭṭhimā, bhikkhave, mātikā cīvarassa uppādāya—

      “Monks, there are these eight key phrases for the giving of robe-cloth:

1432. 1432

      सीमायsī·mā·ya देति,de·ti कतिकायka·ti·kā·ya देति,de·ti भिक्खापञ्ञत्तियाbhik·khā·pañ·ñat·ti·yā देति,de·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देति,de·ti उभतोसङ्घस्सu·bha·to·saṅ·ghas·sa देति,de·ti वस्संवुट्ठसङ्घस्सvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭha·saṅ·ghas·sa देति,de·ti आदिस्सā·dis·sa देति,de·ti पुग्गलस्सpug·ga·las·sa देति।de·ti

      sīmāya deti, katikāya deti, bhikkhāpaññattiyā deti, saṅghassa deti, ubhatosaṅghassa deti, vassaṁvuṭṭhasaṅghassa deti, ādissa deti, puggalassa deti.

      someone gives within a monastery zone; someone gives to a recipient who has made an agreement; someone gives where alms are prepared; someone gives to the Sangha; someone gives to both Sanghas; someone gives to a sangha that has completed the rainy-season residence; someone gives according to a specification; someone gives to an individual.

1433. 1433

      सीमायsī·mā·ya देति—de·ti

      Sīmāya deti—

      Someone gives within a monastery zone:

1434. 1434

      यावतिकाyā·va·ti·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū अन्तोसीमगताan·to·sī·ma·ga·tā तेहिte·hi भाजेतब्बं।bhā·je·tab·baṃ

      yāvatikā bhikkhū antosīmagatā tehi bhājetabbaṁ.

      it should be distributed by the monks within that zone.

1435. 1435

      कतिकायka·ti·kā·ya देति—de·ti

      Katikāya deti—

      Someone gives to a recipient who has made an agreement:

1436. 1436

      सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā आवासाā·vā·sā समानलाभाsa·mā·na·lā·bhā होन्तिhon·ti एकस्मिंe·kas·miṃ आवासेā·vā·se दिन्नेdin·ne सब्बत्थsab·bat·tha दिन्नंdin·naṃ होति।ho·ti

      sambahulā āvāsā samānalābhā honti ekasmiṁ āvāse dinne sabbattha dinnaṁ hoti.

      when a number of monasteries have the same material support, then when it’s given in one monastery, it’s given to all.

1437. 1437

      भिक्खापञ्ञत्तियाbhik·khā·pañ·ñat·ti·yā देति,de·ti यत्थyat·tha सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa धुवकाराdhu·va·kā·rā करिय्यन्ति,ka·riy·yan·ti तत्थtat·tha देति।de·ti

      Bhikkhāpaññattiyā deti, yattha saṅghassa dhuvakārā kariyyanti, tattha deti.

      Someone gives where alms are prepared: someone gives where the Sangha is regularly working.

1438. 1438

      सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa देति,de·ti सम्मुखीभूतेनsam·mu·khī·bhū·te·na सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na भाजेतब्बं।bhā·je·tab·baṃ

      Saṅghassa deti, sammukhībhūtena saṅghena bhājetabbaṁ.

      Someone gives to the Sangha: the present Sangha should distribute it.

1439. 1439

      उभतोसङ्घस्सu·bha·to·saṅ·ghas·sa देति,de·ti बहुकापिba·hu·kā·pi भिक्खूbhik·khū होन्ति,hon·ti एकाe·kā भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī होति,ho·ti उपड्ढंu·paḍ·ḍhaṃ दातब्बं,dā·tab·baṃ बहुकापिba·hu·kā·pi भिक्खुनियोbhik·khu·ni·yo होन्ति,hon·ti एकोe·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu होति,ho·ti उपड्ढंu·paḍ·ḍhaṃ दातब्बं।dā·tab·baṃ

      Ubhatosaṅghassa deti, bahukāpi bhikkhū honti, ekā bhikkhunī hoti, upaḍḍhaṁ dātabbaṁ, bahukāpi bhikkhuniyo honti, eko bhikkhu hoti, upaḍḍhaṁ dātabbaṁ.

      Someone gives to both Sanghas: even when there are many monks and just a single nun, she should be given half; even when there are many nuns and just a single monk, he should be given half.

1440. 1440

      वस्संवुट्ठसङ्घस्सvas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭha·saṅ·ghas·sa देति,de·ti यावतिकाyā·va·ti·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तस्मिंtas·miṃ आवासेā·vā·se वस्संवुट्ठा,vas·saṃ·vuṭ·ṭhā तेहिte·hi भाजेतब्बं।bhā·je·tab·baṃ

      Vassaṁvuṭṭhasaṅghassa deti, yāvatikā bhikkhū tasmiṁ āvāse vassaṁvuṭṭhā, tehi bhājetabbaṁ.

      Someone gives to a sangha that has completed the rainy-season residence: it’s to be distributed by the monks who have completed the rains residence in that monastery.

1441. 1441

      आदिस्सā·dis·sa देति,de·ti यागुयाyā·gu·yā वाvā भत्तेbhat·te वाvā खादनीयेkhā·da·nī·ye वाvā चीवरेcī·va·re वाvā सेनासनेse·nā·sa·ne वाvā भेसज्जेbhe·saj·je वा।vā

      Ādissa deti, yāguyā vā bhatte vā khādanīye vā cīvare vā senāsane vā bhesajje vā.

      Someone gives according to a specification: relating to congee, a meal, fresh food, robe-cloth, a dwelling, or medicine.

1442. 1442

      पुग्गलस्सpug·ga·las·sa देति—de·ti

      Puggalassa deti—

      Someone gives to an individual:

1443. 1443

      ‘इमंi·maṃ चीवरंcī·va·raṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa दम्मी’”ति।dam·mī

      ‘imaṁ cīvaraṁ itthannāmassa dammī’”ti.

      ‘I give this robe-cloth to so-and-so.’”

1444. 1444

      चीवरक्खन्धकोcī·va·rak·khan·dha·ko अट्ठमो।aṭ·ṭha·mo

      Cīvarakkhandhako aṭṭhamo.

      The eighth chapter on robes is finished.

1445. 1445

      तस्सुद्दानंtas·sud·dā·naṃ

      Tassuddānaṁ

      This is the summary:

1446. 1446

      राजगहकोrā·ja·ga·ha·ko नेगमो,ne·ga·mo

      Rājagahako negamo,

      “The householder association of Rājagaha,

1447. 1447

      दिस्वाdis·vā वेसालियंve·sā·li·yaṃ गणिं;ga·ṇiṃ

      disvā vesāliyaṁ gaṇiṁ;

      Having seen the courtesan in Vesālī;

1448. 1448

      पुनpu·na राजगहंrā·ja·ga·haṃ गन्त्वा,gan·tvā

      Puna rājagahaṁ gantvā,

      Returned to Rājagaha,

1449. 1449

      रञ्ञोrañ·ño तंtaṃ पटिवेदयि।pa·ṭi·ve·da·yi

      rañño taṁ paṭivedayi.

      Announced it to the king.

1450. 1450

      पुत्तोput·to सालवतिकाय,sā·la·va·ti·kā·ya

      Putto sālavatikāya,

      The son of Sālavatī,

1451. 1451

      अभयस्सa·bha·yas·sa हिhi अत्रजो;at·ra·jo

      abhayassa hi atrajo;

      But the child of Abhaya;

1452. 1452

      जीवतीतिjī·va·tī·ti कुमारेन,ku·mā·re·na

      Jīvatīti kumārena,

      Because the boy lived,

1453. 1453

      सङ्खातोsaṅ·khā·to जीवकोjī·va·ko इति।i·ti

      saṅkhāto jīvako iti.

      He was called Jīvaka.

1454. 1454

      सोso हिhi तक्कसीलंtak·ka·sī·laṃ गन्त्वा,gan·tvā

      So hi takkasīlaṁ gantvā,

      He went to Takkasilā,

1455. 1455

      उग्गहेत्वाug·ga·het·vā महाभिसो;ma·hā·bhi·so

      uggahetvā mahābhiso;

      Having learned, a great physician;

1456. 1456

      सत्तवस्सिकआबाधं,sat·ta·vas·si·ka·ā·bā·dhaṃ

      Sattavassikaābādhaṁ,

      A seven-year illness,

1457. 1457

      नत्थुकम्मेनnat·thu·kam·me·na नासयि।nā·sa·yi

      natthukammena nāsayi.

      He cured by nose treatment.

1458. 1458

      रञ्ञोrañ·ño भगन्दलाबाधं,bha·gan·da·lā·bā·dhaṃ

      Rañño bhagandalābādhaṁ,

      The king’s hemorrhoids,

1459. 1459

      आलेपेनā·le·pe·na अपाकड्ढि;a·pā·kaḍ·ḍhi

      ālepena apākaḍḍhi;

      Applied ointment;

1460. 1460

      ममञ्चma·mañ·ca इत्थागारञ्च,it·thā·gā·rañ·ca

      Mamañca itthāgārañca,

      Attended on me and the harem,

1461. 1461

      बुद्धसङ्घंbud·dha·saṅ·ghaṃ चुपट्ठहि।cu·paṭ·ṭha·hi

      buddhasaṅghaṁ cupaṭṭhahi.

      And the Buddha and the Sangha.

1462. 1462

      राजगहकोrā·ja·ga·ha·ko चca सेट्ठि,seṭ·ṭhi

      Rājagahako ca seṭṭhi,

      And the merchant of Rājagaha,

1463. 1463

      अन्तगण्ठिan·ta·gaṇ·ṭhi तिकिच्छितं;ti·kic·chi·taṃ

      antagaṇṭhi tikicchitaṁ;

      Treated the twisted gut;

1464. 1464

      पज्जोतस्सpaj·jo·tas·sa महारोगं,ma·hā·ro·gaṃ

      Pajjotassa mahārogaṁ,

      The great illness of Pajjota,

1465. 1465

      घतपानेनgha·ta·pā·ne·na नासयि।nā·sa·yi

      ghatapānena nāsayi.

      He cured with a drink of ghee.

1466. 1466

      अधिकारञ्चa·dhi·kā·rañ·ca सिवेय्यं,si·vey·yaṃ

      Adhikārañca siveyyaṁ,

      And service, valuable cloth,

1467. 1467

      अभिसन्नंa·bhi·san·naṃ सिनेहति;si·ne·ha·ti

      abhisannaṁ sinehati;

      Full of, he oiled;

1468. 1468

      तीहिtī·hi उप्पलहत्थेहि,up·pa·la·hat·the·hi

      Tīhi uppalahatthehi,

      With three handfuls of water-lily flowers,

1469. 1469

      समत्तिंसविरेचनं।sa·mat·tiṃ·sa·vi·re·ca·naṃ

      samattiṁsavirecanaṁ.

      Thirty purgings exactly.

1470. 1470

      पकतत्तंpa·ka·tat·taṃ वरंva·raṃ याचि,yā·ci

      Pakatattaṁ varaṁ yāci,

      He asked for a blameless favor,

1471. 1471

      सिवेय्यञ्चsi·vey·yañ·ca पटिग्गहि;pa·ṭig·ga·hi

      siveyyañca paṭiggahi;

      And he received the valuable cloths;

1472. 1472

      चीवरञ्चcī·va·rañ·ca गिहिदानं,gi·hi·dā·naṃ

      Cīvarañca gihidānaṁ,

      And robes given by householders,

1473. 1473

      अनुञ्ञासिa·nuñ·ñā·si तथागतो।ta·thā·ga·to

      anuññāsi tathāgato.

      Was allowed by the Buddha.

1474. 1474

      राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he जनपदे,ja·na·pa·de

      Rājagahe janapade,

      In Rājagaha, in the country,

1475. 1475

      बहुंba·huṃ उप्पज्जिup·paj·ji चीवरं;cī·va·raṃ

      bahuṁ uppajji cīvaraṁ;

      Many robes were given;

1476. 1476

      पावारोpā·vā·ro कोसियञ्चेव,ko·si·yañ·ce·va

      Pāvāro kosiyañceva,

      A fleecy robe, and silken,

1477. 1477

      कोजवोko·ja·vo अड्ढकासिकं।aḍ·ḍha·kā·si·kaṃ

      kojavo aḍḍhakāsikaṁ.

      Woolen fleecy robe, valuable Kāsi cloth.

1478. 1478

      उच्चावचाuc·cā·va·cā चca सन्तुट्ठि,san·tuṭ·ṭhi

      Uccāvacā ca santuṭṭhi,

      And various kinds, contented,

1479. 1479

      नागमेसागमेसुंnā·ga·me·sā·ga·me·suṃ च;ca

      nāgamesāgamesuṁ ca;

      Didn’t wait, and did wait;

1480. 1480

      पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ पच्छाpac·chā सदिसा,sa·di·sā

      Paṭhamaṁ pacchā sadisā,

      First, after, together,

1481. 1481

      कतिकाka·ti·kā चca पटिहरुं।pa·ṭi·ha·ruṃ

      katikā ca paṭiharuṁ.

      And agreement, took it back.

1482. 1482

      भण्डागारंbhaṇ·ḍā·gā·raṃ अगुत्तञ्च,a·gut·tañ·ca

      Bhaṇḍāgāraṁ aguttañca,

      Storeroom, and not looked after,

1483. 1483

      वुट्ठापेन्तिvuṭ·ṭhā·pen·ti तथेवta·the·va च;ca

      vuṭṭhāpenti tatheva ca;

      And just so they dismissed;

1484. 1484

      उस्सन्नंus·san·naṃ कोलाहलञ्च,ko·lā·ha·lañ·ca

      Ussannaṁ kolāhalañca,

      Much, and racket,

1485. 1485

      कथंka·thaṃ भाजेbhā·je कथंka·thaṃ ददे।da·de

      kathaṁ bhāje kathaṁ dade.

      How should one distribute, what should one give.

1486. 1486

      सकातिरेकभागेन,sa·kā·ti·re·ka·bhā·ge·na

      Sakātirekabhāgena,

      His own, with an extra share,

1487. 1487

      पटिवीसोpa·ṭi·vī·so कथंka·thaṃ ददे;da·de

      paṭivīso kathaṁ dade;

      How should a share be given;

1488. 1488

      छकणेनcha·ka·ṇe·na सीतुदका,sī·tu·da·kā

      Chakaṇena sītudakā,

      With dung, cold water,

1489. 1489

      उत्तरितुut·ta·ri·tu नna जानरे।jā·na·re

      uttaritu na jānare.

      Boiled over, they did not know.

1490. 1490

      ओरोपेन्ताo·ro·pen·tā भाजनञ्च,bhā·ja·nañ·ca

      Oropentā bhājanañca,

      Tilting, and vessel,

1491. 1491

      पातियाpā·ti·yā चca छमायcha·mā·ya च;ca

      pātiyā ca chamāya ca;

      And in a basin, and on the ground;

1492. 1492

      उपचिकाu·pa·ci·kā मज्झेmaj·jhe जीरन्ति,jī·ran·ti

      Upacikā majjhe jīranti,

      Termites, in the middle, they became worn,

1493. 1493

      एकतोe·ka·to पत्थिन्नेनpat·thin·ne·na च।ca

      ekato patthinnena ca.

      From one edge, and with starch.

1494. 1494

      फरुसाच्छिन्नच्छिबन्धा,pha·ru·sāc·chin·nac·chi·ban·dhā

      Pharusācchinnacchibandhā,

      Stiff, uncut, rectangles,

1495. 1495

      अद्दसासिad·da·sā·si उब्भण्डिते;ub·bhaṇ·ḍi·te

      addasāsi ubbhaṇḍite;

      He saw them loaded up;

1496. 1496

      वीमंसित्वाvī·maṃ·sit·vā सक्यमुनि,sak·ya·mu·ni

      Vīmaṁsitvā sakyamuni,

      Having tested, the Sakyan Sage,

1497. 1497

      अनुञ्ञासिa·nuñ·ñā·si तिचीवरं।ti·cī·va·raṃ

      anuññāsi ticīvaraṁ.

      Allowed three robes.

1498. 1498

      अञ्ञेनañ·ñe·na अतिरेकेन,a·ti·re·ke·na

      Aññena atirekena,

      With another extra,

1499. 1499

      उप्पज्जिup·paj·ji छिद्दमेवchid·da·me·va च;ca

      uppajji chiddameva ca;

      Was given, and just a hole;

1500. 1500

      चातुद्दीपोcā·tud·dī·po वरंva·raṃ याचि,yā·ci

      Cātuddīpo varaṁ yāci,

      Four-continent, she asked for a favor,

1501. 1501

      दातुंdā·tuṃ वस्सिकसाटिकं।vas·si·ka·sā·ṭi·kaṃ

      dātuṁ vassikasāṭikaṁ.

      To give a rainy-season robe.

1502. 1502

      आगन्तुगमिगिलानं,ā·gan·tu·ga·mi·gi·lā·naṃ

      Āgantugamigilānaṁ,

      And newly-arrived, departing, and sick,

1503. 1503

      उपट्ठाकञ्चu·paṭ·ṭhā·kañ·ca भेसज्जं;bhe·saj·jaṃ

      upaṭṭhākañca bhesajjaṁ;

      And nurse, medicine;

1504. 1504

      धुवंdhu·vaṃ उदकसाटिञ्च,u·da·ka·sā·ṭiñ·ca

      Dhuvaṁ udakasāṭiñca,

      Regular, and bathing robe,

1505. 1505

      पणीतंpa·ṇī·taṃ अतिखुद्दकं।a·ti·khud·da·kaṃ

      paṇītaṁ atikhuddakaṁ.

      Fine, too small.

1506. 1506

      थुल्लकच्छुमुखंthul·la·kac·chu·mu·khaṃ खोमं,kho·maṃ

      Thullakacchumukhaṁ khomaṁ,

      Carbuncles, washcloth, linen,

1507. 1507

      परिपुण्णंpa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ अधिट्ठानं;a·dhiṭ·ṭhā·naṃ

      paripuṇṇaṁ adhiṭṭhānaṁ;

      Enough, determining;

1508. 1508

      पच्छिमंpac·chi·maṃ कतोka·to गरुको,ga·ru·ko

      Pacchimaṁ kato garuko,

      Smallest, made heavy,

1509. 1509

      विकण्णोvi·kaṇ·ṇo सुत्तमोकिरि।sut·ta·mo·ki·ri

      vikaṇṇo suttamokiri.

      Deformed corner, frayed.

1510. 1510

      लुज्जन्तिluj·jan·ti नप्पहोन्ति,nap·pa·hon·ti

      Lujjanti nappahonti,

      They broke up, not enough,

1511. 1511

      चca अन्वाधिकंan·vā·dhi·kaṃ बहूनिba·hū·ni च;ca

      ca anvādhikaṁ bahūni ca;

      And a further supply, and much;

1512. 1512

      अन्धवनेan·dha·va·ne अस्सतिया,as·sa·ti·yā

      Andhavane assatiyā,

      In the Blind Men’s Grove, through absentmindedness,

1513. 1513

      एकोe·ko वस्संvas·saṃ उतुम्हिu·tum·hi च।ca

      eko vassaṁ utumhi ca.

      The rains by himself, and outside the rainy season.

1514. 1514

      द्वेdve भातुकाbhā·tu·kā राजगहे,rā·ja·ga·he

      Dve bhātukā rājagahe,

      Two brothers, in Rājagaha,

1515. 1515

      उपनन्दोu·pa·nan·do पुनpu·na द्विसु;dvi·su

      upanando puna dvisu;

      Upananda, again in two;

1516. 1516

      कुच्छिविकारोkuc·chi·vi·kā·ro गिलानो,gi·lā·no

      Kucchivikāro gilāno,

      Dysentery, illness,

1517. 1517

      उभोu·bho चेवce·va गिलानका।gi·lā·na·kā

      ubho ceva gilānakā.

      And just both, belonging to the sick.

1518. 1518

      नग्गाnag·gā कुसाku·sā वाकचीरं,vā·ka·cī·raṃ

      Naggā kusā vākacīraṁ,

      Naked, grass, bark,

1519. 1519

      फलकोpha·la·ko केसकम्बलं;ke·sa·kam·ba·laṃ

      phalako kesakambalaṁ;

      Bits of wood, human hair;

1520. 1520

      वाळउलूकपक्खञ्च,vā·ḷa·u·lū·ka·pak·khañ·ca

      Vāḷaulūkapakkhañca,

      Horse-hair, and owls’ wings,

1521. 1521

      अजिनंa·ji·naṃ अक्कनाळकं।ak·ka·nā·ḷa·kaṃ

      ajinaṁ akkanāḷakaṁ.

      Antelope, stalks of crown flower.

1522. 1522

      पोत्थकंpot·tha·kaṃ नीलपीतञ्च,nī·la·pī·tañ·ca

      Potthakaṁ nīlapītañca,

      Jute, and blue, yellow,

1523. 1523

      लोहितंlo·hi·taṃ मञ्जिट्ठेनmañ·jiṭ·ṭhe·na च;ca

      lohitaṁ mañjiṭṭhena ca;

      Red, and with magenta;

1524. 1524

      कण्हाkaṇ·hā महारङ्गनाम,ma·hā·raṅ·ga·nā·ma

      Kaṇhā mahāraṅganāma,

      Black, orange, beige,

1525. 1525

      अच्छिन्नदसिकाac·chin·na·da·si·kā तथा।ta·thā

      acchinnadasikā tathā.

      So uncut borders.

1526. 1526

      दीघपुप्फफणदसा,dī·gha·pup·pha·pha·ṇa·da·sā

      Dīghapupphaphaṇadasā,

      Long, floral, snake’s hood borders,

1527. 1527

      कञ्चुतिरीटवेठनं;kañ·cu·ti·rī·ṭa·ve·ṭha·naṃ

      kañcutirīṭaveṭhanaṁ;

      Jacket, Lodh tree, turban;

1528. 1528

      अनुप्पन्नेa·nup·pan·ne पक्कमति,pak·ka·ma·ti

      Anuppanne pakkamati,

      Not yet offered, he left,

1529. 1529

      सङ्घोsaṅ·gho भिज्जतिbhij·ja·ti तावदे।tā·va·de

      saṅgho bhijjati tāvade.

      The Sangha is divided just then.

1530. 1530

      पक्खेpak·khe ददन्तिda·dan·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa

      Pakkhe dadanti saṅghassa,

      They give to one side, to the Sangha,

1531. 1531

      आयस्माā·yas·mā रेवतोre·va·to पहि;pa·hi

      āyasmā revato pahi;

      Venerable Revata sent;

1532. 1532

      विस्सासगाहाधिट्ठाति,vis·sā·sa·gā·hā·dhiṭ·ṭhā·ti

      Vissāsagāhādhiṭṭhāti,

      Taking on trust, determined,

1533. 1533

      अट्ठaṭ·ṭha चीवरमातिकाति।cī·va·ra·mā·ti·kā·ti

      aṭṭha cīvaramātikāti.

      Eight key phrases on robes.”

1534. 1534

      इमम्हिi·mam·hi खन्धकेkhan·dha·ke वत्थूvat·thū छन्नवुति।chan·na·vu·ti

      Imamhi khandhake vatthū channavuti.

      In this chapter there are ninety-six topics.

1535. 1535

      चीवरक्खन्धकोcī·va·rak·khan·dha·ko निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

      Cīvarakkhandhako niṭṭhito.

      The chapter on robes is finished.

Sources. Sanskrit: Satyavedaḥ, the New Testament in Sanskrit (Calcutta Baptist Missionaries, 1851; J. Wenger’s revision of W. Carey’s version). Digital text © 2018 SanskritBible.in, via eBible.org, licensed CC BY-SA 4.0; changed here: arranged by verse and every word linked to the dictionary (links made automatically). Old Testament Sanskrit: the Old Testament in Sanskrit, Calcutta Baptist Mission Press, 1848–1852 (public domain), read by OCR from the Internet Archive scans of the Boston University School of Theology copy; unproofread, with machine clean-up only. Pāli Canon: Mahāsaṅgīti Tipiṭaka Buddhavasse 2500 (based on the Vipassana Research Institute’s Chaṭṭha Saṅgāyana edition), from SuttaCentral bilara-data, CC0; Devanagari and pronunciation made automatically from the Roman text. Pāli English: Bhikkhu Sujato (suttas) and Bhikkhu Brahmali (Vinaya), SuttaCentral, CC0. Pāli word meanings: the Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary (Rhys Davids & Stede), corrected reprint © The Pali Text Society, CC BY-NC 3.0, digital text from BuddhaDust; word matching automatic. English: King James Version (1769), public domain; words the translators added are in italics. Word meanings and pronunciations: Monier-Williams, Sanskrit–English Dictionary (1872), via this site’s Sanskrit dictionary (CC BY-SA 4.0); English↔Sanskrit word matches made automatically and may need checking.